digitalYEWFLO Series Vortex Flowmeter FOUNDATION Fieldbus Communication Type

IM01F06F00-01EN 010

Yokogawa Electric Corporation

digitalYEWFLO Series Vortex Flowmeter FOUNDATION Fieldbus ...

This manual describes only those topics that are required for operation of the F OUNDATION Fieldbus communication type. For other topics, please read User’s Manual for vortex flowmeter (IM 01F06A00-01EN). Regarding identical items, this manual has priority over IM 01F06A00-01EN. •Regarding This Manual

digitalYEWFLO Series Vortex Flowmeter FOUNDATION...

This manual describes only those topics that are required for operation of the FOUNDATION Fieldbus communication type. For other topics, please read User’s...

digitalYEWFLO Series Vortex Flowmeter FOUNDATION ...

11 lug 2021 — instruction manual for each host. No other details ... According to the instructions given in Section 5.3 ... 2052 BASE TEMP. 15 (Note 5).

• Browser built in viewer
• PDF Viewer
• Universal Document Viewer
• Google Docs View
• Google Drive View
• Download Document [pdf]
Not Your Device? Search For Manuals / Datasheets:



File Info : application/pdf, 169 Pages, 5.26MB

Document Document

User's Manual

digitalYEWFLO Series Vortex Flowmeter FOUNDATION Fieldbus Communication Type
IM 01F06F00-01EN

IM 01F06F00-01EN
10th Edition

Toc-1
digitalYEWFLO Series Vortex Flowmeter FOUNDATION Fieldbus Communication Type
IM 01F06F00-01EN 10th Edition

Contents

1. INTRODUCTION......................................................................................... 1-1

1.1

Using This Instrument Safety........................................................................... 1-2

1.2

Warranty.............................................................................................................. 1-3

1.3

ATEX Documentation........................................................................................ 1-4

2. AMPLIFIER FOR FIELDBUS COMMUNICATION.................................... 2-1

3. ABOUT FIELDBUS.................................................................................... 3-1

3.1

Outline................................................................................................................. 3-1

3.2

Internal Structure of digitalYEWFLO............................................................... 3-1

3.2.1 System/Network Management VFD................................................... 3-1

3.2.2 Function Block VFD............................................................................ 3-1

3.3

Logical Structure of Each Block...................................................................... 3-2

3.4

Wiring System Configuration........................................................................... 3-2

4. GETTING STARTED.................................................................................. 4-1

4.1

Connection of Devices...................................................................................... 4-1

4.2

Host Setting........................................................................................................ 4-2

4.3

Power-on of digitalYEWFLO and Bus............................................................. 4-2

4.4

Integration of DD................................................................................................ 4-3

4.5

Reading the Parameters.................................................................................... 4-3

4.6

Continuous Record of Values........................................................................... 4-3

4.7

Generation of Alarm........................................................................................... 4-4

5. CONFIGURATION...................................................................................... 5-1

5.1

Network Design.................................................................................................. 5-1

5.2

Network Definition............................................................................................. 5-1

5.3

Function Block Link Definitions....................................................................... 5-2

5.4

Setting of Tags and Addresses............................................................................... 5-3

5.5

Communication Setting.................................................................................... 5-4

5.5.1 VCR Setting........................................................................................ 5-4

5.5.2 Function Block Execution Control....................................................... 5-5

5.6

Block Setting...................................................................................................... 5-6

5.6.1 Link Objects........................................................................................ 5-6

5.6.2 Trend Objects...................................................................................... 5-6

5.6.3 View Objects....................................................................................... 5-7

5.6.4 Function Block Parameters................................................................ 5-7

10th Edition: Aug. 2019 (KP) All Rights Reserved, Copyright © 2003, Yokogawa Electric Corporation

IM 01F06F00-01EN

Toc-2

6. EXPLANATION OF BASIC ITEMS............................................................ 6-1

6.1

Setting and Changing Parameters for the Whole Process........................... 6-1

6.2

Transducer Block Parameters.......................................................................... 6-2

6.3

AI Function Block Parameters.......................................................................... 6-4

6.4

Parameters of DI Function Block..................................................................... 6-6

6.5

Integral LCD Indicator....................................................................................... 6-6

7. IN-PROCESS OPERATION....................................................................... 7-1

7.1

Mode Transition................................................................................................. 7-1

7.2

Generation of Alarm........................................................................................... 7-1

7.2.1 Indication of Alarm.............................................................................. 7-1

7.2.2 Alarms and Events.............................................................................. 7-3

7.3

Simulation Function.......................................................................................... 7-3

8. DEVICE STATUS........................................................................................ 8-1

9. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS................................................................... 9-1

9.1

Standard Specifications.................................................................................... 9-1

9.2

Model and Suffix Codes.................................................................................... 9-3

9.3

Optional Specifications..................................................................................... 9-4

10. EXPLOSION PROTECTED TYPE INSTRUMENT.................................. 10-1

10.1 ATEX.................................................................................................................. 10-1

10.2 FM...................................................................................................................... 10-5

10.3 IECEx................................................................................................................. 10-9

10.4 CSA.................................................................................................................. 10-11

10.5 TIIS...................................................................................................................10-13

APPENDIX 1. LIST OF PARAMETERS FOR EACH BLOCK OF digitalYEWFLO................................................A1-1

A1.1 Resource Block..................................................................................................... A1-1

A1.2 Al Function Block.................................................................................................. A1-3

A1.3 Transducer Block.................................................................................................. A1-6

A1.4 DI Function Block.................................................................................................A1-11

APPENDIX 2. APPLICATION, SETTING AND CHANGE OF BASIC PARAMETERS.........................................................................................A2-1

A2.1 Applications and Selection of Basic Parameters.............................................. A2-1

A2.2 Setting and Change of Basic Parameters............................................................................................ A2-2

A2.3 Setting the AI Function Blocks............................................................................ A2-2

A2.4 Setting the Transducer Block.............................................................................. A2-4

A2.5 Setting the DI Function Blocks............................................................................ A2-6

APPENDIX 3. OPERATION OF EACH PARAMETER IN FAILURE MODE....A3-1

APPENDIX 4. FUNCTION DIAGRAMS OF FUNCTION BLOCKS..................A4-1

A4.1 AI Function Block............................................................................................ A4-1

A4.2 DI Function Block............................................................................................ A4-1

IM 01F06F00-01EN

Toc-3
APPENDIX 5. INTEGRATOR (IT) BLOCK........................................................A5-1
A5.1 Schematic Diagram of Integrator Block ...................................................... A5-1 A5.2 Input Process Section.................................................................................... A5-2
A5.2.1 Determining Input Value Statuses....................................................A5-2 A5.2.2 Converting the Rate..........................................................................A5-2 A5.2.3 Converting Accumulation..................................................................A5-3 A5.2.4 Determining the Input Flow Direction...............................................A5-3 A5.3 Adder................................................................................................................ A5-4 A5.3.1 Status of Value after Addition............................................................A5-4 A5.3.2 Addition.............................................................................................A5-4 A5.4 Integrator......................................................................................................... A5-4 A5.5 Output Process............................................................................................... A5-6 A5.5.1 Status Determination........................................................................A5-6 A5.5.2 Determining the Output Value...........................................................A5-7 A5.5.3 Mode Handling .................................................................................A5-8 A5.6 Reset................................................................................................................. A5-8 A5.6.1 Reset Trigger....................................................................................A5-8 A5.6.2 Reset Timing.....................................................................................A5-8 A5.6.3 Reset Process...................................................................................A5-9 A5.7 List of Integrator Block Parameters............................................................ A5-10
APPENDIX 6. Enhanced ARITHMETIC (AR) BLOCK ....................................A6-1
A6.1 Schematic Diagram of Arithmetic Block .................................................... A6-1 A6.2 Input Section ................................................................................................... A6-2
A6.2.1 Main Inputs .......................................................................................A6-2 A6.2.2 Auxiliary Inputs .................................................................................A6-2 A6.2.3 INPUT_OPTS ..................................................................................A6-3 A6.2.4 Relationship between the Main Inputs and PV ................................A6-3 A6.3 Computation Section ..................................................................................... A6-4 A6.3.1 Computing Equations ......................................................................A6-4 A6.3.2 Enhanced Computing Equations .....................................................A6-4 A6.3.3 Compensated Values .......................................................................A6-5 A6.3.4 Average Calculation .........................................................................A6-5 A6.4 Output Section ............................................................................................... A6-5 A6.4.1 Mode Handling .................................................................................A6-6 A6.4.2 Status Handling ................................................................................A6-6 A6.5 List of the Arithmetic Block Parameters...................................................... A6-7 A6.6 Example of Connection.................................................................................. A6-9 A6.7 Setting Procedure of the Mass Flow Rate Calculation............................. A6-10
IM 01F06F00-01EN

Toc-4
APPENDIX 7. LINK MASTER FUNCTIONS.....................................................A7-1
A7.1 Link Active Scheduler.................................................................................... A7-1 A7.2 Link Master...................................................................................................... A7-1 A7.3 Transfer of LAS............................................................................................... A7-2 A7.4 LM Functions................................................................................................... A7-3 A7.5 LM Parameters................................................................................................ A7-4
A7.5.1 LM Parameter List.............................................................................A7-4 A7.5.2 Descriptions for LM Parameters.......................................................A7-6 A7.6 Trouble Shooting............................................................................................ A7-8
APPENDIX 8. PID BLOCK.................................................................................A8-1
A8.1 Function Diagram........................................................................................... A8-1 A8.2 Functions of PID Block................................................................................... A8-1 A8.3 Parameters of PID Block................................................................................ A8-2 A8.4 PID Computation Details................................................................................ A8-4 A8.5 Control Output................................................................................................. A8-4 A8.6 Direction of Control Action............................................................................ A8-4 A8.7 Control Action Bypass................................................................................... A8-5 A8.8 Feed-forward................................................................................................... A8-5 A8.9 Block Modes.................................................................................................... A8-5 A8.10 Bumpless Transfer.......................................................................................... A8-6 A8.11 Setpoint Limiters............................................................................................. A8-6
A8.11.1 When PID Block is in AUTO Mode...................................................A8-6 A8.11.2 When PID Block is in CAS or RCAS Mode......................................A8-6 A8.12 External-output Tracking............................................................................... A8-7 A8.13 Measured-value Tracking............................................................................... A8-7 A8.14 Initialization and Manual Fallback (IMAN).................................................... A8-7 A8.15 Manual Fallback.............................................................................................. A8-8 A8.16 Auto Fallback................................................................................................... A8-8 A8.17 Mode Shedding upon Computer Failure...................................................... A8-8 A8.18 Alarms.............................................................................................................. A8-9 A8.18.1 Block Alarm (BLOCK_ALM)..............................................................A8-9 A8.18.2 Process Alarms.................................................................................A8-9 A8.19 Example of Block Connections.............................................................................. A8-10
APPENDIX 9. DD MENU....................................................................................A9-1 APPENDIX 10. METHOD.................................................................................A10-1
A10.1 Transducer Block.......................................................................................... A10-1 A10.2 Enhanced AR Block...................................................................................... A10-5
IM 01F06F00-01EN

Toc-5
APPENDIX 11. SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD (Option /EE)...............................A11-1
A11.1 Benefits of Software Download....................................................................A11-1 A11.2 Specifications.................................................................................................A11-1 A11.3 Preparations for Software Downloading.....................................................A11-1 A11.4 Software Download Sequence.....................................................................A11-2 A11.5 Download Files...............................................................................................A11-2 A11.6 Steps after Activating a Field Device...........................................................A11-3 A11.7 Troubleshooting.............................................................................................A11-4 A11.8 Resource Block's Parameters Relating to Software Download...............A11-4 A11.9 System/Network Management VFD Parameters Relating to Software
Download........................................................................................................A11-6 A11.9.1 Parameter List.................................................................................A11-6 A11.9.2 Descriptions for Parameters...........................................................A11-7
APPENDIX 12. DEVICEVIEWER WINDOW EXECUTED FROM PRM (Plant Resource Manager)...........................................................A12-1
Revision Information
IM 01F06F00-01EN

1. INTRODUCTION

<1. INTRODUCTION>

1-1

Thank you for purchasing FOUNDATION Fieldbus communication type of digitalYEWFLO vortex flowmeter. To ensure correct use of the instrument, please read this manual thoroughly and fully understand how to operate the instrument before operating it.
This manual describes only those topics that are required for operation of the FOUNDATION Fieldbus communication type. For other topics, please read User's Manual for vortex flowmeter (IM 01F06A00-01EN). Regarding identical items, this manual has priority over IM 01F06A00-01EN.
 Regarding This Manual
· This manual should be provided to the end user.
· The contents of this manual may be changed without prior notice.
· All rights are reserved. No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form without Yokogawa's written permission.
· Yokogawa makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this material, including, but not limited to, implied warranties of merchantability and suitability for a particular purpose.
· All reasonable effort has been made to ensure the accuracy of the contents of this manual. However, if any errors or omissions are found, please inform Yokogawa.
· The specifications covered by this manual are limited to those for the standard type under the specified model number break-down and do not cover custom-made instruments.
· Please note that this manual may not be revised for any specification changes, construction changes or operating part changes that are not considered to affect function or performance.
· Yokogawa assumes no responsibilities for this product except as stated in the warranty.
· If the customer or any third party is harmed by the use of this product, Yokogawa assumes no responsibility for any such harm owing to any defects in the product which were not predictable, or for any indirect damages.

 Safety and Modification Precautions · The following general safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation, service, and repair of this instrument. Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific WARNINGS given elsewhere in this manual violates safety standards of design, manufacture, and intended use of the instrument. Yokogawa assumes no liability for the customer's failure to comply with these requirements. If this instrument is used in a manner not specified in this manual, the protection provided by this instrument may be impaired. · Yokogawa will not be liable for malfunctions or damage resulting from any modification made to this instrument by the customer. · The following safety symbol marks are used in this manual and instrument.
WARNING
A WARNING sign denotes a hazard. It calls attention to procedure, practice, condition or the like, which, if not correctly performed or adhered to, could result in injury or death of personnel.
CAUTION
A CAUTION sign denotes a hazard. It calls attention to procedure, practice, condition or the like, which, if not correctly performed or adhered to, could result in damage to or destruction of the product.
IMPORTANT
An IMPORTANT sign denotes that attention is required to avoid damage to the instrument or system failure.
NOTE
A NOTE sign denotes information necessary for essential understanding of operation and features.

IM 01F06F00-01EN

1.1 Using This Instrument Safety
(1) Installation
WARNING
· Installation of the vortex flowmeter must be performed by expert engineer or skilled personnel. No operator shall be permitted to perform procedures relating to installation.
· The vortex flowmeter must be installed within the specification conditions.
· The vortex flowmeter is a heavy instrument. Be careful that no damage is caused to personnel through accidentally dropping it, or by exerting excessive force on the vortex flowmeter. When moving the vortex flowmeter, always use a trolley and have at least two people carry it.
· When the vortex flowmeter is processing hot fluids, the instrument itself may become extremely hot. Take sufficient care not to get burnt.
· Where the fluid being processed is a toxic substance, avoid contact with the fluid and avoid inhaling any residual gas, even after the instrument has been taken off the piping line for maintenance and so forth.
· Do not open the cover in wet weather or humid environment. When the cover is open, stated enclosure protection is not applicable.
· Do not apply excessive weight, for example, a person stepping on the vortex flowmeter.
· All procedures relating to installation must comply with the electrical code of the country where it is used.
(2) Wiring
WARNING
· The wiring of the vortex flowmeter must be performed by expert engineer or skilled personnel. No operator shall be permitted to perform procedures relating to wiring.
· When connecting the wiring, check that the supply voltage is within the range of the voltage specified for this instrument before connecting the power cable. In addition, check that no voltage is applied to the power cable before connecting the wiring.

<1. INTRODUCTION>

1-2

(3) Operation

WARNING
· Do not open the cover in wet weather or humid environment. When the cover is open, stated enclosure protection is not applicable.
· When opening the cover, wait for more than 3 minutes after turning off the power.

(4) Maintenance
WARNING
· Maintenance of the vortex flowmeter should be performed by the trained personnel having knowledge of safety standard. No operator shall be permitted to perform any operations relating to maintenance.
· Do not open the cover in wet weather or humid environment. When the cover is open, stated enclosure protection is not applicable.
· When opening the cover, wait for more than 3 minutes after turning off the power.
· Always conform to maintenance procedures outlined in this manual. If necessary, contact Yokogawa.

(5) Explosion Protected Type Instrument
WARNING
· The instruments are products which have been certified as explosion proof type instruments. Strict limitations are applied to the structures, installation locations, external wiring work, maintenance and repairs, etc. of these instruments. Sufficient care must be taken, as any violation of the limitations may cause dangerous situations. Be sure to read Chapter 10 "EXPLOSION PROTECTED TYPE INSTRUMENT" before handling the instruments. For TIIS flameproof type instruments, be sure to read "INSTALLATION AND OPERATING PRECAUTIONS FOR TIIS FLAMEPROOF EQUIPMENT" at the end of manual for the vortex flowmeter (IM 01F06A00-01EN).
· Only trained persons use this instrument in the industrial location.
· Take care not to generate mechanical spark when access to the instrument and peripheral devices in hazardous locations.

IM 01F06F00-01EN

1.2 Warranty
· The terms of this instrument that are guaranteed are described in the quotation. We will make any repairs that may become necessary during the guaranteed term free of charge.
· Please contact our sales office if this instrument requires repair.
· If the instrument is faulty, contact us with concrete details about the problem and the length of time it has been faulty, and state the model and serial number. We would appreciate the inclusion of drawings or additional information.
· The results of our examination will determine whether the meter will be repaired free of charge or on an at-cost basis.
 The guarantee will not apply in the following cases:
· Damage due to negligence or insufficient maintenance on the part of the customer.
· Problems or damage resulting from handling, operation or storage that violates the intended use and specifications.
· Problems that result from using or performing maintenance on the instrument in a location that does not comply with the installation location specified by Yokogawa.
· Problems or damage resulting from repairs or modifications not performed by Yokogawa or someone authorized by Yokogawa.
· Problems or damage resulting from inappropriate reinstallation after delivery.
· Problems or damage resulting from disasters such as fires, earthquakes, storms, floods, or lightning strikes and external causes.
 Trademarks:
· `digitalYEWFLO', `DY', `DYA', `DYC' and `BRAIN TERMINAL' are registered trademarks of Yokogawa Electric Corporation. Company names and product names used in this material are registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective owners.
· In this manual, trademarks or registered trademarks are not marked with TM or ®.
· "FOUNDATION" in "FOUNDATION Fieldbus" is a registered trademark of FieldComm Group.

<1. INTRODUCTION>

1-3

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<1. INTRODUCTION>

1-4

1.3 ATEX Documentation
This is only applicable to the countries in European Union.

GB

SK

CZ DK

I

LT

E

LV

EST NL
PL SF
SLO P
H F
BG
D RO
S M
GR

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<2. AMPLIFIER FOR FIELDBUS COMMUNICATION>

2-1

2. AMPLIFIER FOR FIELDBUS COMMUNICATION

Read IM 01F06A00-01EN for the details of the amplifier. This section encompasses topics applicable to only the Fieldbus communication type.
(1) The Fieldbus communication type has no local key access function.
(2) The Fieldbus communication type has no BT200 (BRAIN TERMINAL) connection pin.
(3) The Fieldbus communication type has a simulation function. The SIMULATE_ENABLE switch is mounted on the amplifier. Read Section 7.3 "Simulation Function" for details of the simulation function.

Amplifier unit

SIMULATE_ENABLE switch

1 2

Figure 2.1

F0201.ai
Amplifier for Fieldbus Communication

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<3. ABOUT FIELDBUS>

3-1

3. ABOUT FIELDBUS

3.1 Outline
Fieldbus is a bi-directional digital communication protocol for field devices, which offers an advancement in implementation technologies for process control systems and is widely employed by numerous field devices. The Fieldbus communication type of the digitalYEWFLO employs the specification standardized by the Fieldbus FOUNDATION, and provides interoperability between Yokogawa devices and those produced by other manufacturers. Featuring two AI and two DI function blocks in each, the Fieldbus communication type's software enables a flexible instrumentation system to be implemented. For information on other features, engineering, design, construction work, startup and maintenance of Fieldbus, read "Fieldbus Technical Information" (TI 38K03A01-01E).
3.2 Internal Structure of digitalYEWFLO
Each digitalYEWFLO contains two Virtual Field Devices (VFDs) that share the following functions.
3.2.1 System/Network Management VFD
· Sets node addresses and Physical Device tags (PD Tag) necessary for communication.
· Controls the execution of function blocks. · Manages operation parameters and
communication resources (Virtual Communication Relationship: VCR).

3.2.2 Function Block VFD
(1) Resource (RS) block · Manages the status of digitalYEWFLO hardware. · Automatically informs the host of any detected faults or other problems.
(2) Transducer (TR) block · Converts the flow sensor output to the volumetric flow rate signal and transfers to an AI function block (AI1). · With the option /MV - Converts temperature sensor output to the process fluid temperature and calculates the fluid density. - Calculates the mass flow rate from the fluid density thus obtained and the volumetric flow rate obtained with the flow sensor. - Transfers these calculation results to AI function blocks. · Transfers limit switch signals to DI function blocks.
(3) AI function blocks (three) · Output flowrate and temperature. · Condition raw data from the TR block. · Carry out scaling and damping (with a firstorder lag), and allow input simulation.
(4) DI function blocks (two) · Limit switches for the flow rate and temperature (option /MV).
(5) IT function block (one) · Accumulate given values.
(6) AR function block (one) · Calculate input values.
(7) PID function block (option /LC1) · Performs the PID computation based on the deviation of the measured value from the setpoint.

IM 01F06F00-01EN

OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT
Output

3.3 Logical Structure of Each Block

digital YEWFLO

System/network management VFD

PD tag Node address

Communication parameters
VCR

Function block execution schedule

Link master

Function block VFD

Temp. sensor (option /MV)

PID function block (option /LC1)

IT function block

AR function block
DI2 function block

DI1 function block

Sensor input

Transducer block

Temp. signal (option
/MV)

AI3 function block
AI2 function block (outputting the
temperature for a model with the option
/MV)

Sensor input

Block tag

AI1 function block

Flow rate Block tag

Parameters signal Parameters

OUT

Resource block

Block tag Parameters

Flow sensor

Figure 3.1

F0301.ai
Logical Structure of Each Block

Various parameters, the node address, and the PD tag shown in Figure 3.1 must be set before using the device. Read Chapter 4 and onward for the setting procedures.

3.4 Wiring System Configuration
The number of devices that can be connected to a single bus and the cable length vary depending on system design. When constructing systems, both the basic and overall design must be carefully considered to achieve optimal performance.

<3. ABOUT FIELDBUS>

3-2

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<4. GETTING STARTED>

4-1

4. GETTING STARTED

Fieldbus is fully dependent upon digital communication protocol and differs in operation from conventional 4 to 20 mA transmission and the BRAIN communication protocol. It is recommended that novice users use fieldbus devices in accordance with the procedures described in this section. The procedures assume that fieldbus devices will be set up on a bench or in an instrument shop.

4.1 Connection of Devices
The following instruments are required for use with Fieldbus devices:
· Power supply: Fieldbus requires a dedicated power supply. It is recommended that current capacity be well over the total value of the maximum current consumed by all devices (including the host). Conventional DC current cannot be used as is.
· Terminator: Fieldbus requires two terminators. Read the supplier for details of terminators that are attached to the host.
· Field devices: Connect your Fieldbus communication type digitalYEWFLO to a fieldbus. Two or more digitalYEWFLOs and other field devices can be connected. For the terminal assignment on the digitalYEWFLO, read Table 4.1.

Table 4.1

Terminal Connection for digitalYEWFLO

Terminal Symbols SUPPLY + SUPPLY ­

Description Fieldbus Communication Signal Terminals
Grounding Terminal

· Host:
Used for accessing field devices. A dedicated host (such as DCS) is used for an instrumentation line while dedicated communication tools are used for experimental purposes. For operation of the host, read the instruction manual for each host. No other details on the host are given in this manual.

· Cable:
Used for connecting devices. Read "Fieldbus Technical Information" (TI 38K03A01-01E) for details of instrumentation cabling. For laboratory or other experimental use, a twisted pair cable two to three meters in length with a cross section of 0.9 mm2 or more and a cycle period of within 5 cm (2 inches) may be used. Termination processing depends on the type of device being deployed. For the digitalYEWFLO, use terminal lugs applicable to M4 screw terminals. Some hosts require a connector.

Read Yokogawa when making arrangements to purchase the recommended equipment. Connect the devices as shown in Figure 4.1. Connect the terminators at both ends of the trunk, with a minimum length of the spur laid for connection. The polarity of signal and power must be maintained.

Fieldbus power supply
Terminator

digitalYEWFLO
+­

HOST

Figure 4.1 Device Connection

Terminator
F0401.ai

IMPORTANT
Connecting a Fieldbus configuration tool to a loop with its existing host may cause communication data scrambling resulting in a functional disorder or a system failure. Disconnect the relevant control loop from the bus if necessary.

IM 01F06F00-01EN

4.2 Host Setting
To activate Fieldbus, the following settings are required for the host.

IMPORTANT
Do not turn off the power immediately after setting. When the parameters are saved to the EEPROM, the redundant processing is executed for the improvement of reliability. If the power is turned off within 60 seconds after setting is made, the modified parameters are not saved and the settings may return to the original values.

Table 4.2 Symbol
V (ST)
V (MID)
V (MRD)
V (FUN) V (NUN)

Operation Parameters

Parameter

Description and Settings

Slot-Time

Indicates the time necessary for immediate reply of the device. Unit of time is in octets (256 s). Set maximum specification for all devices. For digitalYEWFLO, set a value of 4 or greater.

Minimum-InterPDU-Delay

Minimum value of communication data intervals. Unit of time is in octets (256 s). Set the maximum specification for all devices. For digitalYEWFLO, set a value of 4 or greater.

Maximum-ReplyDelay

The worst case time elapsed until a reply is recorded. The unit is Slot-time; set the value so that V (MRD) x V (ST) is the maximum value of the specification for all devices. For digitalYEWFLO, the setting must be a value of 12 or greater.

First-Unpolled-Node Indicate the address next to the address range used by the host. Set 0x15 or greater.

Number-ofconsecutiveUnpolled-Node

Unused address range.

<4. GETTING STARTED>

4-2

0x00 0x0F 0x10 0x13 0x14 V(FUN)

Not used Bridge device
LM device Unused

V(NUN)

V(FUN)+V(NUN)

BASIC device

0xF7 0xF8

Default address

0xFB 0xFC

Portable device address 0xFF

Note 1: LM device: with bus control function (Link Master function) Note 2: BASIC device: without bus control function
F0402.ai

Figure 4.2 Available Address Range

4.3 Power-on of digitalYEWFLO and Bus
Turn on the power to the host, bus, and digitalYEWFLO. If any segments do not light, or if a current anomaly occurs, check the voltage of the power supply for the digitalYEWFLO. The device information, including PD tag, Node address, and Device ID, is described on the sheet attached to digitalYEWFLO. The device information is given in duplicate on this sheet. Using the host device display function, check that the digitalYEWFLO is in operation on the bus.

DEVICE INFORMATION
Device ID:5945430009XXXXXXXX PD Tag:XXXXXX Device Revision:X Node Address:0xXX Serial No.:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Physical Location: Note:
Our Device Description Files and Capabilities Files available at http://www.yokogawa.com/fld/ (English) http://www.yokogawa.co.jp/fld/ (Japanese)

DEVICE INFORMATION
Device ID:5945430009XXXXXXXX PD XXXXXX Device Revision:X Node Address:0xXX Serial No.:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Physical Location: Note:
Our Device Description Files and Capabilities Files available at http://www.yokogawa.com/fld/ (English) http://www.yokogawa.co.jp/fld/ (Japanese)

Figure 4.3

F0403.ai
Device Information Sheet Attached to digitalYEWFLO

IM 01F06F00-01EN

Unless otherwise specified, the following settings are in effect when shipped from the factory. If no digitalYEWFLO is detected, check the available address range. If the node address and PD Tag are not specified when ordering, default value is factory set. If two or more digitalYEWFLOs are connected at a time with default value, only one digitalYEWFLO will be detected from host as digitalYEWFLOs have the same initial address. Connect the digitalYEWFLOs one by one and set a unique address for each.
4.4 Integration of DD
If the host supports DD (Device Description), the DD of the digitalYEWFLO needs to be installed. Check if host has the following directory under its default DD directory.
594543 :the manufacturer number of Yokogawa Electric Corporation
0009 :the device number of digitalYEWFLO
If this directory is not found, the DD for the digitalYEWFLO has not yet been installed. Create this directory and copy the DD files (0m0n.ffo and 0m0n.sym to be supplied separately where m and n are numerals) to it. If you do not have the DD files for the digitalYEWFLO, you can download them from our web site. Visit the following web site. http://www.yokogawa.com/fld/
Once the DD is installed in the directory, the name and attribute of all parameters of the digitalYEWFLO are displayed.
Off-line configuration is possible using the capabilities file.

<4. GETTING STARTED>

4-3

NOTE
When using a capabilities file (CFF), make sure you use the right file for the intended device. The digitalYEWFLO is offered in two types in terms of capabilities:
· General type: AI function blocks (three), DI function blocks (two), AR function block (one), and IT function block (one).
· With the option /LC1: A PID function block
Using the wrong CFF file may result in an error when downloading the configured data to the device. Also, use the right DD files that accommodate the revision of the intended device.
4.5 Reading the Parameters
To read digitalYEWFLO parameters, select the AI block of the digitalYEWFLO from the host screen and read the OUT parameter. The current flow rate is displayed. Check that MODE_BLK of the function block and resource block is set to AUTO.
4.6 Continuous Record of Values
If the host has a function of continuously records the indications, use this function to list the indications (values). Depending on the host being used, it may be necessary to set the schedule of Publish (the function that transmits the indication on a periodic basis).

IM 01F06F00-01EN

4.7 Generation of Alarm
If the host is allowed to receive alarms, generation of an alarm can be attempted from the digitalYEWFLO. In this case, set the reception of alarms on the host side. The digitalYEWFLO's VCR-7 is factory-set for this purpose. For practical purposes, all alarms are placed in a disabled status; for this reason, it is recommended that you first use one of these alarms on a trial basis. Set the value of link object-3 (index 30002) as "0, 299, 0, 6, 0". Read Subsection 5.6.1 "Link Objects" for details. Since the LO_PRI parameter (index 4029) of the AI block is set to "0", try setting this value to "3". Select the Write function from the host in operation, specify an index or variable name, and write "3" to it. The LO_LIM parameter (index 4030) of the AI block determines the limit at which the lower bound alarm for the process value is given. In usual cases, a very small value is set to this limit. Set smaller value than 100% value of XD_SCALE (same unit). Since the flow rate is almost 0, a lower bound alarm is raised. Check that the alarm can be received at the host. When the alarm is confirmed, transmission of the alarm is suspended.

<4. GETTING STARTED>

4-4

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<5. CONFIGURATION>

5-1

5. CONFIGURATION

This chapter describes how to adapt the function and performance of the digitalYEWFLO to suit specific applications. Because multiple devices are connected to Fieldbus, it is important to carefully consider the device requirements and settings when configuring the system. The following steps must be taken.
(1) Network design Determines the devices to be connected to Fieldbus and checks the capacity of the power supply.
(2) Network definition Determines the PD tag and node addresses for all devices.
(3) Definition of combining function blocks Determines how function blocks are combined.
(4) Setting tags and addresses Sets the PD Tag and node addresses for each device.
(5) Communication setting Sets the link between communication parameters and function blocks.
(6) Block setting Sets the parameters for function blocks.
The following section describes in sequence each step of this procedure. The use of a dedicated configuration tool significantly simplifies this procedure. Read APPENDIX 7 "LINK MASTER FUNCTIONS" when the digitalYEWFLO is used as Link Master.
5.1 Network Design
Select the devices to be connected to the Fieldbus network. The following are essential for the operation of Fieldbus.
· Power supply Fieldbus requires a dedicated power supply. It is recommended that current capacity be well over the total value of the maximum current consumed by all devices (including the host). Conventional DC current cannot be used as power supply.

· Terminator Fieldbus requires two terminators. Read the supplier for details of terminators that are attached to the host.
· Field devices Connect the field devices necessary for instrumentation. The digitalYEWFLO has passed the interoperability test conducted by The Fieldbus Foundation. In order to properly start Fieldbus, it is recommended that the devices used satisfy the requirements of the above test.
· Host Used for accessing field devices. A minimum of one device with bus control function is needed.
· Cable Used for connecting devices. Read "Fieldbus Technical Information" (TI 38K03A01-01E) for details of instrumentation cabling. Provide a cable sufficiently long to connect all devices. For field branch cabling, use terminal boards or a connection box as required.
First, check the capacity of the power supply. The power supply capacity must be greater than the sum of the maximum current consumed by all devices to be connected to Fieldbus. For the digitalYEWFLO, the maximum current (power supply voltage: 9 to 32 VDC) is 15 mA. The cable used for the spur must be of the minimum possible length.
5.2 Network Definition
Before connection of devices with Fieldbus, define the Fieldbus network. Allocate PD tags and node addresses to all devices (excluding such passive devices as terminators). The PD tags are the same as conventional tag numbers assigned to devices. Up to 32 alphanumeric characters may be used for definition of the PD tag for each device. Use hyphens as delimiters as required.

IM 01F06F00-01EN

The node addresses are used to locate devices for communication purposes. Since a PD tag is too long a data value, the host substitutes the node addressed for PD tags in communication. Node addresses can be set to numbers in a range of decimal 20 to 247 (hexadecimal 14 to F7). Assign devices having link master functionality (i.e., LM devices) from the smallest address number (0x14) in order, and other devices (i.e., basic devices) from the largest (0xF7). Assign an address in the range for basic devices to a digitalYEWFLO. Only when using a digitalYEWFLO with LM function as an LM device, assign an address in the range for LM devices to it. These address ranges are determined by the following parameters.

Table 5.1 Symbol
V (FUN)
V (NUN)

Parameters for Setting Address Range

Parameters

Description

First-Unpolled-Node Indicates the address next to the address range used for the host or other LM device.

Number-ofconsecutiveUnpolled-Node

Unused address range

Any devices within an address range written as "Unused" in Figure 5.1 cannot join the fieldbus. Other address ranges are periodically scanned to find any devices newly joining the fieldbus. Do not widen the available address ranges unnecessarily; the fieldbus communication performance may be severely degraded.

0x00 00xx01F0 0x13 0x14 V(FUN)

Unused Bridge device
LM devices Unused

V(NUN)

V(FUN)+V(NUN)

Basic devices

0xF7 0xF8

Default addresses

0xFB 0xFC

Portable device addresses

0xFF

F0501.ai

Figure 5.1 Available Range of Node Addresses

<5. CONFIGURATION>

5-2

To ensure stable operation of Fieldbus, determine the operation parameters and set them to the LM devices. While the parameters in Table 5.2 are to be set, the worst-case value of all the devices to be connected to the same Fieldbus must be used. Read the specification of each device for details.

Table 5.2 Symbol
V (ST)
V (MID)
V (MRD)

Operation Parameter Values of digitalYEWFLO to be Set to LM Device

Parameters Slot-Time
Minimum-InterPDU-Delay
MaximumResponse-Delay

Description and Settings
Indicates the time necessary for immediate reply of the device. Unit of time is in octets (256 s). Set maximum specification for all devices. For a digitalYEWFLO, set a value of 4 or greater.
Minimum value of communication data intervals. Unit of time is in octets (256 s). Set the maximum specification for all devices. For a digitalYEWFLO, set a value of 4 or greater.
The worst case time elapsed until a reply is recorded. The unit is Slot-time; set the value so that V (MRD) x V (ST) is the maximum value of the specification for all devices. For a digitalYEWFLO, value of V(MRD) x V (ST) must be 12 or greater.

5.3 Function Block Link Definitions
Link the input/output parameters of function blocks to each other as necessary. For a digitalYEWFLO, the output parameters of three AI blocks (OUTs), those of two DI blocks (OUT_Ds), input/output parameters of AR block, IT block and optional PID block (option /LC1) should be linked to parameters of different function blocks. Specifically, link settings must be written to the link object in the digitalYEWFLO. For details, read Section 5.6 "Block Setting." It is also possible to read values from the host at appropriate intervals instead of linking the outputs of digitalYEWFLO's function blocks to other blocks. The linked blocks need to be executed synchronously with other blocks and the communication schedule. In this case, change the schedule of the digitalYEWFLO according to Table 5.3, in which factory settings are shown in parentheses.

IM 01F06F00-01EN

Table 5.3

Function Block Execution Schedule of the digitalYEWFLO

Index

Parameters

Setting (Factory Setting in Parentheses)

269 (SM) MACROCYCLE_ DURATION

Repetition period of control or measurement, i.e., macrocycle; to be set as a multiple of 1/32 ms (32000 = 1 second)

276 (SM) FB_START_ENTRY.1

Start time of the AI1 block represented as the elapsed time from the start of each macrocycle; to be set as a multiple of 1/32 ms (0 = 0 ms)

277 (SM) FB_START_ENTRY.2

Start time of the PID block (optional) represented as the elapsed time from the start of each macrocycle; to be set as a multiple of 1/32 ms (9600 = 300 ms)

278 (SM) FB_START_ENTRY.3 to Not set. to FB_START_ENTRY.14
289 (SM)

A maximum of 29 ms is taken for execution of each AI block. Arrange the communication schedule for an AI block's data that is to be transferred to its downstream block in such a way that it starts after a lapse of longer than 30 ms. Figure 5.3 shows typical function block and communication schedules for the loop shown in Figure 5.2.

FIC100

digitalYEWFLO #1
FI100

FIC200

digitalYEWFLO #2
FI200

FC100
F0502.ai

Figure 5.2

Example of Loop Connecting Function Blocks of Two digitalYEWFLOs with Other Devices

<5. CONFIGURATION>

5-3

Macrocycle (Control Period)

FI103 FC100 FC200

FI100 OUT

IN FIC100

BKCAL_IN

FI200 Function
Block Schedule
Communication Schedule

FI200 OUT

CAS_IN BKCAL_OUT

FIC200 IN

FC100

BKCAL_IN BKCAL_OUT

Unscheduled Communication
Scheduled Communication
F0503.ai

Figure 5.3 Function Block Schedule and Communication Schedule

When the control period (macrocycle) is set to more than 4 seconds, set the following interval to be more than 1% of the control period.
- Interval between "end of block execution" and "start of sending CD from LAS"
- Interval between "end of block execution" and "start of the next block execution"

5.4 Setting of Tags and Addresses
This section describes the steps in the procedure to set the PD tags and node address in the digitalYEWFLO. There are three states of Fieldbus devices as shown in Figure 5.4, and if the state is other than the lowest SM_OPERATIONAL state, no function block is executed. Whenever you have changed the PD tag or address of a digitalYEWFLO, transfer its state to SM_ OPERATIONAL.

UNINITIALIZED (No tag nor address is set)

Tag clear

Tag setting

INITIALIZED (Only tag is set)

Address clear

Address setting

SM_OPERATIONAL (Tag and address are retained, and the function block can be executed.)

F0504.ai

Figure 5.4 Status Transition by Setting PD Tag and Node Address

IM 01F06F00-01EN

In each digitalYEWFLO, the PD tag and node address are set to "FT1003" and 242 (hexadecimal F2), respectively, before shipment from the factory unless otherwise specified. To change only the node address, clear the address once and then set a new node address. To set the PD tag, first clear the node address and clear the PD tag, then set the PD tag and node address again. Devices whose node address have been cleared will await at the default address (randomly chosen from a range of 248 to 251, or from hexadecimal F8 to FB). At the same time, it is necessary to specify the device ID in order to correctly specify the device. The device ID of the YF100 is 5945430009xxxxxxxx. (The xxxxxxxx at the end of the above device ID is a total of 8 alphanumeric characters. Available characters are as follws.)
ABCDEF 0123456789

<5. CONFIGURATION>

5-4

5.5 Communication Setting
To set the communication function, it is necessary to change the database residing in SM (System Management)-VFD.
5.5.1 VCR Setting
Set VCR (Virtual Communication Relationship), which specifies the called party for communication and resources. Each digitalYEWFLO has 33 VCRs whose application can be changed, except for the first VCR, which is used for management. Each digitalYEWFLO has VCRs of four types: Server (QUB) VCR
A server responds to requests from a host. This communication needs data exchange. This type of communication is called QUB (Queued Usertriggered Bidirectional) VCR. Source (QUU) VCR A source multicasts alarms or trends to other devices. This type of communication is called QUU (Queued User-triggered Unidirectional) VCR. Publisher (BNU) VCR A publisher multicasts outputs of the AI blocks, DI blocks, AR block, IT block and PID block to other function blocks. This type of communication is called BNU (Buffered Network-triggered Unidirectional) VCR. Subscriber (BNU) VCR A subscriber receives output of another function block(s) by AR block, IT block and PID block.
Each VCR has the parameters listed in Table 5.4. Parameters must be changed together for each VCR because modification for each parameter may cause a contradiction.

IM 01F06F00-01EN

Table 5.4 VCR Static Entry

Subindex

Parameter

1 FasArTypeAndRole

2 FasDllLocalAddr
3 FasDllConfigured RemoteAddr
4 FasDllSDAP
5 FasDllMaxConfirm DelayOnConnect
6 FasDllMaxConfirm DelayOnData
7 FasDllMaxDlsduSize
8 FasDllResidual ActivitySupported
9 FasDllTimelinessClass 10 FasDllPublisherTime
WindowSize 11 FasDllPublisher
SynchronizaingDlcep 12 FasDllSubscriberTime
WindowSize 13 FasDllSubscriber
SynchronizationDlcep

Description
Indicates the type and role of communication (VCR). The following 4 types are used for the digitalYEWFLO. 0x32: Server (Responds to
requests from host.) 0x44: Source (Transmits
alarm or trend.) 0x66: Publisher (Sends AI,
DI block output to other blocks.) 0x76: Subscriber (Receives output of other blocks by PID block.)
Sets the local address to specify a VCR in the digitalYEWFLO. A range of 20 to F7 in hexadecimal.
Sets the node address of the called party for communication and the address (DLSAP or DLCEP) used to specify VCR in that address. For DLSAP or DLCEP, a range of 20 to F7 in hexadecimal is used. Addresses in Subindex 2 and 3 need to be set to the same contents of the VCR as the called party (local and remote are reversed).
Specifies the quality of communication. Usually, one of the following types is set. 0x2B: Server 0x01: Source (Alert) 0x03: Source (Trend) 0x91: Publisher/Subscriber
To establish connection for communication, a maximum wait time for the called party's response is set in ms. Typical value is 60 seconds (60000).
For request of data, a maximum wait time for the called party's response is set in ms. Typical value is 60 secounds (60000).
Specifies maximum DL Service Data unit Size (DLSDU). Set 256 for Server and Trend VCR, and 64 for other VCRs.
Specifies whether connection is monitored. Set TRUE (0xff) for Server. This parameter is not used for other communication.
Not used for the digitalYEWFLO.
Not used for the digitalYEWFLO.
Not used for the digitalYEWFLO.
Not used for the digitalYEWFLO.
Not used for the digitalYEWFLO.

<5. CONFIGURATION>

5-5

Subindex

Parameter

14 FmsVfdId

15 FmsMaxOutstanding ServiceCalling
16 FmsMaxOutstanding ServiceCalled
17 FmsFeatures Supported

Description
Sets VFD for the digitalYEWFLO to be used.
0x1: System/network management VFD
0x1234: Function block VFD
Set 0 to Server. It is not used for other applications.
Set 1 to Server. It is not used for other applications.
Indicates the type of services in the application layer. In the digitalYEWFLO, it is automatically set according to specific applications.

These 33 VCRs are factory-set as shown in Table 5.5.

Table 5.5 VCR List

Index (SM) 293 294 295 296 297
298 299
300 301 to 325

VCR Number
1 2 3 4 5
6 7
8 9 to 33

Factory Setting
For system management (Fixed) Server (LocalAddr = 0xF3) Server (LocalAddr = 0xF4) Server (LocalAddr = 0xF7) Trend Source (LocalAddr = 0x07, Remote Address=0x111) Publisher (LocalAddr = 0x20) Alert Source (LocalAddr = 0x07, Remote Address=0x110) Server (LocalAddr = 0xF9) Not set

5.5.2 Function Block Execution Control
According to the instructions given in Section 5.3 "Function Block Link Definitions", set the execution cycle of the function blocks and schedule of execution.

IM 01F06F00-01EN

5.6 Block Setting
Set the parameter for function block VFD.
5.6.1 Link Objects
A link object combines the data voluntarily sent by the function block with the VCR. Each digitalYEWFLO has 40 link objects. A single link object specifies one combination. Each link object has the parameters listed in Table 5.6. Parameters must be changed together for each VCR because the modifications made to each parameter may cause inconsistent operation.

Table 5.6 Link Object Parameters

Subindex

Parameters

1 LocalIndex

2 VcrNumber

3 RemoteIndex 4 ServiceOperation

5 StaleCountLimit

Description
Sets the index of function block parameters to be combined; set "0" for Trend and Alert.
Sets the index of VCR to be combined. If set to "0", this link object is not used.
Not used in the digitalYEWFLO. Set to "0".
Set one of the following. Set only one each for link object for Alert or Trend. 0: Undefined 2: Publisher 3: Subscriber 6: Alert 7: Trend
Set the maximum number of consecutive stale input values which may be received before the input status is set to Bad. To avoid the unnecessary mode transition caused when the data is not correctly received by subscriber, set this parameter to "2" or more.

Link objects are not factory-set. Set link objects as shown in Table 5.7.

Table 5.7 Settings of Link Objects (example)

Index 30000 30001 30002 30003 to 30039

Link Object # 1 2 3
4 to 40

Settings(example) AI. OUT VCR#6 Trend VCR#5
Alert VCR#7 No used

<5. CONFIGURATION>

5-6

5.6.2 Trend Objects
It is possible to make settings so that a function block automatically transmits the trend. For this, each digitalYEWFLO has ten trend objects: eight for trends of analog parameters and two for discrete parameters. For each trend object, specify a single parameter, the trend of which is to be transmitted. Each trend object has the parameters listed in Table 5.8. For the first four parameters, setting is mandatory. Before writing parameter settings to a trend object, parameter WRITE_LOCK of the resource block must be modified to unlock the write-lock.

Table 5.8 Parameters for Trend Objects

Subindex

Parameters

1 Block Index

2 Parameter Relative Index

3 Sample Type
4 Sample Interval 5 Last Update 6 to 21 List of Status 21 to 37 List of Samples

Description
Sets the leading index of the function block that takes a trend.
Sets the index of parameters taking a trend by a value relative to the beginning of the function block. In the digitalYEWFLO, the following three types of trends are possible. 7: PV 8: OUT 19: FIELD_VAL
Specifies how trends are taken. Choose one of the following 2 types: 1: Sampled upon execution of
a function block. 2: The average value is
sampled.
Specifies sampling intervals in units of 1/32 ms. Set the integer multiple of the function block execution cycle.
The last sampling time.
Status part of a sampled parameter.
Data part of a sampled parameter.

Ten trend objects are not factory-set.

Table 5.9
Index 32000 to
32007 32008
32009

Trend Objects

Parameter TREND_FLT.1 to TREND_FLT.8 TREND_DIS.1
TREND_DIS.2

Factory Setting Not set.
Not set (these parameters are used with a DI block or optional PID block).

IM 01F06F00-01EN

System Management Information Base (SMIB)

Resource block

AI2 OUT Transducer
block AI1 OUT

Network Management Information Base (NMIB)

FBOD

DI2 DOI1UT OUT
Alert
Trend

Link object

#1

#3 #2

digital YEWFLO

VCR

#1 #2 #3 #4 #8 #6

#7 #5

DLSAP DLCEP

0xF8

0xF3

0xF4

0xF7

0xF9

0x20

Fieldbus Cable

0x07

Host 1

Host 2 Device

Figure 5.5

F0505.ai
Example of Default Configuration

5.6.3 View Objects
View objects are used to group parameters. This reduces the load of data transactions. Each digitalYEWFLO supports four view objects for each of the Resource block, Transducer block, three AI blocks, two DI blocks, one IT block, one AR block, and PID block (option /LC1). Each view object contains a group of the parameters listed in Tables 5.11 to 5.17.

Table 5.10 Purpose of Each View Object

VIEW_1
VIEW_2
VIEW_3 VIEW_4

Description
Set of dynamic parameters required by operator for plant operation. (PV, SV, OUT, Mode etc.)
Set of static parameters which need to be shown to plant operator at once. (Range etc.)
Set of all the dynamic parameters.
Set of static parameters for configuration or maintenance.

5.6.4 Function Block Parameters
Function block parameters can be read from the host or can be set. For details of the function blocks, read APPENDIX.

<5. CONFIGURATION>

5-7

IM 01F06F00-01EN

Table 5.11 View Objects for Resource Block

Relative Index

Parameter Mnemonic

1 ST_REV

2 TAG_DESC

3 STRATEGY

4 ALERT_KEY

5 MODE_BLK

6 BLOCK_ERR

7 RS_STATE

8 TEST_RW

9 DD_RESOURCE

10 MANUFAC_ID

11 DEV_TYPE

12 DEV_REV

13 DD_REV

14 GRANT_DENY

15 HARD_TYPES

16 RESTART

17 FEATURES

18 FEATURE_SEL

19 CYCLE_TYPE

20 CYCLE_SEL

21 MIN_CYCLE_T

22 MEMORY_SIZE

23 NV_CYCLE_T

24 FREE_SPACE

25 FREE_TIME

26 SHED_RCAS

27 SHED_ROUT

28 FAIL_SAFE

29 SET_FSAFE

30 CLR_FSAFE

VIEW_ VIEW_ VIEW_ VIEW_

1

2

3

4

2

2

2

2

2

1

4

4

2

2

1

1

4 2 1 1 2 2

2

2

1

2

4

2

4

4

4

4

4

4

1

1

<5. CONFIGURATION>

5-8

Relative Index

Parameter Mnemonic

VIEW_ VIEW_ VIEW_ VIEW_

1

2

3

4

31 MAX_NOTIFY

4

32 LIM_NOTIFY

1

33 CONFIRM_TIME

4

34 WRITE_LOCK

1

35 UPDATE_EVT

36 BLOCK_ALM

37 ALARM_SUM

8

8

38 ACK_OPTION

2

39 WRITE_PRI

1

40 WRITE_ALM

41 ITK_VER

42 SOFT_REV

43 SOFT_DESC

44 SIM_ENABLE_MSG

45 DEVICE_STATUS_1

4

46 DEVICE_STATUS_2

4

47 DEVICE_STATUS_3

4

48 DEVICE_STATUS_4

4

49 DEVICE_STATUS_5

4

50 DEVICE_STATUS_6

4

51 DEVICE_STATUS_7

4

52 DEVICE_STATUS_8

4

53 SOFTDWN_PROTECT

1

54 SOFTDWN_FORMAT

1

55 SOFTDWN_COUNT

2

56 SOFTDWN_ACT_AREA

1

57 SOFTDWN_MOD_REV

16

58 SOFTDWN_ERROR

2

Total bytes

22 30 73 35

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<5. CONFIGURATION>

5-9

Table 5.12 View Objects for Transducer Block

Relative Index

Parameter Mnemonic

VIEW_1

VIEW_2

VIEW_3 1st

VIEW_3 2nd

VIEW_3 3rd

VIEW_3 4th

VIEW_4 1st

VIEW_4 2nd

VIEW_4 3rd

VIEW_4 4th

VIEW_4 5th

VIEW_4 6th

1 ST_REV

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2 TAG_DESC

3 STRATEGY

2

4 ALERT_KEY

1

5 MODE_BLK

4

4

6 BLOCK_ERR

2

2

7 UPDATE_EVT

8 BLOCK_ALM

9

TRANSDUCER_ DIRECTORY

10 TRANSDUCER_TYPE

2

2

2

2

11 XD_ERROR

1

1

12

COLLECTION_ DIRECTORY

13 PRIMARY_VALUE_TYPE

2

14 PRIMARY_VALUE

5

5

15

PRIMARY_VALUE_ RANGE

11

16 CAL_POINT_HI

4

17 CAL_POINT_LO

4

18 CAL_MIN_SPAN

4

19 CAL_UNIT

2

20 SENSOR_TYPE

2

21 SENSOR_RANGE

11

22 SENSOR_SN

4

23 SENSOR_CAL_METHOD

2

24 SENSOR_CAL_LOC

32

25 SENSOR_CAL_DATE

7

26 SENSOR_CAL_WHO

32

27 LIN_TYPE

1

28 SECONDARY_VALUE

5

29

SECONDARY_VALUE_ UNIT

2

30 PRIMARY_FTIME

4

31 TERTIARY_VALUE

5

32 TERTIARY_VALUE_UNIT

2

33 LIMSW_1_VALUE_D

2

34 LIMSW_1_TARGET

1

35 LIMSW_1_SETPOINT

4

36

LIMSW_1_ACT_ DIRECTION

1

37 LIMSW_1_HYSTERESIS

4

38 LIMSW_1_UNIT

2

39 LIMSW_2_VALUE_D

2

40 LIMSW_2_TARGET

1

41 LIMSW_2_SETPOINT

4

42

LIMSW_2_ACT_ DIRECTION

1

43 LIMSW_2_HYSTERESIS

4

44 LIMSW_2_UNIT

2

45 ALARM_PERFORM

2

46 ARITHMETIC_BLOCK

1

1

47 SENSOR_STATUS

1

1

48 FUNCTION

1

1

49 FLUID_TYPE

1

1

* Continued on next page

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<5. CONFIGURATION>

5-10

Relative Index

Parameter Mnemonic

VIEW_1

VIEW_2

VIEW_3 1st

VIEW_3 2nd

VIEW_3 3rd

VIEW_3 4th

VIEW_4 1st

VIEW_4 2nd

VIEW_4 3rd

VIEW_4 4th

VIEW_4 5th

VIEW_4 6th

50 TEMP_UNIT

2

2

51 PROCESS_TEMP

4

4

52 BASE_TEMP

4

4

53 DENSITY_UNIT

2

2

54 PROCESS_DENSITY

4

4

55 BASE_DENSITY

4

4

56 PRESSURE_UNIT

2

2

57 PROCESS_PRESSURE

4

4

58 BASE_PRESSURE

4

4

59 DEVIATION

4

4

60 SECONDARY_FTIME

4

61 CABLE_LENGTH

4

62 FIRST_TEMP_COEF

4

63 SECOND_TEMP_COEF

4

64 SIZE_SELECT

1

1

65 BODY_TYPE

1

1

66

VORTEX_SENSOR_ TYPE

1

1

67 K_FACTOR_UNIT

1

1

68 K_FACTOR

4

4

69 LOWCUT

4

70 UPPER_DISPLAY_MODE

1

71 LOWER_DISPLAY_MODE

1

72 DISPLAY_CYCLE

1

73 USER_ADJUST

4

74 REYNOLDS_ADJUST

1

75 VISCOSITY_VALUE

4

76 GAS_EXPANSION_FACT

1

77 FLOW_ADJUST

1

78

FLOW_ADJ_ FREQUENCY

20

79 FLOW_ADJ_DATA

20

80 TLA_VALUE

4

81 NOISE_BALANCE_MODE

1

82 NOISE_RATIO

4

4

83 SIGNAL_LEVEL

4

84 FLOW_VELOCITY

4

85 SPAN_VELOCITY

4

86 VORTEX_FREQ

4

87 SPAN_FREQ

4

88 FLUID_DENSITY

4

89

SENSOR_ERROR_ RECORD

2

90 MODEL

32

91 ALARM_SUM

8

153 VOLUME_FLOW

5

154 VOLUME_FLOW_UNIT

2

Total bytes

16 62 57

2

2

2

54 75 67 50 88

2

IM 01F06F00-01EN

Table 5.13 View Objects for Each AI Function Block

Relative Index

Parameter Mnemonic

VIEW_ VIEW_ VIEW_ VIEW_

1

2

3

4

1 ST_REV

2

2

2

2

2 TAG_DESC

3 STRATEGY

2

4 ALERT_KEY

1

5 MODE_BLK

4

4

6 BLOCK_ERR

2

2

7 PV

5

5

8 OUT

5

5

9 SIMULATE

10 XD_SCALE

11

11 OUT_SCALE

11

12 GRANT_DENY

2

13 IO_OPTS

2

14 STATUS_OPTS

2

15 CHANNEL

2

16 L_TYPE

1

17 LOW_CUT

4

18 PV_FTIME

4

19 FIELD_VAL

5

5

20 UPDATE_EVT

21 BLOCK_ALM

22 ALARM_SUM

8

8

23 ACK_OPTION

2

24 ALARM_HYS

4

25 HI_HI_PRI

1

26 HI_HI_LIM

4

27 HI_PRI

1

28 HI_LIM

4

29 LO_PRI

1

30 LO_LIM

4

31 LO_LO_PRI

1

32 LO_LO_LIM

4

33 HI_HI_ALM

34 HI_ALM

35 LO_ALM

36 LO_LO_ALM

37 TOTAL

4

38 TOTAL_START

39 TOTAL_RATE_VAL

40 TOTAL_RESET

Total bytes

31 26 35 46

Note: AI2 and AI3 blocks do not have parameters after index No. 37 (TOTAL) inclusive.

<5. CONFIGURATION>

5-11

Table 5.14 View Objects for Each DI Function Block

Relative Index

Parameter Mnemonic

1 ST_REV

2 TAG_DESC

3 STRATEGY

4 ALERT_KEY

5 MODE_BLK

6 BLOCK_ERR

7 PV_D

8 OUT_D

9 SIMULATE_D

10 XD_STATE

11 OUT_STATE

12 GRANT_DENY

13 IO_OPTS

14 STATUS_OPTS

15 CHANNEL

16 PV_FTIME

17 FIELD_VAL_D

18 UPDATE_EVT

19 BLOCK_ALM

20 ALARM_SUM

21 ACK_OPTION

22 DISC_PRI

23 DISC_LIM

24 DISC_ALM

VIEW_ VIEW_ VIEW_ VIEW_

1

2

3

4

2

2

2

2

2

1

4

4

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

4

2

2

8

8

2

1

1

Total bytes

22

8

22 19

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<5. CONFIGURATION>

5-12

Table 5.15 View Objects for PID Function Block (option /LC1)

Relative Index

Parameter Mnemonic

1 ST_REV

2 TAG_DESC

3 STRATEGY

4 ALERT_KEY

5 MODE_BLK

6 BLOCK_ERR

7 PV

8 SP

9 OUT

10 PV_SCALE

11 OUT_SCALE

12 GRANT_DENY

13 CONTROL_OPTS

14 STATUS_OPTS

15 IN

16 PV_FTIME

17 BYPASS

18 CAS_IN

19 SP_RATE_DN

20 SP_RATE_UP

21 SP_HI_LIM

22 SP_LO_LIM

23 GAIN

24 RESET

25 BAL_TIME

26 RATE

27 BKCAL_IN

28 OUT_HI_LIM

29 OUT_LO_LIM

30 BKCAL_HYS

31 BKCAL_OUT

32 RCAS_IN

33 ROUT_IN

34 SHED_OPT

35 RCAS_OUT

36 ROUT_OUT

37 TRK_SCALE

38 TRK_IN_D

39 TRK_VAL

40 FF_VAL

VIEW_ VIEW_ VIEW_ VIEW_

1

2

3

4

2

2

2

2

2

1

4

4

2

2

5

5

5

5

5

5

11

11

2

2

2

5

4

1

5

5

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

5

4

4

4

5

5

5

1

5

5

11

2

2

5

5

5

Relative Index

Parameter Mnemonic

41 FF_SCALE

42 FF_GAIN

43 UPDATE_EVT

44 BLOCK_ALM

45 ALARM_SUM

46 ACK_OPTION

47 ALARM_HYS

48 HI_HI_PRI

49 HI_HI_LIM

50 HI_PRI

51 HI_LIM

52 LO_PRI

53 LO_LIM

54 LO_LO_PRI

55 LO_LO_LIM

56 DV_HI_PRI

57 DV_HI_LIM

58 DV_LO_PRI

59 DV_LO_LIM

60 HI_HI_ALM

61 HI_ALM

62 LO_ALM

63 LO_LO_ALM

64 DV_HI_ALM

65 DV_LO_ALM

Total bytes

VIEW_ VIEW_ VIEW_ VIEW_

1

2

3

4

11

4

8

8

2

4

1

4

1

4

1

4

1

4

1

4

1

4

43 43 83 104

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<5. CONFIGURATION>

5-13

Table 5.16 View Objects for Enhanced Arithmetic (AR) Block

Relative Index

Parameter Mnemonic

1 ST_REV

2 TAG_DESC

3 STRATEGY

4 ALERT_KEY

5 MODE_BLK

6 BLOCK_ERR

7 PV

8 OUT

9 PRE_OUT

10 PV_SCALE

11 OUT_RANGE

12 GRANT_DENY

13 INPUT_OPTS

14 IN

15 IN_LO

16 IN_1

17 IN_2

18 IN_3

19 RANGE_HI

20 RANGE_LO

21 BIAS_IN_1

22 GAIN_IN_1

23 BIAS_IN_2

24 BIAS_IN_2

25 BIAS_IN_3

26 BIAS_IN_3

27 COMP_HI_LIM

28 COMP_LO_LIM

29 ARITH_TYPE

VIEW_ VIEW_ VIEW_ VIEW_

1

2

3

4

2

2

2

2

2

1

4

4

2

2

5

5

5

5

5

5

11

11

2

2

5

5

5

5

5

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

1

Relative Index

Parameter Mnemonic

VIEW_ VIEW_ VIEW_ VIEW_

1

2

3

4

30 BAL_TIME

4

31 BIAS

4

32 GAIN

4

33 OUT_HI_LIM

4

34 OUT_LO_LIM

4

35 UPDATE_EVT

36 BLOCK_ALM

37

AR_VOLUME_ FLOW_UNIT

2

38 AR_TEMP_UNIT

2

39 AR_BASE_TEMP

4

40

AR_PRESSURE_ UNIT

2

41

AR_BASE_ PRESSURE

4

42 AR_DEVIATION

4

43

AR_DENSITY_ UNIT

2

44

AR_BASE_ DENSITY

4

45

AR_FIRST_TEMP_ COEF

4

46

AR_SECOND_ TEMP_COEF

4

47

AR_FLOW_ CONFIG

48

AR_DENSITY_ FACTOR

5

49

AR_DENSITY_ FACTOR_UNIT

2

50

AR_CONFIG_ SOFT_REV

51 AR_CONFIG_DATE

52 AR_CONFIG_WHO

53

AR_CONFIG_ STATUS

54

AR_CONFIG_ VSTRING32

55

AR_CONFIG_ VSTRING16

56

AR_CONFIG_ OSTRING32

57

AR_CONFIG_ OSTRING2

Total bytes

23 26 53 102

IM 01F06F00-01EN

Table 5.17 View Objects for IT Function Block

Relative Index

Parameter Mnemonic

1 ST_REV

VIEW_ VIEW_ VIEW_ VIEW_

1

2

3

4

2

2

2

2

2 TAG_DESC

3 STRATEGY

4 ALERT_KEY

5 MODE_BLK

4

6 BLOCK_ERR

2

2 1 4 2

7 TOTAL_SP

4

4

8 OUT

5

5

9 OUT_RANGE 10 GRANT_DENY 11 STATUS_OPTS

11 2
2

12 IN_1

5

5

13 IN_2

5

5

14 OUT_TRIP 15 OUT_PTRIP 16 TIME_UNIT1 17 TIME_UNIT2

2

2

2

2

1

1

18 UNIT_CONV

4

19 PULSE_VAL1

4

20 PULSE_VAL2

21 REV_FLOW1

2

22 REV_FLOW2

2

4 2 2

23 RESET_IN

2

2

24 STOTAL

4

25 RTOTAL

4

26 SRTOTAL

27 SSP

28 INTEG_TYPE

4 4 4
1

29 INTEG_OPTS

2

30 CLOCK_PER

4

31 PRE_TRIP

32 N_RESET

4

33 PCT_INCL

4

34 GOOD_LIM

4 4 4
4

35 UNCERT_LIM

4

36 OP_CMD_INT

1

37 OUTAGE_LIM

38 RESET_CONFIRM 2

39 UPDATE_EVT

1 4
2

40 BLOCK_ALM

41 ACCUM_TOTAL

4

Total bytes

52 17 68 42

<5. CONFIGURATION>

5-14

Table 5.18 Indexes to View Objects for Each Block

Block Resource block
Transducer block
AI1 function block AI2 function block DI1 function block DI2 function block PID function block (option /LCI) Enhanced Arithmetic block IT function block

VIEW_1 VIEW_2 VIEW_3 VIEW_4

40100 40101 40102 40103

40200

40201

40202 40203 40204 40205

40206 40207 40208 40209 40210 40211

40400 40401 40402 40403

40410 40411 40412 40413

40600 40601 40602 40603

40610 40611 40612 40613

40800 40801 40802 40803

41750 41600

41751 41601

41752 41602

41753 41603

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<6. EXPLANATION OF BASIC ITEMS>

6-1

6. EXPLANATION OF BASIC ITEMS

This chapter describes basic TR (Transducer block), AI, and DI function block parameter setting, displays of the integral indicator. For detailes of the function blocks, read APPENDIX.
This chapter contains information on how to adapt the function and performance of the digitalYEWFLO to suit specific applications. Because two or more devices are connected to FOUNDATION Fieldbus, settings including the requirements of all devices need to be determined. Practically, the following steps must be taken.
The following section describes each step of the procedure in the order given. Using a dedicated configuration tool allows the procedure to be significantly simplified. This section describes the procedure which has relatively simple functions.

6.1 Setting and Changing Parameters for the Whole Process
IMPORTANT
Do not turn off the power immediately after setting. When the parameters are saved to the EEPROM, the redundant processing is executed for an improvement of reliability. If the power is turned off within 60 seconds after setting is made, the modified parameters are not saved and the setting may return to the original values.
Block mode Many parameters require a change of the block mode of the function block to O/S (Out of Service) when their data is changed. To change the block mode of the function block, its MODE_BLK needs to be changed. The MODE_BLK is comprised of four sub-parameters below. (1) Target (Target mode):
Sets the operating condition of the block. (2) Actual (Actual mode):
Indicates the current operating condition. (3) Permit (Permitted mode): Indicates the operating condition that the block
is allowed to take. (4)Normal (Normal mode):
Indicates the operating condition that the block will usually take.

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<6. EXPLANATION OF BASIC ITEMS>

6-2

6.2 Transducer Block Parameters
The transducer block sets functions specific to the flow rate measurement of the digitalYEWFLO. For each block parameter in digitalYEWFLO, read APPENDIX 1 "LIST OF PARAMETERS FOR EACH BLOCK OF digitalYEWFLO." The following describes important parameters and how to set them. For the METHOD of TR block, read APPENDIX 10.1 "Transducer Block".

(1) Mandatory Parameter Setting for Transducer Block
After setting parameters of the transducer block, set up XD_SCALE of the AI1 block (and of the AI2 block as appropriate). Table 6.1 shows the parameters that must be set (in order of the relative index sequentially) depending on the operation conditions.

Table 6.1 Mandatory Parameter Setting for Transducer Block Depending on Operation Conditions

Relative Index

Operation Conditions

Parameter Name

47

SENSOR_ STATUS

1 =

1 =

Standard Standard

48

THERMOMETER_ FUNCTION

--

--

1 = LIQUID: Volume;

2 = Built-in 2 = Built-in 2 = Built-in

Temp.

Temp.

Temp.

Sensor

Sensor

Sensor

1 = Monitor 1 = Monitor 2 =

only; or

only; or

Saturated

6 = Not use 6 = Not use steam

1 = LIQUID: Volume;

2 = Built-in Temp. Sensor
3 = Superheat steam

2 = Built-in 2 = Built-in

Temp.

Temp.

Sensor

Sensor

4 = GAS: 5 = LIQUID: STD/Normal Mass

2 =

2 =

GAS/

GAS/

STEAM:

STEAM:

Volume;

Volume;

49 FLUID_TYPE

3 =

5 = GAS: STD/Normal 3 =

5 = GAS: STD/Normal

--

--

--

--

LIQUID:

LIQUID:

Mass or

Mass or

4 = GAS/ STEAM: Mass

4 = GAS/ STEAM: Mass

50

TEMPERATURE_ UNIT

















51 PROCESS_TEMP

















52 BASE_TEMP









53 DENSITY_UNIT

















54

PROCESS_ DENSITY

















55 BASE_DENSITY



56

PRESSURE_ UNIT









57

PROCESS_ PRESSURE









58

BASE_ PRESSURE







59 DEVIATION







62

FIRST_TEMP_ COEF



63

SECOND_TEMP_ COEF



Mandatory

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<6. EXPLANATION OF BASIC ITEMS>

6-3

(2) Explanations of Parameters
1) PRIMARY_VALUE_TYPE (Relative Index 13) Indicates the type of the measured item represented by PRIMARY_VALUE. For the digitalYEWFLO, the value of PRIMARY_ VALUE_TYPE is 100 and 101 as follows: 100 = Mass flow 101 = Volumetric flow 65535 = Other Default: 101 (Volumetric flow)
2) PRIMARY_VALUE_FTIME (Relative Index 30) Defines the damping time constant for the flow rate to be input to the flow rate calculation. Setting range: 0 to 99 (seconds) Default: 4 (seconds)
3) THERMOMETER_FUNCTION (Relative Index 48) Determines the use of the temperature monitoring function for a model with the MV option. 1 = Monitor only 2 = Saturated steam 3 = Superheat steam 4 = Gas: STD/Normal 5 = LIQUID: Mass 6 = Not use Default: 1 (= Monitor only)
4) FLUID_TYPE (Relative Index 49) Selects the type of process fluid to be measured. 1 = LIQUID: Volume 2 = Gas/Steam: Volume 3 = LIQUID: Mass 4 = Gas/Steam: Mass 5 = Gas: Std/Normal Default: 1 (= LIQUID: Volume)
5) TEMPERATURE_UNIT (Relative Index 50) Selects the unit of temperature. Setting range: 1001 (= °C), 1002 (= °F) Default: 1001 (= °C)
6) PROCESS_TEMP (Relative Index 51) Sets the normal operating temperature. Setting range: -999.9 to 999.9 Unit: As selected in TEMP_UNIT Default: 15.0
7) BASE_TEMP (Relative Index 52) Sets the temperature under the standard conditions. Setting range: -999.9 to 999.9 Unit: As selected in TEMP_UNIT Default: 15.0

8) DENSITY_UNIT (Relative Index 53) Selects the unit of density. Setting range: 1097 (=kg/m3) Default: 1097 (= kg/m3)
9) PROCESS_DENSITY (Relative Index 54) Selects the density under the normal operating conditions. Setting range: 0.00001 to 32000 Unit: As selected in DENSITY_UNIT Default: 1024.0
10) BASE_DENSITY (Relative Index 55) Sets the density under the standard conditions. Setting range: 0.00001 to 32000 Unit: As selected in DENSITY_UNIT Default: 1024.0
11) PRESSURE_UNIT (Relative Index 56) Selects the unit of pressure. Setting range: 1545 (= MPaa) or 1547 (= kPaa) Default: 1545 (= MPaa)
12) PROCESS_PRESSURE (Relative Index 57) Sets the absolute pressure under the normal operating conditions. Setting range: 0.00001 to 32000 Unit: As selected in PRESSURE_UNIT Default: 0.1013
13) BASE_PRESSURE (Relative Index 58) Sets the absolute pressure under the standard conditions. Setting range: 0.00001 to 32000 Unit: As selected in PRESSURE_UNIT Default: 0.1013
14) DEVIATION (Relative Index 59) Sets the deviation factor of the process fluid. Setting range: 0.001 to 10.0 Default: 1.0 (nondimensional number)
15) SECONDARY_VALUE_FTIME (Relative Index 60) Sets the damping factor for temperature measurement (for a model with the MV option). Setting range: 0 to 99 Unit: s (seconds) Default: 4 (seconds)
16) SIZE_SELECT (Relative Index 64) Selects the flowmeter size. Setting range: 1 = 15 mm (1/2 in.) 2 = 25 mm (1 in.) 3 = 40 mm (1.5 in.) 4 = 50 mm (2 in.) 5 = 80 mm (3 in.) 6 = 100 mm (4 in.) 7 = 150 mm (6 in.) 8 = 200 mm (8 in.) 9 = 250 mm (10 in.) 10 = 300 mm (12 in.) 11 = 400 mm (16 in.) Default: 2 (= 25 mm (1 in.))

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<6. EXPLANATION OF BASIC ITEMS>

6-4

17) K_FACTOR_UNIT (Relative Index 67) Selects the unit of the K factor. Setting range: 1 (=p/L) Default: 1 (=p/L).
18) K_FACTOR (Relative Index 68) Sets the K factor of the combined detector at 15°C. Setting range: 0.00001 to 32000 Unit: As selected in K_FACTOR_UNIT Default: 68.6
19) LOW_CUT_FLOW (Relative Index 69) Sets the low cutoff flow rate level. Setting range: Minimum flow rate × 0.5 to XD_SCALE.EU_100 Unit: As selected in PRIMARY_VALUE_ RANGE.Units Index Default: Minimum gas flow rate for the size of 25 mm (1 in.)
20) UPPER_DISPLAY_MODE (Relative Index 70) Selects the data to be displayed on the upper row of the LCD indicator, as follows: 1 = Flow Rate (%): Instantaneous flow rate as a percentage 2 = Flow Rate: Instantaneous flow rate in the specified unit 3 = Temperature (%): Temperature as a percentage (can only be selected for a model with the option /MV) 4 = Arithmetic Out: Output of AR block
21) LOWER_DISPLAY_MODE (Relative Index 71) Selects the data to be displayed on the upper row of the LCD indicator, as follows: 1 = Blank 2 = Total: Totalized flow rate 3 = Temperature: Temperature (can only be selected for a model with the MV option) 4 = Integrator Out: Output of IT block
22) DISPLAY_CYCLE (Relative Index 72) Sets the display refresh cycle of the LCD indicator, as a multiple of 500 milliseconds. Setting range: 1 to 10 (= 500 ms to 5 s) Default: 1 (= 500 ms)

6.3 AI Function Block Parameters
Parameters of the three AI function blocks can be read and written from the host. AI1: Flow rate, AI2: Temperature, AI3: Volumetric flow rate for the use of mass flow rate calculation at AR function block. For each block parameter in digitalYEWFLO, read APPENDIX 1 "LIST OF PARAMETERS FOR EACH BLOCK OF digitalYEWFLO." The following describes important parameters and how to set them.
MODE_BLK:
Indicates the three types of function block modes; Out_Of_Service, Manual, and Auto. In Out_Of_Service mode, the AI block does not operate. The Manual mode does not allow values to be updated. The Auto mode causes the measured value to be updated. Under normal circumstances, set the Auto mode to take effect. The Auto mode is the factory default.
CHANNEL:
This is the parameter of the transducer block to be input to the AI block. AI1 block is assigned flow rate. AI2 block is assigned temperature. AI3 block is assigned volumetric flow rate for AR block. This setting can not be changed.
XD_SCALE:
Scale of input from the transducer block. The maximum flow rate range in the registered sizing data is setting. "0" (0%), "10.000" (100%), and "m3/h" for the unit are factory-set in case of UNCALIBRATION order. Changing the unit (can be set only in flow rate) also causes the unit within the transducer block to be automatically changed. (The unit is automatically changed according to the unit selected by AI1, AI2.) Units which can be set by XD_SCALE are shown in Table 6.2. The setting range of the 100% scale (XD_ SCALE.EU at 100) depends on the unit setting (XD_SCALE.Units Index) as shown in Table 6.3.

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<6. EXPLANATION OF BASIC ITEMS>

6-5

Table 6.2 Available Units

Item Block

Available Units

LIQUID: Mass

kg/s (1322), kg/min (1323), kg/h (1324), kg/d (1325), t/s (1326), t/min (1327), t/h

GAS/STEAM: Mass

(1328), t/d (1329), lb/min (1331), lb/h lb/d (1333)

lb/s (1330), (1332),

m3/s (1347), m3/min (1348),

m3/h (1349), m3/d (1350),

L/s (1351), L/min (1352),

L/h (1353), L/d (1354), CFS

[cf/s] (1356), CFM [cf/min]

(1357), CFH [cf/h] (1358),

LIQUID:

ft3/d [cf/d] (1359), gal/s

Volume

[USgal/s] (1362), GPM

[USgal/min] (1363), gal/h

GAS/STEAM: [USgal/h] (1364), gal/d

AI1

Volume

[USgal/d] (1365), ImpGal/s

(channel 1)

[UKgal/s] (1367), ImpGal/min

[UKgal/min] (1368), ImpGal/h

[UKgal/h] (1369), ImpGal/d

[UKgal/d] (1370), bbl/s

(1371), bbl/min (1372), bbl/h

(1373), bbl/d (1374)

XD_ SCALE

GAS Std/Normal
N: Normal S: Standard

SCFM [scf/min] (1360), SCFH [scf/h] (1361), Nm3/s (1522), Nm3/min (1523), Nm3/h (1524), Nm3/d (1525) Sm3/s (1527), Sm3/min (1528), Sm3/h (1529), Sm3/d
(1530), NL/s (1532), NL/min
(1533), NL/h (1534), NL/d
(1535), SL/s (1537), SL/min
(1538), SL/h (1539), SL/d
(1540)

AI2 (channel 2)

Temperature

°C (1001), °F (1002)

m3/s (1347), m3/min (1348),

m3/h (1349), m3/d (1350),

L/s (1351), L/min (1352),

L/h (1353), L/d (1354), CFS

[cf/s] (1356), CFM [cf/min]

(1357), CFH [cf/h] (1358),

ft3/d [cf/d] (1359), gal/s

AI3 (channel 5)

­

[USgal/s] (1362), GPM [USgal/min] (1363), gal/h [USgal/h] (1364), gal/d

[USgal/d] (1365), ImpGal/s

[UKgal/s] (1367), ImpGal/min

[UKgal/min] (1368), ImpGal/h

[UKgal/h] (1369), ImpGal/d

[UKgal/d] (1370), bbl/s

(1371), bbl/min (1372), bbl/h

(1373), bbl/d (1374)

Note: With the same setting, some units are represented differently between the FOUNDATION Fieldbus communication type and the HART or BRAIN communication type of a digitalYEWFLO. Each unit enclosed in brackets above shows the unit for the HART or BRAIN communication type of a digitalYEWFLO, corresponding to the preceding unit (for the FOUNDATION Fieldbus communication type).

Table 6.3

Setting Range of EU at 100 of XD_ SCALE Depending on Unit

Block Unit Selected AI1 Read Table 6.2
AI2 °C °F
AI3 Read Table 6.2

Setting Range of EU at 100 above 0.0
­273.15 to 999.9 ­459.67 to 999.9
above 0.0

OUT_SCALE: Sets the range of output (from 0% to 100%). Available units for OUT_SCALE are the same as units for XD_SCALE in Table 6.2 and percentage.
L_TYPE: Specifies the operation function of the AI1 block. The factory default is "Direct", so the input delivered to CHANNEL is directly reflected on OUT. If set to "Indirect", scaling by XD_SCALE and OUT_SCALE is carried out and is reflected on OUT. "Indirect SQRT" is not used for a digitalYEWFLO.
PV_FTIME: Sets the time constant of the damping function within AI block (primary delay) in seconds.
Alarm Priority: Indicates the priority of the process alarm. If a value of 3 or greater is set, an alarm is transmitted. The factory default is 0. Four types of alarm can be set: HI_PRI, HI_HI_PRI, LO_ PRI, and LO_LO_PRI.
Alarm Threshold: Sets the threshold at which a process alarm is generated. The factory default setting is a value that does not generate an alarm. Four types of alarm can be set: HI_LIM, HI_HI_LIM, LO_LIM, and LO_LO_LIM.

IM 01F06F00-01EN

6.4 Parameters of DI Function Block
DI function blocks work based on the limit switch signals generated by the transducer block where DI1 is based on those signals on the flow rate and DI2 on the temperature (with the option /MV).
MODE_BLK Supports O/S, Auto, and Manual modes. The DI block does not function in the O/S mode, does not update the measured value in the Manual mode, and updates the measured value in the Auto mode. Normally, set the mode to Auto. Before the digitalYEWFLO is shipped from the factory, all the DI blocks are set to O/S mode.
CHANNEL Selects the input to the DI block from the transducer. CHANNEL is always set to 3 or 4 for a digitalYEWFLO.
PV_FTIME Stipulates the delay time (in seconds) of changing the output value after a change of the value inside the DI block.
DISC_PRI Determines the priority level of the discrete alarm on the block's output (OUT_D). The alarm will be transmitted upon occurrence only when the DISC_PRI is set at 3 or higher. This parameter is set to 1 before the digitalYEWFLO is shipped from the factory.

Table 6.4 Alarm Priority

Value

Descriptions

0

Alart is not notified. Alarm parameters are not updated.

1

Alart is not notified.

3 to 7 Advisory alarms.

8 to 15 Critical alarms.

DISC_LIM
Setpoint of the discrete alarm; when the value of OUT_D agrees with the value set in DISC_LIM, the discrete alarm is generated

<6. EXPLANATION OF BASIC ITEMS>

6-6

6.5 Integral LCD Indicator
The display items are as follows.
Table 6.5 Display Items
Display Items Upper Display Mode AI1 Flowrate% Flowrate AI2 Temperature% AR Arithmetic OUT
Lower Display Mode Blank AI1 Total AI2 Temperature IT Integrator OUT

The display items can be made by selecting in Upper/Lower Display mode. The contents of each display items are as follows. (1)Flowrate%, Temperature% (2)Flowrate (3)Total (4)Temperature (5)Arithmetic OUT
Display Value=Display AR OUT Vale. (by setting AROUT_RANG)
Display unit=Display the setting value of AR OUT_RANGE. Units Index. Available display units are as follows.

Volumetric Flow Rate m3/s(1347), m3/min(1348), m3/h(1349), m3/d(1350), L/s(1351), L/min(1352), L/h(1353), L/d(1354), CFS(1356), CFM(1357), CFH(1358), ft3/d(1359), gal/s(1362), GPM(1363), gal/h(1364), gal/d(1365), ImpGal/s(1367), ImpGal/min(1368), ImpGal/h(1369), ImpGal/d(1370), bbl/s(1371), bbl/min(1372), bbl/h(1373), bbl/d(1374)

Mass Flow Rate kg/s(1322), kg/min(1323), kg/h(1324), kg/d(1325), t/s(1326), t/min(1327), t/h(1328), t/d(1329), lb/s(1330), lb/min(1331), lb/h(1332), lb/d(1333)

IM 01F06F00-01EN

Voluemetric Flow Rate at Normal Condition Nm3/s(1522), Nm3/m(1523), Nm3/h(1524), Nm3/d(1525), NL/s(1532), NL/m(1533), NL/h(1534), NL/d(1535), Sm3/s(1527), Sm3/m(1528), Sm3/h(1529), Sm3/d(1530), SL/s(1537), SL/m(1538), SL/h(1539), SL/d(1540), SCFM(1360), SCFH(1361) N: Normal, S: Standard.
Percentage %(1342)

(1) Display Style In case of plus display
Example : AR OUT_RANGE. EU_100 : 1

Example : AR OUT_RANGE. EU_100 : 0.00001

<6. EXPLANATION OF BASIC ITEMS>

6-7

F0601.ai
In case of Minus display

Example : AR OUT_RANGE. EU_100 : 1,000

AR OUT_RANGE. EU_100 : 100,000

F0602.ai
(2) Alarm Display In case of plus display
Example : Display"99999" and "AL - 61" altrnatelly

F0603.ai
In case of Minus display

Example : AR OUT_RANGE. EU_100 : 1,000

AR OUT_RANGE. EU_100 : 100,000

F0604.ai

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<7. IN-PROCESS OPERATION>

7-1

7. IN-PROCESS OPERATION

This chapter describes the procedure performed when changing the operation of the function block of the digitalYEWFLO in process.
7.1 Mode Transition
When the function block mode is changed to Out_ Of_Service, the function block pauses and a block alarm is issued. When the function block mode is changed to Manual, the function block suspends updating of output values. In this case alone, it is possible to write a value to the OUT parameter of the block for output. Note that no parameter status can be changed.

The error details corresponding to alarm indications on the LCD indicator and whether or not switches are provided to disable the corresponding alarms are shown in Table 7.1. For the alarms for which an alarm mask switch is provided, the default alarm settings are also shown. Those alarms for which an alarm mask switch is not provided are enabled at all times. For how to modify these mask switch statuses, read APPENDIX 3 "OPERATION OF EACH PARAMETER IN FAILURE MODE."

7.2 Generation of Alarm
7.2.1 Indication of Alarm
When the self-diagnostics function indicates that a device is faulty, an alarm (device alarm) is issued from the resource block. When an error (block error) is detected in each function block or an error in the process value (process alarm) is detected, an alarm is issued from each block. If an LCD indicator is installed, the error number is displayed as ALXX. If two or more alarms are issued, multiple error numbers are displayed in 2-second intervals. (when "1" is set to DISPLAY_CYCLE).

Figure 7.1

F0701.ai
Error Identification on Indicator

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<7. IN-PROCESS OPERATION>

7-2

Table 7.1 Alarm Indications and Alarm Mask Switches

LCD
AL-01
AL-02
AL-03
AL-04 AL-05 AL-06 AL-07 AL-08 AL-20 AL-21 AL-22 AL-23 AL-24 AL-25 AL-26 AL-27 AL-28 AL-29 AL-30 AL-41
AL-42
AL-43
AL-51
AL-52
AL-53
AL-54
AL-61 AL-62 AL-63 AL-64 AL-65 AL-66 AL-67 AL-68 AL-69 AL-70 AL-71 AL-72 AL-73 AL-74 AL-75 AL-76 AL-77 AL-78 AL-79 AL-80 AL-81
AL-82
AL-83
AL-84 AL-85

Error Detail

Alarm Mask SW (default)

The EEPROM(S) failed.

Not provided

The serial communication circuit in the amplifier failed (type 1 error).

Not provided

The serial communication circuit in the amplifier failed (type 2 error).

Not provided

The EEPROM(F) failed.

Not provided

The flow sensor failed.

Provided (ON)

The input circuit in the amplifier failed.

Provided (ON) *

The temperature circuit in the amplifier failed. Not provided

The temperature sensor failed.

Not provided

No function blocks are scheduled.

Not provided

Resource Block is in O/S mode.

Not provided

Transducer Block is in O/S mode.

Not provided

AI1 Block is in O/S mode.

Provided (ON)

AI2 Block is in O/S mode.

Provided (OFF)

DI1 Block is in O/S mode.

Provided (OFF)

DI2 Block is in O/S mode.

Provided (OFF)

PID Block is in O/S mode.

Provided (OFF)

AI3 Block is in O/S mode.

Provided (OFF)

IT Block is in O/S mode.

Provided (OFF)

AR Block is in O/S mode.

Provided (OFF)

Flow rate is over the range.

Not provided

The flow rate span setting exceeds the range Not provided limit.

Temperature is over the range. (Regulated in Not provided the upper or lower limit value)

The transient vibration makes the current flow Provided (OFF) rate output constant.

The high vibration makes the current flow rate Provided (OFF) output zero.

The shedder bar is clogged with a material. Provided (OFF)

The current flow rate is fluctuating more than Provided (OFF) 20%.

Indicator is over the range.

Not provided

AI1 Block is in Manual mode.

Provided (ON)

AI1 Block is in simulation mode.

Provided (ON)

AI1 Block is not scheduled.

Provided (ON)

AI2 Block is in Manual mode.

Provided (OFF)

AI2 Block is in simulation mode.

Provided (OFF)

AI2 Block is not scheduled.

Provided (OFF)

DI1 Block is in Manual mode.

Provided (OFF)

DI1 Block is in simulation mode.

Provided (OFF)

DI1 Block is not scheduled.

Provided (OFF)

DI2 Block is in Manual mode.

Provided (OFF)

DI2 Block is in simulation mode.

Provided (OFF)

DI2 Block is not scheduled.

Provided (OFF)

PID Block is in Bypass mode.

Provided (OFF)

PID Block is failed (type 1 error).

Provided (OFF)

PID Block is failed (type 2 error).

Provided (OFF)

AI3 Block is in Manual mode.

Provided (OFF)

AI3 Block is in simulation mode.

Provided (OFF)

AI3 Block is not scheduled.

Provided (OFF)

IT Block is in Manual mode.

Provided (OFF)

IT Block is not scheduled.

Provided (OFF)

IT Total backup failed. Last IT Output.Value (IT. Provided (OFF) OUT.Value) could not saved.

IT Clock Period (IT.CLOCK_PER) is smaller Provided (OFF) than IT Period of Execution(IT.EXECUTION_ PERIOD).

AR Block is in Manual mode.

Provided (OFF)

AR Block is not scheduled.

Provided (OFF)

LCD AL-86 AL-87 AL-88 AL-89 AL-90 AL-91
AL-92
AL-93

Error Detail
AR Range High (AR.RANGE_HI) is smaller than AR Range Low (AR.RANGE_LOW).
AR Input1 (AR.IN_1) is over range.
AR Input2 (AR.IN_2) is over range.
AR Input (AR.IN) is not connected to the volumetric flow.
AR Input1 (AR.IN_1) is not connected to the temperature.
AR Input2 (AR.IN_2) is not connected to the pressure.
AR Compensation Coefficient (AR. AR_FLOW_CONFIG.Element) changed unexpected. Therefore AR Output (AR.OUT.Value) is uncertainty.
AR Output Range .Units Index (AR.OUT_ RANGE.Unit Index) is not selected rightly the corresponding to AR Arithmetic Type (AR. ARITH_TYPE).

Alarm Mask SW (default) Provided (OFF) Provided (OFF) Provided (OFF) Provided (OFF) Provided (OFF) Provided (OFF) Provided (OFF)
Provided (OFF)

*: Not provided for a model with the option /MV and with the fluid density calculation set to be active.

IM 01F06F00-01EN

7.2.2 Alarms and Events

Each digitalYEWFLO can report the following

alarms and events as alerts.

Analog Alerts (Generated when a process value

exceeds threshold)

By AI Block:Hi-Hi Alarm, Hi Alarm, Low

Alarm, Low-Low Alarm

Discrete Alerts (Generated when an abnormal

condition is detected)

By Resource Block: Block Alarm, Write Alarm

By Transducer Block: Block Alarm

By AI Block:

Block Alarm

By PID Block:

Block Alarm

Update Alerts (Generated when a important

(restorable) parameter is updated)

By Resource Block: Update Event

By Transducer Block: Update Event

By AI Block:

Update Event

By PID Block:

Update Event

An alert has the following structure:

Table 7.2 Alert Object
Subindex
Parameter Name

Explanation

Analog Alert
Discrete Alert
Update Alert

11 22 33 44 55 66 77 88 99 10 10
11 11

1

Block Index

Index of block from which alert is generated

2 Alert Key

Alert Key copied from the block

3

Standard Type

Type of the alert

4 Mfr Type

Alert Name identified by manufacturer specific DD

5

Message Type

Reason of alert notification

6 Priority

Priority of the alarm

7

Time Stamp

Time when this alert is first detected

Subcode

Enumerated cause of this alert

Value

Value of referenced data

Relative Index

Relative Index of referenced data

8

Static Revision

Value of static revision (ST_REV) of the block

9 Unit Index

Unit code of referenced data

<7. IN-PROCESS OPERATION>

7-3

7.3 Simulation Function
The simulation function simulates the input of a function block and lets it operate as if the data was received from the transducer block. It is possible to conduct testing for the downstream function blocks or alarm processes. A SIMULATE_ENABLE jumper switch is mounted on the digitalYEWFLO's amplifier. This is to prevent the accidental operation of this function. When this is switched on, simulation is enabled. (Read Figure 7.2.) To initiate the same action from a remote terminal, if REMOTE LOOP TEST SWITCH is written to SIM_ENABLE_MSG (index 1044) parameter of the resource block, the resulting action is the same as is taken when the above switch is on. Note that this parameter value is lost when the power is turned off. In simulation enabled status, an alarm is generated from the resource block, and other device alarms will be masked; for this reason the simulation must be disabled immediately after using this function. The SIMULATE parameter of AI block consists of the elements listed in Table 7.3 below.

Table 7.3 SIMULATE Parameter

Subindex

Parameters

Description

1 Simulate Status

Sets the data status to be simulated.

2 Simulate Value

Sets the value of the data to be simulated.

3 Transducer Status Displays the data status from the transducer block. It cannot be changed.

4 Transducer Value Displays the data value from the transducer block. It cannot be changed.

5 Simulate En/Disable Controls the simulation function of this block. 1: Disabled (standard) 2: Active(simulation)

When Simulate En/Disable in Table 7.3 above is set to "Active", the applicable function block uses the simulation value set in this parameter instead of the data from the transducer block. This setting can be used for propagation of the status to the trailing blocks, generation of a process alarm, and as an operation test for trailing blocks.

Set to OFF during normal operation.

SIM. ENABLE SwiOtch

1

N

Not used.

2

F0702.ai

Figure 7.2 SIMULATE_ENABLE Switch Position

IM 01F06F00-01EN

8. DEVICE STATUS

<8. DEVICE STATUS>

8-1

In a digitalYEWFLO, the current device statuses and error details are represented by parameters DEVICE_STATUS_1 to DEVICE_STATUS_5 (indexes 1045 to 1049) inside the resource statuses.

Table 8.1 Contents of DEVICE_STATUS_1 (Index 1045)

Hexadecimal

Display through DD

0x04000000 Abnormal boot process

0x02000000 Download failure

0x01000000 Download incomplete

0x00800000 Simulate enable jumper On

0x00400000 RB in O/S mode (AL-21)

0x00080000 AMP. module failure 2 (AL-04)

0x00008000 Link Obj.1/17/33 not open

0x00004000 Link Obj.2/18/34 not open

0x00002000 Link Obj.3/19/35 not open

0x00001000 Link Obj.4/20/36 not open

0x00000800 Link Obj.5/21/37 not open

0x00000400 Link Obj.6/22/38 not open

0x00000200 Link Obj.7/23/39 not open

0x00000100 Link Obj.8/24/40 not open

0x00000080 Link Obj.9/25 not open

0x00000040 Link Obj.10/26 not open

0x00000020 Link Obj.11/27 not open

0x00000010 Link Obj.12/28 not open

0x00000008 Link Obj.13/29 not open

0x00000004 Link Obj.14/30 not open

0x00000002 Link Obj.15/31 not open

0x00000001 Link Obj.16/32 not open

Description Abnormal boot processing was detected at the time of starting. Software download failed. Software download is incomplete. The SIMULATE_ENABLE switch is ON. The resource block is in O/S mode. The EEPROM (F) is faulty. The VCR selected in link object is not open. The VCR selected in link object is not open. The VCR selected in link object is not open. The VCR selected in link object is not open. The VCR selected in link object is not open. The VCR selected in link object is not open. The VCR selected in link object is not open. The VCR selected in link object is not open. The VCR selected in Link object is not open. The VCR selected in Link object is not open. The VCR selected in Link object is not open. The VCR selected in Link object is not open. The VCR selected in Link object is not open. The VCR selected in Link object is not open. The VCR selected in Link object is not open. The VCR selected in Link object is not open.

Table 8.2 Contents of DEVICE_STATUS_2 (Index 1046)

Hexadecimal

Display through DD

0x00000040 Temp. sensor failure (AL-08)

0x00000020 Temp. converter failure (AL-07)

0x00000010 Input circuit failure (AL-06)

0x00000008 Flow sensor failure (AL-05)

0x00000004 COM. circuit failure 2 (AL-03)

0x00000002 COM. circuit failure 1 (AL-02)

0x00000001 AMP. module failure 1 (AL-01)

Description The temperature sensor is faulty. The temperature circuit in the amplifier is faulty. The input circuit is in the amplifier is faulty. The flow sensor is faulty. The fieldbus communication circuit in the amplifier is faulty (type 2 error). The fieldbus communication circuit in the amplifier is faulty (type 1 error). The EEPROM (S) is faulty.

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<8. DEVICE STATUS>

Table 8.3 Contents of DEVICE_STATUS_3 (Index 1047)

Hexadecimal

Display through DD

0x10000000 No FB scheduled (AL-20)

0x02000000 TB in O/S mode (AL-22)

0x01000000 AI1 in O/S mode (AL-23)

0x00800000 AI2 in O/S mode (AL-24)

0x00400000 DI1 in O/S mode (AL-25)

0x00200000 DI2 in O/S mode (AL-26)

0x00100000 PID in O/S mode (AL-27)

0x00040000 AI1 in MAN mode (AL-62)

0x00020000 AI1 Simulation Active (AL-63)

0x00010000 AI1 not Scheduled (AL-64)

0x00004000 AI2 in Man Mode (AL-65)

0x00002000 AI2 Simulate Active (AL-66)

0x00001000 AI2 not scheduled (AL-67)

0x00000400 DI1 in MAN mode (AL-68)

0x00000200 DI1 in simulate active (AL-69)

0x00000100 DI1 not scheduled (AL-70)

0x00000040 DI2 in MAN mode (AL-71)

0x00000020 DI2 in simulate active (AL-72)

0x00000010 DI2 not scheduled (AL-73)

0x00000004 PID in BYPASS mode (AL-74)

0x00000002 PID error 1 (AL-75)

0x00000001 PID error 2 (AL-76)

Description No function blocks are scheduled. The transducer block is in O/S mode. The AI1 block is in O/S mode. The AI2 block is in O/S mode. The DI1 block is in O/S mode. The DI2 block is in O/S mode. The PID block is in O/S mode. The AI1 block is in manual mode. Simulation is enabled in the AI1 block. The AI1 block is not scheduled. The AI2 block is in manual mode. Simulation is enabled in the AI2 block. The AI2 block is not scheduled. The DI1 block is in manual mode. Simulation is enabled in the DI1 block The DI1 block is not scheduled. The DI2 block is in manual mode. Simulation is enabled in the DI2 block. The DI2 block is not scheduled. The PID block is in BYPASS mode. PID block error 1 PID block error 2

Table 8.4 Contents of DEVICE_STATUS_4 (Index 1048)

Hexadecimal

Display through DD

0x00000100 Indicator over range (AL-61)

0x00000080 Flow velocity over range (AL-41)

0x00000040 Flow rate span exceed limit (AL-42)

0x00000020 Temp. over range (AL-43)

0x00000008 Transient vibration (AL-51)

0x00000004 High vibration (AL-52)

0x00000002 Clogging (AL-53)

0x00000001 Fluctuating (AL-54)

Description Indicator overrange Flow velocity overrange The flow rate span setting exceeds the range limit. Temperature overrange Transient excessive vibration (transient disturbance) Excessive vibration Flow anomaly (clogging) Flow anomaly (excessive output fluctuations)

8-2

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<8. DEVICE STATUS>

8-3

Table 8.5 Contents of DEVICE_STATUS_5 (Index 1049)

Hexadecimal

Display through DD

0x08000000 AI3 in O/S mode (AL-28)

0x04000000 IT in O/S mode (AL-29)

0x02000000 AR in O/S mode (AL-30)

0x00800000 AI3 in MAN mode (AL-77)

0x00400000 AI3 in simulate active (AL-78)

0x00200000 AI3 not scheduled (AL-79)

0x00080000 IT in MAN mode (AL-80)

0x00040000 IT not scheduled (AL-81)

0x00020000 IT Total not saved (AL-82)

0x00010000 IT Conf. Err CLOCK_PER (AL-83)

0x00004000 AR in MAN mode (AL-84) 0x00002000 AR not scheduled (AL-85) 0x00001000 AR Conf. Err RANGE_HI/LO (AL-86)

0x00000800 0x00000400 0x00000200 0x00000100 0x00000080 0x00000040

AR Temp. IN over range (AL-87) AR Press IN over range (AL-88) AR Flow IN not connect (AL-89) AR Temp. IN not connect (AL-90) AR Press IN not connect (AL-91) AR Conf. Err Comp. coef. (AL-92)

0x00000020 AR Conf. Err Output unit (AL-93)

Description AI3 Block is in O/S mode. IT Block is in O/S mode. AR Block is in O/S mode. AI3 Block is in Manual mode. AI3 Block is in simulation mode. AI3 Block is not scheduled. IT Block is in Manual mode. IT Block is not scheduled. IT Total backup failed. Last IT Output.Value(IT.OUT.Value) could not saved. IT Clock Period (IT.CLOCK_PER) is smaller than IT Period of Execution(IT. EXECUTION_PERIOD). AR Block is in Manual mode. AR Block is not scheduled. AR Range High (AR.RANGE_HI) is smaller than AR Range Low (AR.RANGE_ LOW). AR Input1 (AR.IN_1) is over range. AR Input2 (AR.IN_2) is over range. AR Input (AR.IN) is not connected to the volumetric flow. AR Input1 (AR.IN_1) is not connected to the temperature. AR Input2 (AR.IN_2) is not connected to the pressure. AR Compensation Coefficient (AR.AR_FLOW_CONFIG.Element) changed unexpected. Therefore AR Output (AR.OUT.Value) is uncertainty. AR Output Range .Units Index (AR.OUT_RANGE.Unit Index) is not selected rightly the corresponding to AR Arithmetic Type (AR.ARITH_TYPE).

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<9. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS>

9-1

9. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

9.1 Standard Specifications
For items other than those described below, read GS 01F06A00-01EN.

EMC Conformity Standards:
EN 61326-1 Class A, Table 2 (For use in industrial locations), EN 61326-2-3, EN61326-2-5 · Performance Specification during immunity test
Flowrate output: Output fluctuation within measurement accuracy Temperature output: Output fluctuation within ±1.0 °C
Note1: This instrument is a Class A product, and it is designed for use in the industrial environment. Please use this instrument in the industrial environment only.
Note2: Use the metal conduit for the remote cable.

 Performance Specifications

Mass Flow Accuracy using Arithmetic (AR) function block: (when outer temperature sensor and outer pressure sensor are used) Accuracy ± %: of Reading

Fluid

Mass Flow Accuracy (Note 1, Note 2)

Input for Temperature,
Pressure

Notes
Reference input condition for Mass Flow Accuracy

Flow computing

Saturated steam
(Temperature base)

Temperature

Temperature range +100 to +330°C Temperature accuracy ±0.1%

Density computing by temperature using standard steam table (IAPWSIF97: International Associaton for the Properties of Water and Steam)

Saturated steam
(Pressure base)
Superheated steam

±1.7% (Flow velocity 35m/s or less)
±2.2% (Flow velocity 35m/s to 80m/s)

Pressure
Temperature and Pressure

Pressure range 0.1MPa to flange rating Pressure accuracy ±0.2%

Density computing by pressure using standard steam table (IAPWS-IF97: International Associaton for the Properties of Water and Steam)

Pressure condition: Pressure range 0.1MPa to flange rating Pressure accuracy ±0.2%
Temperature condition: Temperature range +100 to + 450°C Temperature accuracy ±0.1%

Density computing by temperature and pressure using standard steam table (IAPWS-IF97: International Associaton for the Properties of Water and Steam)

General gas

Not fixed

Temperature and Pressure

Accuracy is changed by fluctuating deviation factor K on temperature, pressure condition

Temperature, pressure compensation computing using gas equation (BoyleCharles's) at fixed deviation factor K.

Liquid

Not fixed

Temperature

Accuracy is changed by setting value for temperature compensation factor

Density computing by temperature using equation API · JIS K 2249.

General gas including
Natural gas
Liquid

±1.1% (Flow velocity 35m/s or less)
±1.6% (Flow velocity 35m/s to 80m/s)
Not fixed

Temperature and Pressure
Temperature

For Natural gas accuracy condition is

Pressure condition:

Pressure range 0 to 12MPa Pressure signal ±0.2% Temperature condition: Temperature range ­10 to + 65°C Temperature signal ±0.1%

For natural gas, AGA No.8 is applied for temperature, pressure compensation computing For general gas and liquid, DIPPR database is applied (AIChE: American

General gas is computed using physical Institute of Chemical Engineers) for properties supported by DIPPR database Mass flow computing.

(AIChE: American Institute of Chemical Engineers)
Computed using physical properties supported by DIPPR database

Density calculation parameters are downloaded by FSA120 · FieldMate FlowNavigator (Note 3)

(AIChE: American Institute of Chemical

Engineers)

Note 1) Mass Flow Accuracy for Steam and Natural gas is computed adding by Temperature and Pressure compensation based on Volumetric Flow Accuracy.
Note 2) Read GS 01F06A00-01EN about mass and volmetric flow accuracy of AI1 output. Note 3) Read GS 01C25R51-01EN. Note 4) The accuracy of saturated steam mass flow rate is on the condition of 100% dryness.

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<9. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS>

9-2

Mass Flow or Volumetric Flow at Norminal/Standard condition Accuracy using Arithmetic (AR) function block: (when Multi-Variable Type (option code: /MV), High Process Temperature Version Multi-Variable Type (combination of option code /HT and /MV) and outer pressure sensor are used) Accuracy ± %: of Reading

Fluid

Mass Flow Accuracy (Note 1, Note 2)

Input for Temperature,
Pressure

Notes
Reference condition for Mass Flow Accuracy

Flow computing

Saturated steam
(Temperature base)

Temperature range

Temperature

+100 to +250°C (/MV)

+100 to +330°C (/HT/MV)

Density computing by temperature using standard steam table (IAPWSIF97: International Associaton for the Properties of Water and Steam)

Saturated steam
(Pressure base)
Superheated steam

±2.0% (Flow velocity 35m/s or less)
±2.5% (Flow velocity 35m/s to 80m/s)

Pressure
Temperature and Pressure

Pressure range 0.1MPa to flange rating Pressure accuracy ±0.2%

Density computing by pressure using standard steam table (IAPWS-IF97: International Associaton for the Properties of Water and Steam)

Pressure condition: Pressure range 0.1MPa to flange rating Pressure accuracy ±0.2%
Temperature condition: Temperature range +100 to +250°C (/MV) +100 to +400°C (/HT/MV)

Density computing by temperature and pressure using standard steam table (IAPWS-IF97: International Associaton for the Properties of Water and Steam)

General gas

Not fixed

Temperature and Pressure

Accuracy is changed by fluctuating deviation factor K on temperature, pressure condition

Temperature, pressure compensation computing using gas equation (BoyleCharles's) at fixed deviation factor K.

Liquid

Not fixed

Temperature

Accuracy is changed by setting value for temperature compensation factor

Density computing by temperature using equation API · JIS K 2249.

General gas including
Natural gas
Liquid

±2.0% (Flow velocity 35m/s or less)
±2.5% (Flow velocity 35m/s to 80m/s)
Not fixed

Temperature and Pressure
Temperature

For Natural gas accuracy condition is

Pressure condition:

Pressure range 0 to 12MPa Pressure signal ±0.2% Temperature condition: Temperature range ­10 to + 65°C

For natural gas, AGA No.8 is applied for temperature, pressure compensation computing For general gas and liquid, DIPPR

database is applied (AIChE: American General gas is computed using physical Institute of Chemical Engineers) for properties supported by DIPPR database Mass flow computing. (AIChE: American Institute of Chemical

Engineers)

Density calculation parameters are

Computed using physical properties supported by DIPPR database

downloaded by FSA120 · FieldMate FlowNavigator (Note 3)

(AIChE: American Institute of Chemical

Engineers)

Note 1) Mass Flow Accuracy for Steam and Natural gas is computed adding by Temperature and Pressure compensation based on Volumetric Flow Accuracy.
Note 2) Read GS 01F06A00-01EN about mass and volumetric flow accuracy of AI1 output and temperature accuracy of AI2 output. Note 3) Read GS 01C25R51-01EN. Note 4) The accuracy of saturated steam mass flow rate is on the condition of 100% dryness.

 Electrical Specifications
Power Supply Voltage: 9 to 32 V DC for general-purpose, flameproof, ATEX intrinsically safe Ex ic (Entity model) and Nonincendive 9 to 24 V DC for intrinsically safe Ex ia (Entity model) 9 to 17.5 V DC for intrinsically safe Ex ia and ATEX intrinsically safe Ex ic (FISCO model)
Output Signals: Digital communication signal compliant with the FOUNDATION Fieldbus protocol
Condition of Communication Line: Supply current: 15 mA maximum 24 mA maximum for the software download

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<9. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS>

9-3

Functional Specifications: Functional specifications for Fieldbus communication conform to the standard specifications (H1) of FOUNDATION fieldbus. FOUNDATION Fieldbus specifications (ITK 5.0.1) grant the interoperability of the field instruments. Function blocks:

Block name
AI
DI AR IT PID

Number
3
2 1 1 1

Execution time

Note

29 ms

AI1: Monitors the fow rate and totalized flow rate; AI2: Monitors the temperature for a model with the multi-variable type option; AI3: volumetric flow input for mass flowrate calculation of AR.

25 ms

Flow and temperature limit switches

40 ms

Mass flow calculation

40 ms

Integrator block integrates a variable as a function of the time or accumulates the counts

40 ms

Applicable when LC1 option is specified

9.2 Model and Suffix Codes
DY--FN -/ DYA-F/ F: digital communication (FOUNDATION Fieldbus protocol) N: Remote type detector

IM 01F06F00-01EN

9.3 Optional Specifications

<9. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS>

9-4

IMPORTANT
In case of the remote type, select the same specification (code) for both detector and converter.

For options other than below, read GS 01F06A00-01EN.
(Note1) For intrinsically safe approval, use the barrier certified by the testing laboratories (BARD-400 is not applicable). (Note2) In case of /FF1, /KF2, /KS28, /KN26, /CF1, /CF11, /SF2 or /SS28 the screw length of Electrical Connection is deeper than
ANSI standard for 0.5 to 2 threads. (Note3) Process temperature and ambient temperature on this section are the specifications for explosion protected type. Read
GS 01F06A00-01EN (n Standard Specifications) for the specifications of this product.

Item

Description

Code

Multi-variable Type Provides a temperature sensor (Pt 1000) built-in the vortex shedder bar, enabling the AI2 function block MV to output the process fluid temperature, and mass flow rates to be calculated. (For details, read GS 01F06A00-01EN.)

PID Function

Provides a PID control function block.

LC1

Software download Based on FOUNDATION Fieldbus Specification (FF-883)

EE

function

Download class: Class 1

Factory Mutual (FM) FM explosion-proof Approval

FF1

Applicable Standard: Class 3600, Class 3611, Class 3615, Class 3810, Including Supplement 1

NEMA 250

Type of Protection: Explosionproof for Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, and D;

Dust-ignitionproof Class II/III, Division 1, Groups E, F, and G.

"SEAL ALL CONDUITS WITHIN 18 INCHES." "WHEN INSTALLED IN DIV.2,

SEALS NOT REQUIRED."

Enclousure Rating: Type 4X

Temperature Code: T6

Ambient Temperature: ­40 to +60°C

Ambient Humidity: 0 to 100%RH (No condensation)

Coating of Enclosure: Epoxy resin coating or Polyurethane resin coating.

Electrical Connection: ANSI 1/2NPT female

FM Intrinsically Safe Approval, Nonincendive (Note1) Applicable Standard: Class 3600, Class 3610, Class 3611, Class 3810, NEMA 250, ANSI/ISA 60079-0, ANSI/ISA 60079-11, ANSI/ISA 60079-27 Type of Protection : Intrinsically Safe for Class I, II, III, DIV.1, Groups A, B, C, D, E, F and G, T4, and Class I, Zone 0, AEx ia IIB/IIC T4, Entity, FISCO Nonincendive for Class I, II, Div.2, Groups A, B, C, D, F and G, Class III, DIV.1, Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC, FNICO Ambient Temperature : ­40 to +60°C (Integral Type and Remote Type Converter) ­40 to +80°C (Remote Type Detector) Ambient Humidity : 0 to 100%RH (No condensation) Indoors and Outdoors : Type 4X Electrical Parameters : Intrinsically Safe [Entity] Vmax=24V, Imax=250mA, Pi=1.2W, Ci=3.52nF, Li=0 mH [FISCO (IIC)] Vmax=17.5V, Imax=380mA, Pi=5.32W, Ci=3.52nF, Li=0 mH [FISCO (IIB)] Vmax=17.5V, Imax=460mA, Pi=5.32W, Ci=3.52nF, Li=0 mH Nonincendive Vmax=32V, Ci=3.52nF, Li=0 mH Electrical Connection : ANSI 1/2NPT female

FS16

IM 01F06F00-01EN

Item ATEX

<9. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS>

9-5

Description
ATEX Flameproof Approval Applicable Standard: EN 60079-0, EN 60079-1 Type of Protection: Ex db IIC T6...T1 Gb (Integral Type and Remote Type Detector) Ex db IIC T6 Gb (Remote Type Converter) Group : II, Category : 2 G Temperature Class : T6...T1 (Integral Type and Remote Type Detector) T6 (Remote Type Converter) Process Temperature : T6 (­40 to +80°C), T5 (­40 to +100°C), T4 (­40 to +135°C), T3 (­40 to +200°C), T2 (­40 to +300°C), T1 (­40 to +450°C) (Use /HT version above +250°C) Ambient Temperature: ­30 to +60°C (With indicator) ­40 to +60°C (Without indicator) Ambient Humidity: 0 to 100%RH (No condensation) Electrical Connection: ANSI 1/2NPT female, ISO M20 × 1.5 female
ATEX Intrinsically Safe Approval Ex ia (Note 1, 2) Applicable Standard : EN 60079-0, EN 60079-11 Type of Protection: Ex ia IIC T4...T1 Ga (Integral Type) Ex ia IIC T6...T1 Ga (Remote Type Detector) Ex ia IIC T4 Ga (Remote Type Converter) Group : II, Category : 1 G Ambient Temperature: ­40 to +60°C (Integral Type) ­50 to +80 [+78]°C (Remote Type Detector) ­40 to +80°C (Remote Type Converter) ( [ ] : Option /MV ) Ambient Humidity: 0 to 100%RH (No condensation) Process Temperature :T 6: +84 [+78]°C, T5: +100°C, T4; +135°C, T3; +199 [+198]°C, T2; +299 [+288]°C, T1; +449 [+438]°C (Option /HT above +250°C and Option / LT below -29°C, [ ] : Option /MV) Signal/Supply (Terminals SUPPLY+ and -): Entity: Ui = 24 V, Ii = 250 mA, Pi = 1.2 W, Ci = 3.52 nF, Li = 0 mH FISCO: Ui = 17.5 V, Ii = 500 mA, Pi = 5.5 W, Ci = 3.52 nF, Li = 0 mH Electrical Connection: ANSI 1/2NPT female, ISO M20 × 1.5 female
ATEX Intrinsically Safe Ex ic (Note1, 2) Applicable Standard: EN 60079-0, EN 60079-11 Type of Protection: Ex ic IIC T4...T1 Gc (Integral Type) Ex ic IIC T6...T1 Gc (Remote Type Detector) Ex ic IIC T5...T4 Gc (Remote Type Converter) Group: II, Category: 3 G Temperature Class: T4...T1 (Integral Type) T6...T1 (Remote Type Detector) T5...T4 (Remote Type Converter) Ambient Temperature: ­40 to +60°C (Integral Type) ­50 to +80 [+79]°C (Remote Type Detector) (Option /LT below ­29°C, [ ] for Option /MV at T6) ­40 to +80°C (Remote Type Converter) Ambient Humidity: 5 to 100%RH (No condensation) Process Temperature: T6: ­196 to +84 [+79]°C, T5: ­196 to +100°C, T4: ­196 to +135°C, T3: ­196 to +199°C, T2: ­196 to +299 [+289]°C, T1: ­196 to +449 [+439]°C (Option /HT above +250°C and Option /LT below -29°C, [ ] : Option /MV) Signal/Supply (Terminals SUPPLY + and ­) Circuit: FISCO field device Ui = 32 V, Ci = 3.52 nF, Li = 0 mH Electrical Connection: ANSI 1/2 NPT female, ISO M20 × 1.5 female

Code KF2
KS28
KN26

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<9. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS>

9-6

Item

Description

Canadian Standards Association (CSA)

CSA explosion-proof Approval Applicable Standard: C22.1-98, C22.2 No.0, C22.2 No.0.4, C22.2 No.0.5, C22.2 No.25, C22.2 No.30, C22.2 No.94, C22.2 No.142, C22.2, No.61010-1, ANSI/ISA-12.27.01 Type of Protection: explosion-proof for Class I, Groups B, C and D; Class II, Groups E, F and G; Class III. For Class I, Division 2 locations"FACTORY SEALED, CONDUIT SEAL NOT REQUIRED." Enclosure: Type 4X Temperature Class: T6...T1 (Integral Type and Remote Type Detector) T6 (Remote Type Converter) Ambient Temperature: ­50 to +60°C Process Temperature : T6;+85°C, T5;+100°C, T4;+135°C, T3;+200°C, T2;+300°C, T1;+450°C Enclosure : Type 4X Coating of Enclosure: Epoxy resin coating or Polyurethane resin coating. Electrical Connection: ANSI 1/2NPT female

Process Sealing Certification Dual Seal Certified by CSA to the requirement of ANSI/ISA 12.27.01 No additional sealing required

IECEx

IECEx Flameproof Approval Applicable Standard: IEC60079-0, IEC60079-1 Type of Protection: Ex db IIC T6...T1 Gb (Integral Type and Remote Type Detector) Ex db IIC T6 Gb (Remote Type Converter) Temperature Class : T6...T1 (Integral Type and Remote Type Detector) T6 (Remote Type Converter) Process Temperature : T6 (­40 to +80°C), T5 (­40 to +100°C), T4 (­40 to +135°C), T3 (­40 to +200°C), T2 (­40 to +300°C), T1 (­40 to +450°C) (Use /HT version above +250°C) Ambient Temperature: ­30 to +60°C (With indicator) ­40 to +60°C (Without indicator) Ambient Humidity: 0 to 100%RH (No condensation) Electrical Connection: ANSI 1/2NPT female, ISO M20 × 1.5 female

IECEx Intrinsically Safe Ex ia (Note 1,2) Applicable Standard : IEC 60079-0, IEC 60079-11 Type of Protection: Ex ia IIC T4...T1 Ga (Integral Type) Ex ia IIC T6...T1 Ga (Remote Type Detector) Ex ia IIC T4 Ga (Remote Type Converter) Ambient Temperature: ­40 to +60°C (Integral Type) ­50 to +80 [+78]°C (Remote Type Detector) ­40 to +80°C (Remote Type Converter) ( [ ]: Option /MV) Ambient Humidity: 0 to 100%RH (No condensation) Process Temperature :T 6: +84 [+78]°C, T5: +100°C, T4; +135°C, T3; +199 [+198]°C, T2; +299 [+288]°C, T1; +449 [+438]°C (Option /HT above +250°C and Option / LT below -29°C, [ ]: Option /MV) Signal/Supply (Terminals SUPPLY+ and ­): Entity: Ui = 24 V, Ii = 250 mA, Pi = 1.2 W, Ci = 3.52 nF, Li = 0 mH FISCO: Ui = 17.5 V, Ii = 500 mA, Pi = 5.5 W, Ci = 3.52 nF, Li = 0 mH Electrical Connection: ANSI 1/2NPT female, ISO M20 × 1.5 female

Technology Institution of Industrial Safety (TIIS), Japan

TIIS explosion-proof Ex d IIC T6 approval Ambient Temperature: ­20 to +60°C Electrical connection: JIS G1/2 female

Code CF1
CF11 SF2
SS28
JF3

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<9. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS>

9-7

<Factory setting>

Item
Tag number (PD_TAG) Output mode (L_TYPE) Upper and lower calculation range limits and unit (XD_SCALE) Upper and lower output range limits and unit (OUT_SCALE) _ Node address

AI1 for Flow Rate Signal (Standard)

AI2 for Temperature Signal (with MV Option)

Set to "FT1003" by default unless otherwise specified when ordered.

"Direct"

The upper range limit will be set to the maximum flow rate range specified in the registered sizing data, or to the 0 to 10 m3/h range in case of UNCALIBRATION.

­40 to +260°C or ­40 to +500°F

Set to 0xF2 unless otherwise specified when ordered.

Explanation of parameters: (1) XD_SCALE: Defines the input values from the transducer block (input range of the sensor) corresponding
to 0% and 100% values in the calculation inside the AI function block. For a digitalYEWFLO, the values set as the flow span or temperature range (option) are stored in this parameter.

(2) OUT_SCALE: Output scaling parameter. Defines the output values corresponding to 0% and 100% values in the calculation inside the AI function block.

(3) L_TYPE:

Determines whether the values passed from the transducer block (sensor) should be output without processing ("Direct") or through scaling conversion based on OUT_SCALE ("Indirect").

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<10. EXPLOSION PROTECTED TYPE INSTRUMENT>

10-1

10. EXPLOSION PROTECTED TYPE INSTRUMENT

In this section, further requirements and differences for explosion protected type instrument are described. For explosion protected type instrument, the description in this chapter is prior to other description in this Instruction Manual.
WARNING
Only trained persons use this instrument in industrial locations.
CAUTION
Process temperature and ambient temperature on this section are the specifications for explosion protected type. Read IM 01F06A0001EN Section 13.1 "Standard Specifications" before operating.
10.1 ATEX
WARNING
· Only trained persons use this instrument in industrial locations.
· A modification of the equipment would no longer comply with the construction described in the certificate documentation.
(1) Technical Data · Flameproof Applicable Standard : EN 60079-0:2012+A11:2013
EN 60079-1:2014 Certificate : DEKRA 11ATEX0212X Type of Protection:
Ex db IIC T6...T1 Gb (Integral Type and Remote Type Detector) Ex db IIC T6 Gb (Remote Type Convertor) Group: II Category: 2 G

Specification of Protection:

Temperature Class: (Integral Type and Remote

Type Detector)

Temperature Class

Process Temperature

T6

-40°C to +80°C

T5

-40°C to +100°C

T4

-40°C to +135°C

T3

-40°C to +200°C

T2

-40°C to +300°C

T1

-40°C to +450°C

*1 Note: Use /HT version above +250°C

Temperature Class:T6 (Remote Type Convertor) Ambient Temperature.:
­30 to +60°C (With indicator) ­40 to +60°C (Without indicator) Power Supply: 9 to 32Vdc max.

Specific conditions of use ·Electrostatic charges on the non-metallic parts (excluding glass parts) or coated parts of the equipment shall be avoided. ·The flameproof joints differ from the standard values in IEC 60079-1. Only personnel authorized by the manufacturer of the equipment can repair the flameproof joints. ·The property class of the fasteners used to fasten the sensor assembly part the transmitter enclosure is at least A2-50.

· Intrinsically Safe Ex ia Applicable Standard: E N 60079-0:2012+A11:2013
EN 60079-11:2012 Certificate: KEMA 03ATEX1136X Type of Protection: Ex ia IIC T4...T1 Ga (Integral Type) Ex ia IIC T6...T1 Ga (Remote Type Detector) Ex ia IIC T4 Ga (Remote Type Converter) Group: II Category: 1 G

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<10. EXPLOSION PROTECTED TYPE INSTRUMENT>

10-2

Ambient Temperature: -40 to +60°C (Integral Type) -50 to +80[+78]°C (Remote Type Detector) -40 to +80°C (Remote Type Converter) (Option /LT below -29°C, [ ] Option /MV at T6) Electrical Data: Entity Ui = 24 V, Ii = 250 mA, Pi = 1.2 W,
Ci = 3.52 nF, Li = 0 mH FISCO(IIC) Ui = 17.5 V, Ii = 500 mA, Pi = 5.5 W,
Ci = 3.52 nF, Li = 0 mH Connect sensor circuit of DYA and DY-N (/HT)

(Integral Type)
Temperature Class T4 T3 T2 T1

Process Temperature  +135°C  +200°C  +250°C  +250°C

(Remote Type Detector)
Temperature Class T6 T5 T4 T3 T2 T1

Process Temperature*  +84/[+78]°C  +100°C  +135°C  +199°C
 +299/[+288]°C  +449/[+438]°C

*: Use /HT option above +250°C, use /LT option below -29 °C, [ ] for /MV option.

Specific conditions of use · Electrostatic charges on the non-metallic parts (excluding glass parts) or coated parts of the equipment shall be avoided. · The dielectric strength of at least 500 V a.c. r.m.s. between the intrinsically safe circuits and the enclosure of the flow meter or the converter is limited only by the overvoltage protection. · Because the enclosures of the flow meters and the flow converter are made of aluminium alloy, when used in an potentially explosive atmosphere requiring apparatus of equipment categoly 1 G, they must be installed so, that even in the event of rare incidents, an ignition source due to impact of friction between the enclosure and iron/steel is excluded.

· Intrinsically Safe Ex ic Applicable Standard:
EN 60079-0:2012+A11:2013 EN 60079-11:2012 Type of Protection: Ex ic IIC T4...T1 Gc (Integral Type) Ex ic IIC T6...T1 Gc (Remote Type Detector) Ex ic IIC T5...T4 Gc (Remort Type Converter)

Group: II Category: 3 G Enclosure:IP66/67 Overvoltage Category:I Ambient Temperature: -40 to +60°C (Integral Type) -50 to +80 [+79]°C (Remote Type Detector) (Option /LT below -29°C, [ ] for Option /MV at T6) -40 to +80°C (Remote Type Converter)

(Integral Type)
Temperature Class T4 T3 T2 T1

Process Temperature -40°C to +135°C -40°C to +199°C -40°C to +250°C ­40°C to +250°C

(Remote Type Detector)
Temperature Class T6 T5 T4 T3 T2 T1

Process Temperature ­196°C to +84/[+79]°C
­196°C to +100°C ­196°C to +135°C ­196°C to +199°C ­196°C to +299/[+289]°C ­196°C to +449/[+439]°C

*: Use /HT option above +250°C, use /LT option below -29°C, [ ] for /MV option.

Electrical data: Supply and Output Circuit (SUPPLY + and ­);
FISCO Field Device Entity Concept:
Maximum Input Voltage Ui: 32Vdc Internal Capacitance Ci: 3.52nF Internal Inductance Li: 0mH Electrical Connection: ANSI 1/2 NPT female,
ISO M20 X 1.5 female

For the connection of DYA to DY-N : Maximum cable capacitance: 160nF Electrical Connection: ANSI 1/2 NPT female,
ISO M20 X 1.5 female

Specific conditions of use · Electrostatic charges on the non-metallic parts (excluding glass parts) or coated parts of the equipment shall be avoided. ·The dielectric strength of at least 500 V a.c. r.m.s. between the intrinsically safe circuits and the enclosure of the flow meter or the converter is limited only by the overvoltage protection.

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<10. EXPLOSION PROTECTED TYPE INSTRUMENT>

10-3

(2) Installation

(3) Operation

WARNING
· Take care the following warning marking. "POTENTIAL ELECTROSTATIC CHARGING HAZARD"
· Electrostatic charge may cause an explosion hazard. Avoid any actions that cause the generation of electrostatic charge, such as rubbing with a dry cloth on coating face of the product.
· All wiring shall comply with IEC 60079-14, and local electric codes and requirements.
· In cases where the process temperature exceeds 200 °C, use external heat resistant cable and cable gland with a maximum allowable temperature of 90 °C or above.
· In case of Flameproof, Cable glands and/or adapters with a suitable temperature rating shall be of Ex db certified by ATEX.
· In case of Intrinsically Safe Ex ic, Cable glands and/or adapters with a suitable temperature rating shall be of Ex "n", Ex "e", or Ex "d" certified by ATEX.
· Cable glands and adapters shall be installed so as to maintain the specified degree of protection (IP Code) of the flowmeter.
· In order to prevent the earthing conductor from loosening, the conductor must be secured to the terminal, tightening the screw with appropriate torque. Care must be taken not to twist the conductor.
The grounding terminals are located on the inside and outside of the terminal area. Connect the cable to grounding terminal in accordance with wiring procedure (1) or (2).

WARNING
· Take care the following warning marking. "POTENTIAL ELECTROSTATIC CHARGING HAZARD"
· Electrostatic charge may cause an explosion hazard. Avoid any actions that cause the generation of electrostatic charge, such as rubbing with a dry cloth on coating face of the product.
· Take care not to generate mechanical spark when access to the equipment and the peripheral devices in hazardous locations.
· In case of Flameproof, take care the following warning marking when opening the cover. "AFTER DE-ENERGIZING, DELAY 3 MINUTES BEFORE OPENING"
(4) Maintenance and Repair
WARNING
When maintenance and repair are performed, confirm the following conditions and the then perform works. Confirm the power supply is cut off and the voltage of power supply terminal is not supplied. Only personnel authorized by Yokogawa Electric Corporation can repair the equipment in accordance with the relevant standards: EN 60079-19 (Equipment repair, overhaul and reclamation) and EN 60079-17 (Electrical installation inspection and maintenance).

Case

Cable

Washer

Screw

Screw

Washer

Cable

Clamp

(1) Internal grounding terminal

(2) External grounding terminal
F1001.ai

Figure 10.1 Wiring Procedure for Grounding Terminals for Flameproof

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<10. EXPLOSION PROTECTED TYPE INSTRUMENT>

10-4

(5) Installation Diagram of Intrinsically safe (and Note)

[ Integral type ]

[ Remote type ]

Terminator

DY (Flowmeter)

Terminator

DYA (Converter)
A B T C

DYC (Signal Cable)
DY-N (Flowmeter)
A B T(*1)

Field Instrument

Field Instrument

Field Instrument Hazardous Location

Field Instrument Hazardous Location

Terminator

Non Hazardous Location

Safety Barriar

Terminator

Non Hazardous Location

Safety Barriar

(*1): Wire for T termanal
With temperature sensor type: Installed Without temperature sensor type: Not Installed

Note

· In the rating 1, the output current of the barrier must be limited by a resistor `Ra' such that Io=Uo/Ra.

· In the rating 2, the output of the barrier must be the characteristics of the trapezoid or the rectangle and this transmitter can be

connected to Fieldbus equipment which are in according to the FISCO model.

· The terminators may be built-in by a barrier.

· More than one field instrument may be connected to the power supply line.

· The terminator and the safety barrier shall be certified.

F1002.ai

Electrical data
Maximum Input Voltage Ui Maximum Input Current Ii Maximum Input Power Pi Maximum Internal Capacitance Ci Maximum Internal Inductance Li

Ex ia II C

Rating1 (Entity)

Rating2 (FISCO)

24 Vdc

17.5 Vdc

250 mA

500 mA

1.2 W

5.5 W

3.52 nF

3.52 nF

0 mH

0 mH

Ex ic II C Rating (Entity)
32 Vdc ­ ­
3.52 nF 0 mH

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<10. EXPLOSION PROTECTED TYPE INSTRUMENT>

10-5

(6) Screw Marking

The type of electrical connection is stamped near the electrical connection port according to the following codes.

Screw size ISO M20 X 1.5 female ANSI 1/2NPT female

Marking
!M !N

F1003.ai
(7) Name Plate Example for name plates in case of "Flameproof, Integral type"

10.2 FM
(1) Technical Data
· Explosion Proof Applicable Standard:Class 3600 2011,
Class 3611 2004, Class 3615 2006, Class 3810 1989, Including Supplement 1 1995, NEMA 250 1991 Type of Protection: Explosion proof for Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C and D; Dust-ignition proof for Class II/III, Division 1, Groups E, F,and G.
"SEAL ALL CONDUITS 18 INCHES." "WHEN INSTALLED IN DIV.2, SEALS NOT REQUIRED"

*2
MODEL: Specified model code SUFFIX: Specified suffix code STYLE: Style code SUPPLY: Supply voltage OUTPUT: Output signal MWP: Maximum working pressure PROCESS TEMP.: Process temperature K-FACTOR: Device-specific factor RANGE: Specified range NO.: Upper column: Manufacturing serial number *3
Lower column: T he year and month of production TAG NO.: Specified TAG No. Tokyo 180-8750 JAPAN: address of manufacturer.*4 0344: T he indentification number of the notified body
: Specific ATEX Marking*1 DEKRA 11ATEX0212X: Certificate number*1 Ex db IIC T6...T1 Gb: Type of Protection*1
*1) Example for "Flameproof, Integral type" *2) The product - producing country *3) The first number in the second block of "NO." column is the
last one number of the production year. For example, the year of production of the product engraved as follows is year 2018. NO. S5K965926 835

Produced in 2018 *4) "180-8750" is a zip code which represents the following
address:2-9-32 Nakacho, Musashino-shi, Tokyo Japan

Enclosure Rating: Type 4X Temperature Code: T6 Ambient Temperature:-40 to +60°C Power Supply:9 to 32 Vdc (Integral Type and
Remote Type Converter) Output Signal (Remote Type Detector): Output Signal to Converter; 30Vp-p,
100µAp-p Input/Output Signal (Remote Type Converter): Input Signal from Flowmeter; 30Vp-p,
100µAp-p Electrical connection : ANSI 1/2 NPT female
· Intrinsically Safe Applicable Standard:Class 3600: 2011,
Class 3610: 2010, Class 3611: 2004, Class 3810: 2005, NEMA 250: 1991, ANSI/ISA 60079-0: 2013, ANSI/ISA 60079-11: 2014, ANSI/ISA 60079-27: 2006

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<10. EXPLOSION PROTECTED TYPE INSTRUMENT>

10-6

Type of Protection : Intrinsically Safe for Class I, II, III, DIV.1, Groups A, B, C, D, E, F and G, T4, and Class I, Zone 0, AEx ia IIB/IIC T4, Entity, FISCO Nonincendive for Class I, II, Div.2, Groups A, B, C, D, F and G, Class III, DIV.1, Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC, FNICO
Ambient Temperature : ­40 to +60°C (Integral Type and Vortex Flow Converter) ­40 to +80°C (Remote Type Detector)
Indoors and Outdoors : Type 4X Electrical Parameters : Intrinsically Safe
[Entity] Vmax=24 V, Imax=250 mA, Pi=1.2 W, Ci=3.52 nF, Li=0 mH [FISCO (IIC)] Vmax=17.5 V, Imax=380 mA, Pi=5.32 W, Ci=3.52 nF, Li=0 mH [FISCO (IIB)] Vmax=17.5 V, Imax=460 mA, Pi=5.32 W, Ci=3.52 nF, Li=0 mH Nonincendive Vmax=32 V, Ci=3.52 nF, Li=0 mH Electrical Connection : ANSI 1/2NPT female
(2) Wiring · Explosion proof
WARNING

(3) Operation · Explosion proof
WARNING
· In case of Explosion proof, note a warning label worded as follows. Warning: OPEN CIRCUIT BEFORE REMOVING COVER. INSTALL IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE INSTRUCTION MANUAL (IM) 01F06A00-01EN.
· Take care not to generate mechanical spark when access to the instrument and peripheral devices in hazardous locations.
(4) Maintenance and Repair
WARNING
The instrument modification or part replacements by other than authorized representative of Yokogawa Electric Corporation is prohibited and will void the approval of FM Approvals.

· All wiring shall comply with National Electrical Code ANSI/NFPA 70 and Local Electrical Code.
· "SEAL ALL CONDUITS 18 INCHES" " WHEN INSTALLED DIV.2, SEALS NOT REQUIRED".

· Intrinsically Safe

NOTE
If you are using a hand-held terminal in the hazardous area, read the Control Drawing or Instruction Manual of handheld terminal.

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<10. EXPLOSION PROTECTED TYPE INSTRUMENT>

10-7

(5) Installation Diagram

Intrinsically Safe (and WARNING)

Model: DY Series

Date: April 18, 2014

Control Drawing Intrinsically Safe Installation (Integral Type)

)1-+.%3/1

,%22+5+2+/. 1/402 ,%22+5+2+/. 1/402 ,%22+5+2+/. ,%22$/.)1/40 )-0)1%341),%22

#!/13)7,/6-)3)1
  #))3%&,)&),/6 

!-%7 -%7

/1

/1

+

+

+

"

! -

.3+38


 





 
  


 
  


+

+

. -
















 +),()5+')


Model: DY Series Intrinsically Safe Installation (Remote Type)

Date: April 18,D2a0t1e:4 May 8, 2003

!+40.1'624

/'55.8.5.21
42735 /'55.8.5.21
42735 /'55.8.5.21
 /'55&21+ 4273 !+03+4'674+/'55!

% .-1'/'(/+

%#246+:/29218+46+4





 "% ++6'(/+(+/29 

! 

%#246+:/290+6+4   ! 
 

#0': 0':

24

24

.

".

.

$

# 0

16.6;








  
 



  
 



.

.

1 0

  


1/;,2407/6.8'4.'(/+6;3+

 .+/*+8.)+


)1-+.%3/1
22/'+%3)( 00%1%342

 +),()5+')


%9%1(/42,%22+*+)(/'%3+/.

.',%22+*+)(/'%3+/.

!+40.1'624
552).'6+* 33'4'675

 .+/*+8.)+


'<'4*275/'55.,.+*2)'6.21 "1)/'55.,.+*2)'6.21

Rev.

Doc. No.: IFM021-A20 P.1

Rev.

Yokogawa Electric Corporation

Model: DY Series

Date: April 18, 2014

Notes:

1. This drawing replaces the former control drawing IFM021-A12.

2. No revision to this drawing without prior approval of FM.

3. Installation must be in accordance with the National Electric Code (NFPA70), ANSI/ISA RP12.06.01 and relevant local codes.

4. The associated apparatus must be FM approved.

5. Control equipment connected to the associated apparatus must not use or generate more than 250 V a.c. r.m.s or d.c.

6. In case of entity-concept installations, the associated apparatus must be a linear source which meets the following conditions.

Voc (or Uo) Isc (or Io) Po Ca (or Co) La (or Lo)

 Vmax (or Ui)
 Imax (or Ii)  Pmax (or Pi)
 Ci + Ccable  Li + Lcable

7. FISCO installation must be in accordance with ANSI/ISA-60079-25 or ANSI/ISA-60079-27.

8. The control drawing of the associated apparatus must be followed when installing the flow meter or flow converter.

9. The terminator(s) must be FM approved.

10. The dielectric strength of at least 500 V a.c. r.m.s. between the intrinsically safe circuits and the enclosure of the flow meter or the converter is limited only by the overvoltage protection.

11. Dust-tight conduit seals must be used when installed in Class II or Class III environments.

12. Precautions shall be taken to minimize the risk from electrostatic discharge of painted parts of the enclosure.

13. WARNING ­ POTENTIAL ELECTROSTATIC CHARGING HAZARD ­ SEE USER'S MANUAL

14. WARNING ­ IN THE CASE WHERE THE ENCLOSURE OF THE VORTEX FLOW METER AND CONVERTER ARE MADE OF ALUMINUM, IF IT IS MOUNTED IN ZONE 0, IT MUST BE INSTALLED SUCH, THAT EVEN IN THE EVENT OF RARE INCIDENTS, IGNITION SOURCES DUE TO IMPACT AND FRICTION SPARKS ARE EXCLUDED

15. WARNING ­ SUBSTITUTION OF COMPONENTS MAY IMPAIR INTRINSIC SAFETY

Rev.

Doc. No.: IFM021-A20 P.3

Yokogawa Electric Corporation

Doc. No.: IFM021-A20 P.2

Yokogawa Electric Corporation

Date: May 8, 2003

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<10. EXPLOSION PROTECTED TYPE INSTRUMENT>

10-8

Model: DY Series Division 2 Installation (Integral Type)

Date: April 18, 2014

%.)'*"0+.

("//'2'/'+*.+1,/ ("//'2'/'+*.+1,/ ("//'2'/'+*
 ("//!+*%.+1, %),%."01.%("//

 +.0%4(+3)%0%.

  

)"4+.' '* ' )

Model: DY Series Division 2 Installation (Remote Type)

Date: April 18,D2a0t1e:4 May 8, 2003

(2-+.$4/2

,$33+6+3+/.2/503 ,$33+6+3+/.2/503 ,$33+6+3+/. ,$33#/.(2/50 (-0(2$452(,$33

"!/24(8,/7/.6(24(2





!-$8/2 +
!

 " +
.



+
-

  

"+*.$,$%,(
"!/24(8,/7-(4(2     
.,9)/2-5,4+6$2+$%,(490(

 '%($%2'#%


 '%($%2'#%


"6".$+1/("//'&'%$+#"0'+*

%.)'*"0+.
+3%.1,,(5 +*0.+(%-1',)%*0
%%+0%

*#("//'&'%$+#"0'+*

 +(,'(6+&(

 +(,'(6+&(

(2-+.$4/2
/7(2500,9 /.42/,(15+0-(.4
((/4(

$:$2'/53,$33+)+('/&$4+/. .&,$33+)+('/&$4+/.

Rev.

Doc. No.: IFM021-A20 P.4

Rev.

Yokogawa Electric Corporation

Model: DY Series

Date: April 18, 2014

Notes:

1. This drawing replaces the former control drawing IFM021-A12.
2. No revision to this drawing without prior approval of FM.
3. Installation must be in accordance with the National Electric Code (NFPA70), ANSI/ISA RP12.06.01 and relevant local codes.
4. In case Nonincendive Field Wiring Concept is used for the interconnection, FM approved Associated Nonincendive Field Wiring Apparatus, which meets the following conditions, must be used as the power supply / control equipment.
Voc (or Uo)  Vmax (or Ui) Ca (or Co)  Ci + Ccable La (or Lo)  Li + Lcable
5. FNICO installation must be in accordance with ANSI/ISA-60079-27. ANSI/ISA-60079-25 allows the use of FNICO field device in "ic FISCO" system.
6. The control drawing of the associated apparatus must be followed when installing the flow meter or flow converter.
7. The terminator(s) must be FM approved.
8. Dust-tight conduit seals must be used when installed in Class II or Class III environments.

9. WARNING ­ EXPLOSION HAZARD. FOR INSTALLATION OTHER THAN NONINCENDIVE FIELD WIRING, DO NOT DISCONNECT EQUIPMENT WHEN A FLAMMABLE OR COMBUSTIBLE ATMOSPHERE IS PRESENT
10. WARNING ­ SUBSTITUTION OF COMPONENTS MAY IMPAIR SUITABILITY FOR DIVISION 2

Doc. No.: IFM021-A20 P.5

Yokogawa Electric Corporation

Date: May 8, 2003

Rev.

Doc. No.: IFM021-A20 P.6 Yokogawa Electric Corporation

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<10. EXPLOSION PROTECTED TYPE INSTRUMENT>

10-9

10.3 IECEx

WARNING
· Only trained persons use this instrument in industrial locations.
· A modification of the equipment would no longer comply with the construction described in the certificate documentation.

(1) Technical Data

· Flameproof

Applicable Standard : IEC 60079-0:2011

IEC 60079-1:2014

Certificate : IECEx DEK 11.0077X

Type of Protection:

Ex db IIC T6...T1 Gb (Integral Type and Remote

Type Detector)

Ex db IIC T6 Gb (Remote Type Convertor)

Specification of Protection:

Temperature Class: (Integral Type and Remote

Type Detector)

Temperature Class T6

Process Temperature -40°C to +80°C

T5

-40°C to +100°C

T4

-40°C to +135°C

T3

-40°C to +200°C

T2

-40°C to +300°C

T1

-40°C to +450°C

*1 Note: Use /HT version above +250°C

Temperature Class:T6 (Remote Type Convertor) Ambient Temperature:
­30 to +60°C (With indicator) ­40 to +60°C (Without indicator) Power Supply: 9 to 32Vdc max.

Specific conditions of use · E lectrostatic charges on the non-metallic parts
(excluding glass parts) or coated parts of the equipment shall be avoided. · T he flameproof joints differ from the standard values in IEC 60079-1. Only personnel authorized by the manufacturer of the equipment can repair the flameproof joints. · T he property class of the fasteners used to fasten the sensor assembly part the transmitter enclosure is at least A2-50.

· Intrinsically Safe

Applicable Standard: IEC 60079-0:2011

IEC 60079-11:2011

Certificate: IECEx DEK 15.0012X

Type of Protection:

Ex ia IIC T4...T1 Ga (Integral Type)

Ex ia IIC T6...T1 Ga (Remote Type Detector)

Ex ia IIC T4 Ga (Remote Type Converter)

Ambient Temperature:

-40 to +60°C (Integral Type)

-50 to +80[+78]°C (Remote Type Detector)

-40 to +80°C (Remote Type Converter)

(Option /LT below -29°C, [ ] for Option /MV at T6)

Connect sensor circuit of DYA and DY-N (/HT)

Electrical Data:

Entity Ui = 24 V, Ii = 250 mA, Pi = 1.2 W,

Ci = 3.52 nF, Li = 0 mH

FISCO (IIC) Ui = 17.5 V, Ii = 500 mA, Pi = 5.5 W,

Ci = 3.52 nF, Li = 0 mH

Temperature Class:

(Integral Type)

Temperature Class T4

Process Temperature  +135°C

T3

 +200°C

T2

 +250°C

T1

 +250°C

(Remote Type Detector)
Temperature Class T6 T5 T4 T3 T2 T1

Process Temperature*  +84/[+78]°C  +100°C  +135°C  +199°C
 +299/[+288]°C  +449/[+438]°C

*: Use /HT option above +250 °C, use /LT option below -29 °C, [ ] for /MV option.

Electrical Connection: ANSI 1/2 NPT female, ISO M20 X 1.5 female

Specific conditions of use · Electrostatic charges on the non-metallic parts (excluding glass parts) or coated parts of the equipment shall be avoided. · When the enclosure of the flow meter or the flow converter are made of aluminum, if it is mounted in an area where the use of EPL Ga equipment is required, it must be installed such that, even in the event of rare incidents, ignition sources due to impact and friction sparks are excluded. · The dielectric strength of at least 500 V a.c. r.m.s. between the intrinsically safe circuits and the enclosure of the flow meter or the converter is limited only by the overvoltage protection.

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<10. EXPLOSION PROTECTED TYPE INSTRUMENT>

10-10

(2) Installation

(3) Operation

WARNING
· Take care the following warning marking. "POTENTIAL ELECTROSTATIC CHARGING HAZARD"
· Electrostatic charge may cause an explosion hazard. Avoid any actions that cause the generation of electrostatic charge, such as rubbing with a dry cloth on coating face of the product.
· All wiring shall comply with IEC 60079-14, and local electric codes and requirements.
· In cases where the process temperature exceeds 200 °C, use external heat resistant cable and cable gland with a maximum allowable temperature of 90 °C or above.
· In case of Flameproof, Cable glands and/or adapters with a suitable temperature rating shall be of Ex db certified by IECEx.
· Cable glands and adapters shall be installed so as to maintain the specified degree of protection (IP Code) of the flowmeter.
· In order to prevent the earthing conductor from loosening, the conductor must be secured to the terminal, tightening the screw with appropriate torque. Care must be taken not to twist the conductor.
The grounding terminals are located on the inside and outside of the terminal area. Connect the cable to grounding terminal in accordance with wiring procedure (1) or (2).

WARNING
· Take care the following warning marking. "POTENTIAL ELECTROSTATIC CHARGING HAZARD"
· Electrostatic charge may cause an explosion hazard. Avoid any actions that cause the generation of electrostatic charge, such as rubbing with a dry cloth on coating face of the product.
· Take care not to generate mechanical spark when access to the equipment and the peripheral devices in hazardous locations.
· In case of Flameproof, take care the following warning marking when opening the cover. "AFTER DE-ENERGIZING, DELAY 3 MINUTES BEFORE OPENING"
(4) Maintenance and Repair
WARNING
When maintenance and repair are performed, confirm the following conditions and the then perform works. Confirm the power supply is cut off and the voltage of power supply terminal is not supplied. Only personnel authorized by Yokogawa Electric Corporation can repair the equipment in accordance with the relevant standards: EN 60079-19 (Equipment repair, overhaul and reclamation) and EN 60079-17 (Electrical installation inspection and maintenance).

Case

Cable

Washer

Screw

Screw

Washer

Cable

Clamp

(1) Internal grounding terminal

(2) External grounding terminal
F1004.ai

Figure 10.2 Wiring Procedure for Grounding Terminals

(5) Electrical Connection
The type of electrical connection is stamped near the electrical connection port according to the following codes.

Screw size ISO M20 X 1.5 female ANSI 1/2NPT female

Marking
!M !N

F1005.ai

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<10. EXPLOSION PROTECTED TYPE INSTRUMENT>

10-11

(6) Name Plate

10.4 CSA

Example for name plates in case of "Flameproof, Integral type"
*2
MODEL: Specified model code SUFFIX: Specified suffix code STYLE: Style code SUPPLY: Supply voltage OUTPUT: Output signal MWP: Maximum working pressure PROCESS TEMP.: Process temperature K-FACTOR: Device-specific factor RANGE: Specified range NO.: Upper column: Manufacturing serial number
Lower column: T he year and month of production TAG NO.: Specified TAG No. IECEx DEK 11.0077X: Certificate number*1 Ex db IIC T6...T1 Gb: Type of Protection*1
*1) Example for "Flameproof, Integral type" *2) The product - producing country

(1) Technical Data
· Explosion Proof Applicable Standard: C22.1-98, C22.2 No.0-M1991,
C22.2 No.0.4-04, C22.2 No.0.5-1982, C22.2 No. 251966, C22.2 No. 30-M1986, C22.2 No. 94-M1991, C22.2 No. 142-M1987, C22.2 No. 61010-1-04, ANSI/ISA12.27.01-2003 Certificate: 1166201 Type of Protection: Explosion proof for Class I, B, C and D; Class II, Groups E, F and G; Class III. For Class I, Division 2 location:

"FACTORY SEALED, CONDUIT SEAL NOT REQUIRED."

Enclosure : Type 4X

Temperature Code:

(Integral Type and Remote Type Detector)

Temperature Code

Process Temperature

T6

85°C

T5

100°C

T4

135°C

T3

200°C

T2

300°C

T1

450°C

Temperature Code: T6 (Remote Type Converter) Ambient Temperature: -50 to +60°C Power Supply: 9 to 32 Vdc (Integral Type and
Remote Type Converter) Output Signal (Remote Type Detector):
Output Signal; 30Vp-p, 100Ap-p Input/Output signal (Remote Type Converter):
Input Signal; 30Vp-p, 100Ap-p Electrical Connection: ANSI 1/2 NPT female

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<10. EXPLOSION PROTECTED TYPE INSTRUMENT>
(2) Wiring · Explosion proof
WARNING
· All wiring shall comply with Canadian Electrical Code Part I and Local Electrical Codes.
· In Hazardous locations, wiring shall be in conduit as shown in the figure.
· A SEAL SHALL BE INSTALLED WITHIN 50cm OF THE ENCLOSURE.
· When the equipment is installed in Division 2, "FACTORY SEALED, CONDUIT SEAL NOT REQUIRED".
(3) Operation · Explosion proof
WARNING
· Note a warning label worded as follows. Warning: OPEN CIRCUIT BEFORE REMOVING COVER.
· Take care not to generate mechanical spark when access to the instrument and peripheral devices in hazardous locations.
(4) Maintenance and Repair
WARNING
The instrument modification or part replacements by other than authorized representatives of Yokogawa Electric Corporation are prohibited and will void CSA Certification.
(5) Dual Seal (Option /CF11) Dual Seal:
Certified by CSA to the requirement of ANSI/ISA 12.27.01 No additional sealing required. Primary seal failure annunciation: at the O-ring seal portion between shedder bar and amplifier housing.

10-12

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<10. EXPLOSION PROTECTED TYPE INSTRUMENT>

10.5 TIIS

Certificate:

Model

Shedder bar Material

DY015

E

DY025/R1

DY040/R2

X

DY025

E

DY040/R1

DY050/R2

X

DY040

E

DY050/R1

DY080/R2

X

DY050

E

DY080/R1

DY100/R2

X

DY080

E

DY100/R1

DY150/R2

X

DY100

E

DY150/R1

DY200/R2

X

DY150

E

DY200/R1

X

E DY200
X

DY250

E

DY300

E

DY400

B

Model

Shedder bar Material

DYA

Integral Type Flowmeter

N (None Indicator) D (With Indicator)

TC14901

TC14912

TC18903

TC18914

TC19504

TC19513

TC18904

TC18915

TC19505

TC19514

TC18905

TC18916

TC19506

TC19515

TC18906

TC18917

TC19507

TC19516

TC18907

TC18918

TC19508

TC19517

TC18908

TC18919

TC19509

TC19518

TC18909

TC18920

TC19510

TC19519

TC18910

TC18921

TC19511

TC19520

TC19512

TC19521

TC18945

TC18955

Remote Type Converter

N (None Indicator) D (With Indicator)

TC14934

TC14935

Remote Type Detector N (None Indicator) TC14923 TC18925 TC19522 TC18926 TC19523 TC18927 TC19524 TC18928 TC19525 TC18929 TC19526 TC18930 TC19527 TC18931 TC19528 TC18932 TC19529 TC19530 TC18965

10-13

Integral Type Flowmeter

None Indicator

With Indicator

Construction Ex d IIC T6



Flame Proof Approval 

Amb.Temp -20°C up to +60°C



Rating

Maximum power supply vortage: DC42V Current Signal: DC4-20mA Pulse Signal: ON : 2V 200mA OFF : 42V 4mA

Remote Type Flowmeter

Detector

Converter













Output Voltage: 30Vp-p Output Current: 100µ Ap-p

Maximum power supply vortage: DC42V Current Signal: DC4-20mA Pulse Signal: ON : 2V 200mA OFF : 42V 4mA Input Signal: 30V p-p,100µ A p-p Resistance Temp, Sensor Input: Pt1000 at 0°C Specified Current: less than 1mA

* In case that ambient temperature exceeds 50°C, use heat-resistant cables with maximum allowable temperature of 70°C or above.

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 1. LIST OF PARAMETERS FOR EACH BLOCK OF digitalYEWFLO>

A1-1

APPENDIX 1. LIST OF PARAMETERS FOR EACH BLOCK OF digitalYEWFLO

Note: The Write Mode column contains the modes in which each parameter is write enabled. O/S: Write enabled in O/S mode. MAN: Write enabled in Man mode and O/S mode. AUTO: Write enabled in Auto mode, Man mode, and O/S mode. -- : Write disabled

A1.1 Resource Block

Relative Index
0

Index Parameter Name 1000 Block Header

Factory Default TAG: "RS"

1

1001 ST_REV

--

2

1002 TAG_DESC

3

1003 STRATEGY

4

1004 ALERT_KEY

5

1005 MODE_BLK

6

1006 BLOCK_ERR

(Spaces) 1 1
-- 0

7

1007 RS_STATE

8

1008 TEST_RW

-- 0

9

1009 DD_RESOURCE (Spaces)

10

1010 MANUFAC_ID

0x594543

11

1011 DEV_TYPE

9

12

1012 DEV_REV

3

13

1013 DD_REV

1

14

1014 GRANT_DENY

--

15

1015 HARD_TYPES

0x0001 (Scalar input)

16

1016 RESTART

17

1017 FEATURES

1
0x000a (Soft write lock supported Report supported)

Write Mode

Explanation

Block Tag Information on this block such as Block Tag, DD Revision, = O/S Execution Time etc.

-- The revision level of the static data associated with the resource block. The revision value is incremented each time a static parameter value in this block is changed.

AUTO

The user description of the intended application of the block.

AUTO

The strategy field can be used to identify grouping of blocks. This data is not checked or processed by the block.

AUTO

The identification number of the plant unit. This information may be used in the host for sorting alarms, etc.

AUTO

The actual, target, permitted, and normal modes of the block.

-- This parameter reflects the error status associated with the hardware or software components associated with a block. It is a bit string, so that multiple errors may be shown.

-- State of the resource block state machine.

AUTO

Read/write test parameter-used only for conformance testing and simulation.

-- String identifying the tag of the resource which contains the Device Description for this resource.

-- Manufacturer identification number-used by an interface device to locate the DD file for the resource.

-- Manufacturer's model number associated with the resource-used by interface devices to locate the DD file for the resource.

-- Manufacturer revision number associated with the resource-used by an interface device to locate the DD file for the resource.

-- Revision of the DD associated with the resource-used by an interface device to locate the DD file for the resource.

AUTO

Options for controlling access of host computer and local control panels to operating, tuning and alarm parameters of the block.

-- The types of hardware available as channel numbers. bit0: Scalar input bit1: Scalar output bit2: Discrete input bit3: Discrete output

AUTO

Indicate the ways of restart 1: Run, 2: Restart resource, 3: Restart with defaults, and 4: Restart CPU processor.

-- Used to show supported resource block options.

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 1. LIST OF PARAMETERS FOR EACH BLOCK OF digitalYEWFLO>

A1-2

Relative Index 18
19 20 21 22 23 24
25 26
27
28
29 30
31 32 33 34
35 36
37
38 39 40 41 42

Index Parameter Name 1018 FEATURE_SEL
1019 CYCLE_TYPE 1020 CYCLE_SEL 1021 MIN_CYCLE_T 1022 MEMORY_SIZE 1023 NV_CYCLE_T 1024 FREE_SPACE 1025 FREE_TIME 1026 SHED_RCAS 1027 SHED_ROUT 1028 FAULT_STATE
1029 SET_FSTATE 1030 CLR_FSTATE 1031 MAX_NOTIFY 1032 LIM_NOTIFY 1033 CONFIRM_TIME 1034 WRITE_LOCK 1035 UPDATE_EVT 1036 BLOCK_ALM
1037 ALARM_SUM 1038 ACK_OPTION 1039 WRITE_PRI 1040 WRITE_ALM 1041 ITK_VER 1042 SOFT_REV

Factory Default 0x000a (Soft write lock supported Report supported) 0x0001(Scheduled) 0x0001(Scheduled) 3200 0 0 0
0 640000 (20 s)
640000 (20 s)
1
1 (OFF) 1 (OFF)
3 3 640000 (20 s) 1 (Not locked)
-- --
--
0xffff 0
-- 5
--

Write Mode AUTO
-- AUTO
-- -- -- --
-- AUTO
AUTO
--
AUTO AUTO
-- AUTO AUTO AUTO
-- --
--
AUTO AUTO
-- -- --

Explanation
Used to select resource block options. Bit0: Scheduled Bit1: Event driven Bit2: Manufacturer specified
Identifies the block execution methods available for this resource.
Used to select the block execution method for this resource.
Time duration of the shortest cycle interval of which the resource is capable.
Available configuration memory in the empty resource. To be checked before attempting a download.
Interval between writing copies of NV parameters to nonvolatile memory. Zero means never.
Percent of memory available for further configuration. digitalYEWFLO has zero which means a preconfigured resource.
Percent of the block processing time that is free to process additional blocks. Supported only with PID function.
Time duration at which to give up on computer writes to function block RCas locations. Supported only with PID function.
Time duration at which to give up on computer writes to function block ROut locations. Supported only with PID function.
Condition set by loss of communication to an output block, failure promoted to an output block or a physical contact. When fail-safe condition is set, Then output function blocks will perform their FSAFE actions. Supported only with PID function.
Allows the fail-safe condition to be manually initiated by selecting Set. Supported only with PID function.
Writing a Clear to this parameter will clear the device fail-safe state if the field condition, if any, has cleared. Supported only with PID function.
Maximum number of unconfirmed notify messages possible.
Maximum number of unconfirmed alert notify messages allowed.
The minimum time between retries of alert reports.
If set, no writes from anywhere are allowed, except to clear WRITE_LOCK. Block inputs will continue to be updated.
1: Not locked, 2: Locked
This alert is generated by any change to the static data.
The block alarm is used for all configuration, hardware, connection failure or system problems in the block. The cause of the alert is entered in the subcode field. The first alert to become active will set the Active status in the Status attribute. As soon as the Unreported status is cleared by the alert reporting task, another block alert may be reported without clearing the Active status, if the subcode has changed.
The current alert status, unacknowledged states, unreported states, and disabled states of the alarms associated with the function block.
Priority of the alarm generated by clearing the write lock. 0, 1, 3 to 15
This alert is generated if the write lock parameter is cleared.
Version number of interoperability test by Fieldbus Foundation applied to digitalYEWFLO.
digitalYEWFLO software revision number.

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 1. LIST OF PARAMETERS FOR EACH BLOCK OF digitalYEWFLO>

A1-3

Relative Index 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53

Index Parameter Name Factory Default

1043 1044 1045 1046 1047 1048 1049 1050 1051 1052 1053

SOFT_DESC

SIM_ENABLE_MSG (Spaces)

DEVICE_STATUS_1

--

DEVICE_STATUS_2

--

DEVICE_STATUS_3

--

DEVICE_STATUS_4

--

DEVICE_STATUS_5

--

DEVICE_STATUS_6

--

DEVICE_STATUS_7

--

DEVICE_STATUS_8

--

SOFTDWN_ PROTECT

0x01

54

1054 SOFTDWN_

FORMAT

0x01

55

1055 SOFTDWN_COUNT 0x0000

56

1056 SOFTDWN_ACT_

0x00

AREA

57

1057 SOFTDWN_MOD_ [0]:1, [1]-[7]:0

REV

58

1058 SOFTDWN_ERROR 0

Write Mode
-- AUTO
-- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- AUTO
AUTO
--
--
--

Explanation
Yokogawa internal use. Software switch for simulation function. Device status (VCR setting etc.) Device status (failure or setting error etc.) Device status (function block setting) Device status (sensor status) Device status (function block setting) Not used for digitalYEWFLO Not used for digitalYEWFLO. Not used for digitalYEWFLO. Mask the software download function. 0x01:No masking 0x02:Masking Select the software download function format. 0x01:Conform to FF Specification Number of the execution times of the software download function. Display he running Flash ROM number 0:Flash ROM#0 is running 1:Flash ROM#1 is running Display the module revision of the software.

-- Display the error at the software downloading.

A1.2 Al Function Block

Relative Index

Index AI1 AI2 AI3

Parameter Name

Factory Default

0 4000 4100 4200 Block Header

TAG: "AI1", "AI2" or "AI3"

1 4001 4101 4201 ST_REV

0

2 4002 4102 4202 TAG_DESC 3 4003 4103 4203 STRATEGY

(Spaces) 1

4 4004 4104 4204 ALERT_KEY

1

5 4005 4105 4205 MODE_BLK 6 4006 4106 4206 BLOCK_ERR

AUTO 0

7 4007 4107 4207 PV

0

8 4008 4108 4208 OUT 9 4009 4109 4209 SIMULATE

0 1 (Disabled)

Write Mode

Explanation

Block Tag = Information on this block such as Block Tag, DD

O/S

Revision, Execution Time etc.

--

The revision level of the static data associated with the

function block. The revision value will be incremented

each time a static parameter value in the block is

changed.

AUTO

The user description of the intended application of the block.

AUTO

The strategy field can be used to identify grouping of blocks. This data is not checked or processed by the block.

AUTO

The identification number of the plant unit. This information may be used in the host for sorting alarms, etc.

AUTO

The actual, target, permitted, and normal modes of the block.

--

This parameter reflects the error status associated with

the hardware or software components associated with

a block. It is a bit string, so that multiple errors may be

shown.

--

Either the primary analog value for use in executing the

function, or a process value associated with it.

May also be calculated from the READBACK value of

an AO block.

Value = MAN The primary analog value calculated as a result of executing the function.

AUTO

Allows the transducer analog input or output to the block to be manually supplied when simulate is enabled. When simulation is disabled, the simulate value and status track the actual value and status. 1=Disabled, 2=Active

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 1. LIST OF PARAMETERS FOR EACH BLOCK OF digitalYEWFLO>

A1-4

Relative Index

Index AI1 AI2 AI3

Parameter Name

Factory Default

Write Mode

Explanation

10 4010 4110 4210 XD_SCALE

Specified at the O/S time of order (Note 3) (-40 to 260°C for AI2, 0 to 10m3/h for AI3)

The high and low scale values, engineering units code, and number of digits to the right of the decimal point used with the value obtained from the transducer for a specified channel. Read Section 6.3 "AI Function Block Parameters" for the unit available.

11 4011 4111 4211 OUT_SCALE

Specified at the O/S time of order (Note 3) (-40 to 260°C for AI2, 0 to 10m3/h for AI3)

The high and low scale values, engineering units code, and number of digits to the right of the decimal point to be used in displaying the OUT parameter and parameters which have the same scaling as OUT. Read Section 6.3 "AI Function Block Parameters" for the unit available.

12 4012 4112 4212 GRANT_DENY 0x00

AUTO

Options for controlling access of host computers and local control panels to operating, tuning and alarm parameters of the block.

13 4013 4113 4213 IO_OPTS

0x0000 (AI1) O/S 0x0000 (AI2) 0x0000 (AI3)

Options which the user may select to alter input and output block processing. bit 6: Low cutoff

14 4014 4114 4214 STATUS_OPTS 0

O/S

Options which the user may select in the block

processing of status. bit 3: Propagate Failure Forward,

bit 6: Uncertain if Man mode, bit 7: Bad if limited, bit 8:

Uncertain if Man mode.

15 4015 4115 4215 CHANNEL

1 (AI1)

O/S

The number of the logical hardware channel that is

2 (AI2)

connected to this I/O block. This information defines

5 (AI3)

the transducer to be used going to or from the physical

world. AI1: Flow rate, AI2: Temperature, AI3: Volumetric

flow rate.

16 4016 4116 4216 L_TYPE

Direct (1)

MAN

Determines if the values passed by the transducer block to the AI block may be used directly (Direct (1)) or if the value is in different units and must be converted linearly (Indirect (2)), or with square root (Ind Sqr Root (3)), using the input range defined by the transducer and the associated output range. "Indirect Square Root" is not used for the digitalYEWFLO.

17 4017 4117 4217 LOW_CUT

0.0 (AI1) 0.0 (AI2) 0.0 (AI3)

AUTO

Sets low cut point of output. This low cut value become available by setting "Low cutoff" to "IO-OPTS".

18 4018 4118 4218 PV_FTIME

0sec (AI1) 0sec (AI2) 0sec (AI3)

AUTO

Time constant of a single exponential filter for the PV, in seconds.

19 4019 4119 4219 FIELD_VAL

--

--

Raw value of the field device in percent of the PV

range, with a status reflecting the Transducer condition,

before signal characterization (L_TYPE), filtering (PV_

FTIME), or low cut (LOW_CUT).

20 4020 4120 4220 UPDATE_EVT

--

--

This alert is generated by any change to the static data.

21 4021 4121 4221 BLOCK_ALM

--

--

The block alarm is used for all configuration, hardware,

connection failure or system problems in the block. The

cause of the alert is entered in the subcode field. The

first alert to become active will set the Active status in

the Status attribute. As soon as the Unreported status

is cleared by the alert reporting task, another block alert

may be reported without clearing the Active status, if

the subcode has changed.

22 4022 4122 4222 ALARM_SUM

--

--

The current alert status, unacknowledged states,

unreported states, and disabled states of the alarms

associated with the function block.

23 4023 4123 4223 ACK_OPTION 0xffff

AUTO

Selection of whether alarms associated with the block will be automatically acknowledged.

24 4024 4124 4224 ALARM_HYS

0.5%

AUTO

Amount the PV must return within the alarm limits before the alarm condition clears. Alarm Hysteresis is expressed as a percent of the PV span. 0 to 50

25 4025 4125 4225 HI_HI_PRI

0

AUTO

Priority of the high high alarm. 0, 1, 3 to 15

26 4026 4126 4226 HI_HI_LIM

1. #INF

AUTO

The setting for high high alarm in engineering units. (Note 1)

27 4027 4127 4227 HI_PRI

0

AUTO

Priority of the high alarm. 0, 1, 3 to 15

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 1. LIST OF PARAMETERS FOR EACH BLOCK OF digitalYEWFLO>

A1-5

Relative Index

Index AI1 AI2 AI3

Parameter Name

Factory Default

28 4028 4128 4228 HI_LIM

1. #INF

29 4029 4129 4229 LO_PRI

0

30 4030 4130 4230 LO_LIM

-1. #INF

31 4031 4131 4231 LO_LO_PRI 32 4032 4132 4232 LO_LO_LIM

0 -1. #INF

33 4033 4133 4233 HI_HI_ALM

--

34 4034 4134 4234 HI_ALM

--

35 4035 4135 4235 LO_ALM

--

36 4036 4136 4236 LO_LO_ALM

--

37 4037 -- 4237 TOTAL

0

38 4038 -- 4238 TOTAL_START 1 (Stop)

39 4039 -- 4239 TOTAL_RATE_VA 1

40 4040 -- 4240 TOTAL_RESET 1 (Off)

Write Mode

Explanation

AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO
-- AUTO O/S AUTO

The setting for high alarm in engineering units. (Note 1)
Priority of the low alarm. 0, 1, 3 to 15
The setting for the low alarm in engineering units. (Note 2)
Priority of the low low alarm. 0, 1, 3 to 15
The setting of the low low alarm in engineering units. (Note 2)
The status for high high alarm and its associated time stamp.
The status for high alarm and its associated time stamp.
The status of the low alarm and its associated time stamp.
The status of the low low alarm and its associated time stamp.
Indicates the totalized flow rate.
Starts/stops the totalizer.
Totalization rate (Note 4)
Resets the totalized flow rate. This parameter value reverts to 1 (Off) after it has been set to 2 to perform resetting.

Note 1: An intended set value can be written only if Min(OUT_SCALE.EU0, OUT_SCALE.EU100)  the intended value  +INF. Note 2: An intended set value cannot be written if ­INF  the intended value  Min(OUT_SCALE.EU0, OUT_SCALE.EU100). Note 3: Indicates the corresponding data for the temperature. Note 4: The setting range of TOTAL_RATE_VAL is above 0 and its unit is determined by the setting in the Units Index element of XD_
SCALE. For example, if m3/h is set in Units Index of XD_SCALE, then the unit of TOTAL_RATE_VAL is m3/p (square meters per pulse), or if kg/s is set in Units Index of XD_SCALE, the unit of TOTAL_RATE_VAL is kg/p. Nevertheless, for TOTAL_RATE_VAL, set a power of ten such as 0.1, 1, 10, or 100. If any other number is set, the totalizer reading on the LCD indicator shows the totalized pulse count without the unit.

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 1. LIST OF PARAMETERS FOR EACH BLOCK OF digitalYEWFLO>

A1-6

A1.3 Transducer Block

Relative Index 0 1
2 3 4 5 6
7 8
9 10 11
12
13
14 15
16 17 18 19 20 21
22 23
24 25

Index 2000 2001
2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
2007 2008
2009 2010 2011
2012
2013
2014 2015
2016 2017 2018 2019 2020 2021
2022 2023
2024 2025

Parameter Name

Factory Default

Write Mode

Explanation

Block Header

TAG: "TB"

Block Tag Information on this block such as Block Tag, DD Revision, = O/S Execution Time etc.

ST_REV

--

-- The revision level of the static data associated with the

function block. The revision value will be incremented each

time a static parameter value in the block is changed.

TAG_DESC

(Spaces)

AUTO

The user description of the intended application of the block

STRATEGY

1

AUTO

The strategy field can be used to identify grouping of blocks. This data is not checked or processed by the block.

ALERT_KEY

1

AUTO

The identification number of the plant unit. This information may be used in the host for sorting alarms, etc.

MODE_BLK

AUTO

AUTO

The actual, target, permitted, and normal modes of the block.

BLOCK_ERR

0

-- This parameter reflects the error status. The factors of digitalYEWFLO TR Block are; *Error of TB block. *TR block is on O/S mode.

UPDATE_EVT

--

-- This alert is generated by any change to the static data.

BLOCK_ALM

--

-- The block alarm is used for all configuration, hardware,

connection failure or system problems in the block. The

cause of the alert is entered in the subcode field. The

first alert to become active will set the Active status in the

Status attribute.

TRANSDUCER_ DIRECTORY

1, 2010

-- A directory that specifies the number and starting indices of the device.

TRANSDUCER_ TYPE

Standard Flow with Calibration (104)

-- Identifies the device type, which is "Standard Flow with Calibration" for the digitalYEWFLO.

XD_ERROR

0 (No Error)

-- Indicates the error code of the error of the highest priority from among the errors currently occurring in the transducer block.

COLLECTION_ DIRECTORY

3, 2013, 0x80020380 2028, 0x80020382, 2031, 0x30003

-- A directory that specifies the number, starting indices, and DD Item IDs of the data collections in each transducer within a transducer block.

PRIMARY_ VALUE_ Volumetric flow (101) O/S TYPE

The type of measurement represented by the primary value. Followings are available for the digitalYEWFLO: 100=mass flow, 101=volumetric flow

PRIMARY_ VALUE

--

-- Indicates the flow rate.

PRIMARY_ VALUE_ (Note 1) RANGE

-- Indicates the flow range. These values are converted the values of SENSOR_ RANGE by the unit of XD_SCALE and the data of LINE_ SIZE.

CAL_POINT_HI

Max. range (Note 2) O/S

The highest calibrated value. To set within the range of SENSOR_RANGE.

CAL_POINT_LO Min. range (Note 3) O/S

The lowest calibrated value. To set within the range of SENSOR_RANGE.

CAL_MIN_SPAN (Note 1)

-- The minimum calibration span value allowed.

CAL_UNIT

m3/h (1349) (Note 4) O/S

The engineering unit for the calibrated values. Read Table 6.2 for the unit available.

SENSOR_TYPE

Vortex (112)

-- Indicates the sensor type, which is "Vortex" for the digitalYEWFLO.

SENSOR _RANGE (Note 1)

-- The high and low range limit values, engineering units code and the number of digits to the right of the decimal point for the sensor.

SENSOR_SN

Serial No.

-- Serial number.

SENSOR_CAL _METHOD

volumetric (100)

O/S

The method of the last sensor calibration. 100=volumetric 101=static weight

SENSOR_CAL _LOC

--

O/S

Sets/indicates the location of the last sensor calibration.

SENSOR_CAL _DATE

--

O/S

Sets/indicates the date of the last sensor calibration.

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 1. LIST OF PARAMETERS FOR EACH BLOCK OF digitalYEWFLO>

A1-7

Relative Index 26
27

Index Parameter Name

2026 2027

SENSOR_CAL _WHO
LIN_TYPE

Factory Default --
linear with input (1)

28

2028 SECONDARY

0

_VALUE

29

2029 SECONDARY

_VALUE_UNIT

°C (1001)

30

2030 PRIMARY_

4 s

VALU E_FTIME

31

2031 TERTIARY _VALUE 0

32

2032 TERTIARY _VALUE_

--

UNIT

33

2033 LIMSW_1_VALUE

--

_D

34

2034 LIMSW_1 _TARGET 1 (PRIMARY_

VALUE)

35

2035 LIMSW_1 _

0

SETPOINT

36

2036 LIMSW_1_ACT

_DIRECTION

37

2037 LIMSW_1 _

HYSTERESIS

1 (HI LIMIT) 0

38

2038 LIMSW_1_UNIT

--

39

2039 LIMSW_2_VALUE

--

_D

40

2040 LIMSW_2 _TARGET 1 (PRIMARY_

VALUE)

41

2041 LIMSW_2 _

0

SETPOINT

42

2042 LIMSW_2_ACT

_DIRECTION

1 (HI LIMIT)

Write Mode O/S
-- O/S O/S AUTO
-- O/S
--
O/S O/S
O/S O/S
-- --
O/S O/S
O/S

Explanation
Sets/indicates the name of the person responsible for the last sensor calibration.
The linearization type of sensor output. digitalYEWFLO is "linear with input".
Temperature value.
Temperature value unit of AI2. The unit is linked to the unit of XD_SCALE.
Sets the time constant of damping for the flow rate calculation. Setting range: 0 to 99 s.
Indicates the totalized flow rate and its status.
Indicates the unit of the totalized flow rate; switches over in line with a change to the unit setting in XD_SCALE, among 1034 (m3), 1038 (L), 1088 (kg), 1092 (t), 1521 (Nm3), 1531 (NL), Sm3 (1526), and 1536 (SL). N: Normal, S: Standard
Indicates the value of limit switch 1, which switches ON and OFF depending on the digital value of the target input parameter selected in LIMSW_1_TARGET and based on the threshold set in LIMSW_1_SETPOINT with the hysteresis set in LIMSW_1_HYSTERESIS. The direction of the switching action is determined by the setting in LIMSW_1_ACT_DIRECTION.
The target of limit switch 1: 1 = PRIMARY_VALUE 2 = SECONDARY_VALUE
Sets the threshold of limit switch 1. If the value of LIMSW_1_ACT_DIRECTION is HIGH LIMIT, limit switch 1 turns ON when LIMSW_1_TARGET has gone beyond LIMSW_1_SETPOINT. If the value of LIMSW_1_ ACT_DIRECTION is LO LIMIT, limit switch 1 turns ON when LIMSW_1_TARGET has gone below LIMSW_1_ SETPOINT. The unit set in LIMSW_1_UNIT applies.
Selects the direction of the limit switch 1's actions: 1 = HI LIMIT (high-limit switch) 2 = LO LIMIT (low-limit switch)
Sets the hysteresis of limit switch 1 to be applied for resetting the LIMSW_1_VALUE_D to OFF after LIMSW_1_TARGET went beyond LIMSW_1_SETPOINT and LIMSW_1_VALUE_D turned ON (when used as a high-limit switch), or after LIMSW_1_TARGET went below LIMSW_1_SETPOINT and LIMSW_1_VALUE_D turned ON (when used as a low-limit switch).
Indicates the unit set in LIMSW_1_TARGET.
Indicates the value of limit switch 2, which switches ON and OFF depending on the digital value of the target input parameter selected in LIMSW_2_TARGET and based on the threshold set in LIMSW_2_SETPOINT with the hysteresis set in LIMSW_2_HYSTERESIS. The direction of the switching action is determined by the setting in LIMSW_2_ACT_DIRECTION.
The target of limit switch 2: 1 = PRIMARY_VALUE 2 = SECONDARY_VALUE
Sets the threshold of limit switch 2. If the value of LIMSW_2_ACT_DIRECTION is HIGH LIMIT, limit switch 2 turns ON when LIMSW_2_TARGET has gone beyond LIMSW_2_SETPOINT. If the value of LIMSW_2_ ACT_DIRECTION is LO LIMIT, limit switch 2 turns ON when LIMSW_2_TARGET has gone below LIMSW_2_ SETPOINT. The unit set in LIMSW_2_UNIT applies.
Selects the direction of the limit switch 2's actions: 1 = HI LIMIT (high-limit switch) 2 = LO LIMIT (low-limit switch)

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 1. LIST OF PARAMETERS FOR EACH BLOCK OF digitalYEWFLO>

A1-8

Relative Index 43
44 45
46 47
48
49
50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62

Index Parameter Name Factory Default

2043 LIMSW_2 _

0

HYSTERESIS

Write Mode
O/S

2044 LIMSW_2_UNIT

--

2045 ALARM _PERFORM 0x1070

-- AUTO

2046 ARITHMETIC

1 (Available)

--

_BLOCK

2047 SENSOR_STATUS

--

--

2048 THERMOMETER 1 (Monitor only)

O/S

_FUNCTION

(Note 5)

2049 FLUID_TYPE

1 (LIQUID: Volume) O/S (Note 5)

2050 TEMPERATURE _UNIT

°C (1001) (Note 5) O/S

2051 PROCESS_TEMP 15 (Note 5)

O/S

2052 BASE_TEMP

15 (Note 5)

O/S

2053 2054
2055

DENSITY_UNIT
PROCESS _ DENSITY
BASE_DENSITY

Kg/m3 (1097) (Note 5) O/S

1024 (Note 5)

O/S

1024 (Note 5)

O/S

2056 PRESSURE_UNIT MPaa (1545) (Note 5) O/S

2057 PROCESS _ PRESSURE

0.1013 (Note 5)

O/S

2058 BASE _PRESSURE 0.1013 (Note 5)

O/S

2059 DEVIATION

1 (Note 5)

O/S

2060 SECONDARY

4 s

_VALUE_FTIME

2061 CABLE_LENGTH 0

AUTO O/S

2062 FIRST_TEMP

0

O/S

_COEF

Explanation
Sets the hysteresis of limit switch 2 to be applied for resetting the LIMSW_2_VALUE_D to OFF after LIMSW_2_TARGET went beyond LIMSW_2_SETPOINT and LIMSW_2_VALUE_D turned ON (when used as a high-limit switch), or after LIMSW_2_TARGET went below LIMSW_2_SETPOINT and LIMSW_2_VALUE_D turned ON (when used as a low-limit switch).
Indicates the unit set in LIMSW_2_TARGET.
A series of bits, each of which works as a switch to enable and disable specific alarm(s); write zeros to the respective bits in this parameter to disable desired alarms. (For details, read APPENDIX 3 "OPERATION OF EACH PARAMETER IN FAILURE MODE.")
Indicates whether the arithmetic block is available.

Indicates whether the flow detector has the built-in temperature sensor:
1 = Standard 2 = Built-in Temp. Sensor

Selects the usage of the thermometer function:
1 = Monitor only 2 = Saturated steam 3 = Superheat steam 4 = GAS: STD/Normal 5 = LIQUID: Mass 6 = Not use
Selects the type of the measured process fluid:
1 = LIQUID: Volume 2 = GAS/STEAM: Volume 3 = LIQUID: Mass 4 = GAS/STEAM: Mass 5 = GAS: STD/Normal

(For details, read Section 6.2 "Transducer Block Parameters.")

Selects the unit of temperature.

Sets the normal operating temperature of the process. Setting range: ­999.9 to 999.9
Sets the temperature under the standard conditions of the process. Setting range: from ­999.9 to 999.9
Selects the unit of density.
Sets the density of the process fluid under the normal operating conditions. Setting range: 0.00001 to 32000
Sets the density of the process fluid under the standard operating conditions. Setting range: 0.00001 to 32000
Selects the unit of pressure between 1545 (= MPaa) and 1547 (= kPaa).
Sets the normal operating absolute pressure of the process. Setting range: 0.00001 to 32000
Sets the absolute pressure under the standard conditions of the process. Setting range: 0.00001 to 32000
Sets the deviation factor of the process fluid. Setting range: 0.001 to 10.0
Sets the time constant of damping for the temperature calculation. Setting range: 0 to 99 s
Sets the length of cable between the flow detector and remote amplifier. Set 0 for an integral type digitalYEWFLO. Setting range: 0 to 30 (meters)
Sets the first temperature coefficient for the density compensation of a liquid. Setting range: ­32000 to 32000 Unit: 1/TEMP_UNIT

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 1. LIST OF PARAMETERS FOR EACH BLOCK OF digitalYEWFLO>

A1-9

Relative Index
63

Index Parameter Name
2063 SECOND_TEMP _COEF

Factory Default 0

Write Mode
O/S

64

2064 SIZE_SELECT

25 mm (2) (Note 5) O/S

65

2065 BODY_TYPE

Standard (1)

O/S

66

206 VORTEX _

Standard (1)

O/S

SENSOR_TYPE

67

2067 K_FACTOR_UNIT p/L (1)

O/S

68

2068 K_FACTOR

68.6

O/S

69

2069 LOW_CUT_FLOW 0.46687 (minimum O/S

gas flow rate for the

size of 25 mm [1 in.])

70

2070 UPPER_DISPLAY 1

_MODE

AUTO

71

2071 LOWER_DISPLAY 1

_MODE

AUTO

72

2072 DISPLAY_CYCLE 1 (500 ms)

73

2073 USER_ADJUST

1

74

2074 REYNOLDS

_ADJUST

1 (Not Active)

75

2075 VISCOSITY _VALUE 1 (Note 5)

O/S, AUTO O/S
O/S O/S

76

2076 GAS_EXPANSION 1 (Not Active)

O/S

_FACT

77

2077 FLOW_ADJUST

1 (Not Active)

O/S

78

2078 FLOW_ADJ _FREQ 0

O/S

79

2079 FLOW_ADJ_DATA 0

O/S

80

2080 TRIGGER_LEVEL 1

O/S

81

2081 NOISE_BALANCE 1 (Auto)

O/S

_MODE

Explanation
Sets the second temperature coefficient for the density compensation of a liquid. Setting range: ­32000 to 32000 Unit: 1/TEMP_UNIT^2
Selects the flowmeter size: 1 = 15 mm (1/2 in.); 2 = 25 mm (1 in.); 3 = 40 mm (1.5 in.); 4 = 50 mm (2 in.); 5 = 80 mm (3 in.); 6 = 100 mm (4 in.); 7 = 150 mm (6 in.); 8 = 200 mm (8 in.); 9 = 250 mm (10 in.); 10 = 300 mm (12 in.); 11 = 400 mm (16 in.)
Selects the flowmeter body type: 1 = Standard; 2 = High Pressure; 3 = Low Flow Unit (1); 4 = Low Flow Unit (2)
Selects the vortex sensor type: 1 = Standard; 2 = High Temperature; 3: Low temperature.
Selects the unit of the K factor.
Sets the K factor of the combined detector at 15°C. Setting range: 0.00001 to 32000
Sets the low cutoff flow rate level. Setting range: Minimum flow rate x 0.5 to XD_SCALE.EU_100. The unit selected in PRIMARY_VALUE_RANGE.Units Index applies.
Selects the data to be displayed on the upper row of the LCD indicator:
1 = Flow Rate (%): Instantaneous flow rate as a percentage 2 = Flow Rate: Instantaneous flow rate in the specified unit 3 = Temperature (%): Temperature as a percentage (can only be selected for a mode with the MV option) 4 = Arithmetic Out
Selects the data to be displayed on the upper row of the LCD indicator, as follows:
1 = Blank 2 = Total: Totalized flow rate 3 = Temperature: Temperature (can only be selected for a mode with the MV option) 4 = Integrator Out
Sets the display refresh cycle of the LCD indicator, as a multiple of 500 milliseconds. Setting range: 1 to 10 (= 0.5 to 5 seconds)
User-set adjustment factor. The measured flow rate multiplied by this factor is output. Setting range: 0.00001 to 32000
Selects whether to activate Reynolds number correction: 1 = Not Active; 2 = Active
Sets the viscosity coefficient of the process fluid. When REYNOLDS_ADJUST is set to Active, this parameter needs to be set since it is used in the Reynolds number calculation. Setting range: 0.00001 to 32000 [mPa·Pas]
Selects whether to activate expansion correction for a compressible fluid: 1 = Not Active; 2 = Active
Selects whether to activate instrument error correction for a compressible fluid: 1 = Not Active; 2 = Active
Sets the first to fifth breakpoint frequencies for the instrument error correction in an array format. Setting range: 0.0 to 32000 (unit is Hz [1077])
Sets the correcting values corresponding to the first to fifth breakpoint frequencies for the instrument error correction in an array format. Setting range: ­50.00 to 50.00 (unit is % [1342])
Sets the trigger level. Setting range: 0.1 to 20.0
Indicates the mode of noise balance ratio tuning and allows tuning to be activated:
1 = Auto: Automatic noise balance mode 2 = Manual: Manual noise balance mode 3 = Tuning at Zero: Setting this value causes noise balance ratio to be tuned given that the current flow rate is zero; then after completion of the tuning, the parameter value reverts to 2 (Manual).

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 1. LIST OF PARAMETERS FOR EACH BLOCK OF digitalYEWFLO>

A1-10

Relative Index
82

Index Parameter Name 2082 NOISE_RATIO

Factory Default --

83

2083 SIGNAL_LEVEL

1

84

2084 FLOW_VELOCITY

--

85

2085 SPAN_VELOCITY

--

86

2086 VORTEX _

--

FREQUENCY

87

2087 SPAN_FREQ

--

88

2088 FLUID_DENSITY

--

89

2089 SENSOR _ERROR 0

_RECORD

90

2090 MODEL

digitalYEWFLO

91

2091 ALARM_SUM

0

153 2153 VOLUME_FLOW

--

154 2154 VOLUME _FLOW_

--

UNIT

Write Mode
--
O/S -- --
-- --
--
O/S, AUTO
O/S, AUTO O/S, AUTO
-- --

Explanation
Indicates the noise balance ratio. When the value of NOISE_BALANCE_MODE is 1 (Auto), this value cannot be modified. When it is 2 (Manual), the desired value can be set as a fixed ratio.
Sets the signal level. Setting range: 0.1 to 20.0
Indicates the current flow velocity in m/s (1061); updated periodically.
Indicates the span flow velocity in m/s (1061); updated periodically. (This parameter is set to the value calculated based on the density under the normal operating conditions and normal operating temperature specified by the customer.)
Indicates the current vortex generation frequency in Hz (1077); updated periodically.
Indicates the vortex generation frequency at the span flow in Hz (1077); updated periodically. (This parameter is set to the value calculated based on the density under the normal operating conditions and normal operating temperature specified by the customer.)
Indicates the fluid density calculated based on the temperature data, in the unit determined by DENSITY_ UNIT; updated periodically.
Record of the following errors regarding the sensor. This record will be automatically cleared when no error has occurred for a month. Recorded errors: Flow over output, Span set error, Preamp fault, EEPROM fault, Sensor fault, Transient noise, High vibration, Clogging, Fluctuating, Temp over output, Over temp, Temp sensor fault, Temp convert fault. Setting range: 0 only. Setting 0 clears the record.
Model of the flowmeter converter
Indicates the entire block's alarm statuses; Disable can only be set.
Indicates the volumetric flow rate.
Indicates the unit of VOLUME_FLOW. It links the unit of XD_SCALE of AI3.

Note 1: The value changes in line with a change to the SIZE_SELECT value or to the unit setting in XD_SCALE of the corresponding AI block.
Note 2: An intended value which meets both of the following conditions can only be written: CAL_POINT_LO < the intended value, and SENSOR_RANGE.EU100 > intended value.
Note 3: An intended value which meets both of the following conditions can only be written: CAL_POINT_HI < the intended value, and SENSOR_RANGE.EU100 > intended value.
Note 4: The flow rate unit can only be written. Note 5: These parameters are set in accordance with the specifications written in the registered sizing data if it is supplied.
In case of UNCALIBRATION order, they are set to the defaults when shipped.

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 1. LIST OF PARAMETERS FOR EACH BLOCK OF digitalYEWFLO>

A1-11

A1.4 DI Function Block

Relative Index

Index DI1 DI2

Parameter Name Factory Default

Write Mode

Explanation

0

6000 6100 Block Header

TAG: "DI1" or "DI2" Block Tag Information on this block such as the block tag, DD revision,

= O/S and execution time

1 6001 6101 ST_REV

0

-- The revision level of the static data of the DI block. The value of this parameter is incremented each time a static parameter value is changed.

2 6002 6102 TAG_DESC

(Spaces)

AUTO The user description of the intended application of the block

3 6003 6103 STRATEGY

1

AUTO Used by an upper-level system to identify grouping of the block. Not checked or processed by the block.

4 6004 6104 ALERT_KEY

1

AUTO The identification number of the plant unit. This information may be used in the host for sorting alarms.

5 6005 6105 MODE_BLK

O/S

AUTO The actual, target, permitted, and normal modes of the block

6 6006 6106 BLOCK_ERR

--

-- Indicates the error statuses related to the block itself.

7 6007 6107 PV_D

--

-- The primary discrete value (or process value) for execution

of the block's functions.

8 6008 6108 OUT_D

--

MAN Indicates the value and status of block's output.

9 6009 6109 SIMULATE_D 1 (Disabled)

AUTO

Allows use of values manually set instead of the limit switch input from the transducer block. When Disable is set for this value, the block reflects the actual input value and status. 1 = Disabled, 2 = Active

10 6010 6110 XD_STATE

0

-- Not used in a digitalYEWFLO.

11 6011 6111 OUT_STATE

0

-- Not used in a digitalYEWFLO.

12 6012 6112 GRANT_DENY 0

AUTO

Option to control access from the host computer and local control panel to tuning and alarm parameters. Before write access to a parameter, set the GRANT bit in this parameter to have the operation right to be granted. Then after write access, check the DENY bit in this parameter. If the write access is complete successfully, it is not ON.

13 6013 6113 IO_OPTS

0

O/S

Sets the block input/output options.

14 6014 6114 STATUS_OPTS 0

O/S

Defines block actions depending on block status conditions.

For DI blocks of a digitalYEWFLO, only bit 0 (Invert: on/off

state inversion) is effective.

15 6015 6115 CHANNEL

3 (DI1) 4 (DI2)

O/S

The channel number of the transducer block's logical

hardware channel connected to this block. Fixed to 3 for

DI1, 4 for DI2 in the DI blocks of a digitalYEWFLO.

16 6016 6116 PV_FTIME

0 s

AUTO Sets the time constant of damping for PV_D.

17 6017 6117 FIELD_VAL_D

--

-- The status of the limit switch signal transferred from the

transducer block

18 6018 6118 UPDATE_EVT

--

-- Shows the contents of an update event (a change to the

setpoint) upon occurrence.

19 6019 6119 BLOCK_ALM

--

-- Shows the contents of a block alarm upon occurrence.

20 6020 6120 ALARM_SUM 0

AUTO Indicates the current alarm statuses.

21 6021 6121 ACK_OPTION 0xffff (Unack)

AUTO Selects whether alarms associated with the block will be automatically acknowledged.

22 6022 6122 DISC_PRI

0

AUTO Sets the alarm priority level.

23 6023 6123 DISC_LIM

0

AUTO Indicates the status of the input for the discrete alarm.

24 6024 6124 DISC_ALM

--

-- Indicates the status related to the discrete alarm.

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 2. APPLICATION, SETTING AND CHANGE OF BASIC PARAMETERS>

A2-1

APPENDIX 2. APPLICATION, SETTING AND CHANGE OF BASIC PARAMETERS

A2.1 Applications and Selection of Basic Parameters

Setting Item (applicable parameters)

Summary

Tag numbers (PD-TAG)

Set the physical device (PD) tag and block tags. Up to 32 alphanumeric characters can be set for each of these tags. Read Section 5.4 "Setting of Tags and Addresses."

Calibration range setup (XD_SCALE of AI block)

Sets the range of input from the transducer block corresponding to the 0% and 100% points in operation within the AI1 function block. The maximum flow rate range in the registered sizing data is the factory default setting. Set four data: the unit of the range, the input value at the 0% point (always 0 for a digitalYEWFLO), the input value at the 100% point (equal to the flow span), and the decimal point position.

Output scale setup (OUT_SCALE of AI block)

Set the scale of output corresponding to the 0% and 100% points in operation within the AI function block. It is possible to set a unit and scale that differ from the measurement range. Set four data: the unit of the scale, the output value at the 0% point (i.e., the lower output scale limit), the output value at the 100% point (i.e., the upper output scale limit), and the decimal point position.

Output mode setup (L_TYPE of AI block)

Select the calculation function of each AI function block from the following: · Direct: The output of the transducer block is directly output only via filtering without
scaling and square root extraction (in the range set in XD_SCALE). · Indirect: Proportional scaling is applied to the input to the AI function block, and the
result is output (in the range set in OUT_SCALE). · IndirectSQRT: Square root extraction is applied to the input to the AI function block and the
result is output (in the range set in OUT_SCALE). This setting is not used for a digitalYEWFLO. This output mode setting also applies to the scale and unit of indications on the LCD indicator.

Damping time constant setup (PRIMARY_VALUE_FTIME of TR block)

Set the time constant of damping in seconds. The setting of PRIMARY_VALUE_FTIME affects not only the flow rate but also the totalization. In comparison, the setting of parameter PV_FTIME in an AI function block works as the damping time constant for the AI block's OUT. As the damping feature of the flowmeter itself, it is advisable to use PRIMARY_VALUE_FTIME.

Output signal low cut mode setup (LOW_CUT_FLOW of TR block)

This setup is used for zeroing flow rate readings in a low flow rate area. The value of LOW_ CUT_FLOW (the cutoff level) is set in the same unit as that for PRIMARY_VALUE_RANGE. In comparison, the setting of parameter LOW_CUT in an AI function block works as a low cutoff level setting for the AI block's OUT. As the low cutoff feature of the flowmeter itself, it is advisable to use LOW_CUT_FLOW.

Simulation setup (SIMULATE of AI/DI block)

Simulation of each AI/DI block can be performed in such a way that the value and status of the input to the block can be set arbitrarily. Use this function for loop checks or the like. Read Section 7.3 "Simulation Function. "

LOD display setup (UPPER_DISPLAY_MODE, LOWER_DISPLAY_MODE, and DISPLAY_CYCLE of TR block)

Set the units of data to be displayed on the LCD, and the display refresh cycle. Adjust DISPLAY_ CYCLE to improve legibility such as when used in a low temperature environment causing hard-to-read indications.

Calibration range change (CAL_POINT_HI and CAL_POINT_LO of TR block)

Set the 0% and 100% points for calibrations, i.e., the calibration range. The output can be calibrated precisely to the output of a user's reference device.

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 2. APPLICATION, SETTING AND CHANGE OF BASIC PARAMETERS>

A2-2

A2.2 Setting and Change of Basic Parameters
This section describes the procedure taken to set and change the parameters for each block. Obtaining access to each parameter differs depending on the configuration system used. For details, read the instruction manual for each configuration system.
Access the block mode (MODE_BLK) of each block.
Set the Target (Note 1) of block mode (MODE_BLK) to Auto, Man or O/S (Note 2) according to the Write Mode (Note 3) of the parameter to be set or changed.
Access the parameter to be set or changed.
Make setting or change in accordance with each parameter.
Set the Target of block mode (MODE_BLK) back to Auto (Note 2).
FA0201.ai
IMPORTANT
Do not turn the power OFF immediately after parameter setting. When the parameters are saved to the EEPROM, the redundant processing is executed for the improvement of reliability. If the power is turned OFF within 60 seconds after setting of parameters, changed parameters are not saved and may return to their original values.
Note 1: Block mode consists of the following four modes that are controlled by the universal parameter that displays the running condition of each block. Target: Sets the operating condition of the block. Actual: Indicates the current operating condition. Permit: Indicates the operating condition that the block is allowed to take. Normal: Indicates the operating condition that the block will usually take.
Note 2: The followings are the operating conditions which the individual blocks will take.

Automatic (Auto)
Manual (Man)
Out of Service (O/S)

AI Function
Block

Transducer Resource

Block

Block

DI Function
Block

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Note 3: Read APPENDIX 1 "LIST OF PARAMETERS FOR EACH BLOCK OF digital YEWFLO" for details of the Write Mode for each block.

A2.3 Setting the AI Function Blocks
Each digtalYEWFLO contains three AI function blocks (AI1, AI2 and AI3) having independent parameters. Set up the parameters of each AI block you use, individually as necessary. The AI1 block performs the flow rate output calculation (standard).

(1)-1. Setting the calibration range
Access the XD_SCALE parameter. Set the required unit in Unit Index of XD_SCALE. Set the upper range limit in EU at 100% of XD_SCALE. Set the lower range limit in EU at 0% of XD_SCALE. Set the decimal point position in Decimal Point of XD_SCALE.
FA0202.ai
Example: To measure 0 to 100m3/h,
Set m3/h (1349)*1 in Units Index of XD_SCALE, Set 100 in EU at 100% of XD_SCALE, and Set 0 in EU at 0% of XD_SCALE.

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 2. APPLICATION, SETTING AND CHANGE OF BASIC PARAMETERS>

A2-3

(1)-2. Setting the output scale
Access the OUT_SCALE parameter. Set the required unit in Unit Index of OUT_SCALE. Set the output value corresponding to the upper range limit in EU at 100% of OUT_SCALE. Set the output value corresponding to the lower range limit in EU at 0% of OUT_SCALE. Set the decimal point position in Decimal Point of OUT_SCALE.
FA0203.ai
Example: To set the output range to 0.00 to 100.00kg/h,
Set kg/h(1324)*1 in Units Index of OUT_SCALE, Set 100 in EU at 100% of OUT_SCALE, Set 0 in EU at 0% of OUT_SCALE, and Set 2 in Decimal Point of OUT_SCALE. The AI2 block performs the temperature output calculation (option /MV).

Example: To set the output range to 0 to 100%,
Set EU at 100% of XD_SCALE to 100. Set EU at 0% of XD_SCALE to 0. Set Unit Index of XD_SCALE to 1342.*1
*1: Each unit is expressed using a 4-digit numeric code. Read Table 6.2 and Section 6.5 "Integral LCD Indicator"

(3) Setting the output mode

Access the L_TYPE parameter. Set the output mode.

1: Direct

(Sensor output value)

2: Indirect

(Linear output value)

3: IndirectSQRT (Square root extraction

output value)*1

*1: IndirectSQRT is not used for the digitalYEWFLO.
FA0206.ai

(2)-1. Setting the calibration range

Access the XD_SCALE parameter. Set the upper range limit in EU at 100% of XD_SCALE. Set the lower range limit in EU at 0% of XD_SCALE. Set the required unit in Unit Index of XD_SCALE.

Example: To measure 0 to 200°C,
Set EU at 100% of XD_SCALE to 200. Set EU at 0% of XD_SCALE to 0. Set Unit Index of XD_SCALE to 1001.*1

FA0204.ai

(2)-2. Setting the output scale
Access the OUT_SCALE parameter. Set the output value corresponding to the upper range limit in EU at 100% of OUT_SCALE. Set the output value corresponding to the lower range limit in EU at 0% of OUT_SCALE. Set the required unit in Unit Index of XD_SCALE.
FA0205.ai

(4) Simulation Perform simulation of each AI function block by setting the desired value and status of the input to the block.
REMOTE LOOP TEST SWITCH is written to SIM_ENABLE_MSG (index 1044) parameter of the resource block.
Access the En/Disable element of the SIMULATE parameter to enable simulation.
1: Disabled 2: Active
Access the SIMULATE Status element of SIMULATE and set the desired status code.
Access the SIMULATE Value element of SIMULATE and set the desired input value.
FA0207.ai
If simulation is enabled, AI block uses SIMULATE Status and SIMULATE Value as the input, and if disabled, the AI block uses Transducer Status and Transducer Value as input. Read Section 7.3 "Simulation Function."

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 2. APPLICATION, SETTING AND CHANGE OF BASIC PARAMETERS>

A2-4

A2.4 Setting the Transducer Block
To access the digitalYEWFLO-specific functions in the transducer block, the Device Description (DD) for the digitalYEWFLO needs to have been installed in the configuration tool used. For installation, read Section 4.4 "Integration of DD."

The above shows the setting procedure for limit switch 1. As necessary, also set up limit switch 2.
(4) Setting up the LCD display Select the data to be displayed on the LCD indicator and the display refresh cycle.

(1) Setting the damping time constant
Access the PRIMARY_VALUE_FTIME parameter. Set the damping time constant (in units of seconds).
FA0208.ai

(2) Setting the output low cutoff level

Access the OUTPUT_CUT_FLOW parameter. Set the cutoff level of the flow rate output.

Low cut value Flow rate
Hysteresis 20%

FA0209.ai

(3) Setting the limit switch functions
Set up limit switches 1 and 2. Limit switch statuses can be read from a host as outputs of DI blocks.

Access the LIMSW_1_TARGET parameter and

select the flow rate or temperature to be

monitored by limit switch 1.

1: PRIMARY_VALUE

Flow rate

2: SECONDARY_VALUE Temperature

Access the LIMSW_1_ACT_DIRECTION parameter and select the direction of limit switch 1's actions.
1: HI LIMIT High limit switch 2: LO LIMIT Low limit switch

Access the LIMSW_1_SETPOINT parameter and set the threshold for turning on limit switch 1. As necessary, the on/off hysteresis can be modified by changing the value of the LIMSW_1_HYSTERESIS parameter (only a positive value can be set).
FA0210.ai

First, select the data to be displayed on the

upper row of the LCD. Access the

UPPER_DISPLAY_MODE parameter and

select an item.

1: Flow Rate (%) Instantaneous flow rate

as a percentage

2: Flow Rate

Instantaneous flow rate

in the specified unit

3: Temperature(%) Temperature as a

percentage (needs the

option /MV which adds a

built-in temperature

sensor).

4: Arithmetic Out

Access the LOWER_DISPLAY_MODE

parameter and select the data to be displayed

on the lower row of the LCD.

1: Blank

2: Total

Totalized flow rate

3: Temperature Temperature as a

percentage (needs the

option /MV which adds a

built-in temperature sensor).

4: Integrator Out

Access the DISPLAY_CYCLE parameter and set the display refresh cycle. The cycle can be set to a multiple of 500 milliseconds in a range from 1 to 10 (= 500 ms to 5 s), and is set to 1 (= 500 ms) by default. Prolong the cycle as necessary to improve legibility such as when used in a low temperature environment which makes the indications hard to read.
FA0211.ai

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 2. APPLICATION, SETTING AND CHANGE OF BASIC PARAMETERS>

A2-5

The UPPER_DISPLAY_MODE and LOWER_ DISPLAY_MODE parameter settings in the transducer (TR) block, and the L_TYPE settings in the AI1 and AI2 blocks determine which data items, and their values and units, are displayed on the LCD indicator, as shown in the following tables.

Display on Upper Row of LCD Indicator

UPPER_DISPLAY_MODE

FLOW RATE (%)

L_TYPE of AI1

Displayed Value, Display Unit, and Display Format

= DIRECT

= INDIRECT

FLOW RATE

Value
Unit Format L_TYPE of AI1

Percentage calculated from OUT. Percentage calculated from OUT.Value

Value and XD_SCALE of AI1

and OUT_SCALE of AI1 (see note 2)

(see note 1)

%

Number, to one decimal place

= DIRECT

= INDIRECT

TEMPERATURE (%)

Value Unit Format L_TYPE of AI2

OUT.Value of AI1

OUT.Value of AI1 (scaled based on XD_SCALE and OUT_SCALE)

As specified by XD_SCALE.Units As specified by OUT_SCALE.Units

Index of AI1

Index of AI1

Determined by the value of XD_SCALE.EU at 100 of AI1.

Determined by the value of OUT_SCALE.EU at 100 of AI1.

= DIRECT

= INDIRECT

Arithmetic Out

Value
Unit Format Value Unit Format

Percentage calculated from OUT. Percentage calculated from OUT.Value

Value and XD_SCALE of AI2

and OUT_SCALE of AI2 (see note 2)

(see note 1)

%

Number, to one decimal place

AR OUT.Value

AR OUT_RANGE. Units Index

AR OUT_RANGE. Eu_100, Eu_0

Note 1: If L_TYPE is set to DIRECT, the following equation applies to determine the displayed percentage: Percentage = (OUT.Value ­ XD_SCALE.EU at 0) / (XD_SCALE.EU at 100 ­ XD_SCALE.EU at 0) × 100
Note 2: If L_TYPE is set to INDIRECT, the following equation applies to determine the displayed percentage: Percentage = (OUT.Value ­ OUT_SCALE.EU at 0) / (OUT_SCALE.EU at 100 ­ OUT_SCALE.EU at 0) × 100

Display on Lower Row of LCD Indicator

UPPER_DISPLAY_MODE BLANK TOTAL
TEMPERATURE

Value Unit Value Unit Format L_TYPE of AI2

Displayed Value, Display Unit, and Display Format

Blank

Blank

TOTAL_VAL of AI1

TERTIARY_VALUE_UNIT of transducer block (note 3)

Determined by TOTAL_RATE_VAL of AI1.

= DIRECT

= INDIRECT

Integrator Out

Value
Unit
Format Value Unit Format

OUT.Value of AI2 (scaled based on XD_SCALE) XD_SCALE.Units Index of AI2
Number, to one decimal place IT OUT.Value IT OUT_RANGE. Units Index IT OUT_RANGE. Eu_100, Eu_0

OUT.Value of AI2 (scaled based on XD_SCALE and OUT_SCALE)
OUT_SCALE.Units Index of AI2 (but without indication of "%")

Note 3: The unit displayed for the totalized flow rate (TOTAL) is the value of TERTIARY_VALUE_UNIT in the transducer block, which is determined by the value of XD_SCALE.Units Index in the AI1 block.
Note 4: AI3 block does not display because it is the function block for flow calculation in the AR block.

The following units can be displayed on the LCD: m3/min, m3/h, L/min, L/h, Nm3/min, Nm3/h, kg/min, kg/h, t/min, and t/h.

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 2. APPLICATION, SETTING AND CHANGE OF BASIC PARAMETERS>
A2.5 Setting the DI Function Blocks
DI function blocks output limit switch signals received from the transducer block. Two DI blocks (DI1 and DI2) in each digitalYEWFLO have independent parameters. Set up the parameters of each AI block you use, individually as necessary. The following shows the DI1 setting procedure as an example.
(1) Setting the channel The CHANNEL parameter of the DI block, which specifies the switch number of the transducer's limit switch to be input to DI (DI1: 3, DI2: 4) for a digitalYEWFLO.
(2) Setting the damping time constant Access the PV_FTIME parameter and set the damping time constant (in units of seconds).
(3) Simulation Perform simulation of each AI function block by setting the desired value and status of the input to the block. Access the SIMULATE_D parameter and change the values of its elements as follows.
REMOTE LOOP TEST SWITCH is written to SIM_ENABLE_MSG (index 1044) parameter of the resource block.
Change value of the En/Disable element of SIMULATE_D.
1: Disabled 2: Active

A2-6

Access the SIMULATE_D Status element and set the desired status code.
Access the SIMULATE_D Value element and set the desired input value.
FA0212.ai
The DI block uses SIMULATE_D Status and SIMULATE_D Value in the SIMULATE_D parameter as its input status and value when simulation is active, or uses Transducer Status and Transducer Value in SIMULATE_D as its input status and value when simulation is disabled. Read Section 7.3 "Simulation Function."

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 3. OPERATION OF EACH PARAMETER IN FAILURE MODE>

A3-1

APPENDIX 3. OPERATION OF EACH PARAMETER IN FAILURE MODE
*1: Standard Type and Multi-variable Type with THERMOMETER_FUNCTION in TR block Set to "Monitor Only" or "Not Use" *2: Multi-variable Type with THERMOMETER_FUNCTION Used for Density Calculation

LCD Display AL-01
AL-02
AL-03
AL-04 AL-05

Alarm Detail

RS Block

TR Block

AI1 Block

AI2 Block

AI3 Block

AMP. Module Failure 1 (AL-01)

<BLOCK_ERR> <PV.Status>

Other

· Default

<XD_ERROR> Bad-Non Specific AMP. Module · STATUS_OPTS:Propagate Fault Forward = Active Failure 1 (AL-01) Bad-Device Failure

--

<PV.Status>

Bad-Device

<OUT.Status>

Failure

· Default

Bad-Non Specific

<SV.Status>

· STATUS_OPTS:Propagate Fault Forward = Active

Bad-Device

Bad-Device Failure

Failure

COM. Circuit Failure 1 (AL-02)

<BLOCK_ERR> <PV.Status>

Other

· Default

<XD_ERROR> Bad-Non Specific COM. Circuit · STATUS_OPTS:Propagate Fault Forward = Active

Failure 1 (AL-02) Bad-Device Failure

--

<PV.Status>

Bad-Device

<OUT.Status>

Failure

· Default

Bad-Non Specific

<SV.Status>

· STATUS_OPTS:Propagate Fault Forward = Active

Bad-Device

Bad-Device Failure

Failure

COM. Circuit Failure 2 (AL-03)

<BLOCK_ERR> <PV.Status>

Other

· Default

<XD_ERROR> Bad-Non Specific COM. Circuit · STATUS_OPTS:Propagate Fault Forward = Active Failure 2 (AL-03) Bad-Device Failure

--

<PV.Status>

Bad-Device

<OUT.Status>

Failure

· Default

Bad-Non Specific

<SV.Status>

· STATUS_OPTS:Propagate Fault Forward = Active

Bad-Device

Bad-Device Failure

Failure

<BLOCK_ERR>

Other

<PV.Status>

<XD_ERROR> Bad-Non Specific

AMP. Module Failure 2 (AL-04)

<BLOCK_ERR> Lost Static Data Lost MV Data

AMP. Module Failure 2 (AL-04)
<PV.Status>

Bad-Non Specific <OUT.Status>

<SV.Status>

Bad-Non Specific

Bad-Non Specific

Flow Sensor Failure (AL-05)

<BLOCK_ERR>

Other

<PV.Status>

<XD_ERROR> Uncertain-Non

Flow Sensor

Specific

--

Failure (AL-05)

<PV.Status>

Uncertain-

<OUT.Status>

Sensor

Uncertain-Non

Conversion not Specific

Accurate

<PV.Status> Uncertain-Non Specific
<OUT.Status> Uncertain-Non Specific

Alarm Reset SW* (default) Not provided
Not provided
Not provided
Not provided
Provided (ON)

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 3. OPERATION OF EACH PARAMETER IN FAILURE MODE>

A3-2

LCD Display

Alarm Detail

AL-06

Input Circuit Failure (AL-06)

RS Block

TR Block

AI1 Block

AI2 Block

AI3 Block

<PV.Status>

<BLOCK_ERR> *1

Other

Uncertain-Non

Specific

<PV.Status> · Default

*2

Bad-Non Specific <PV.Status>

· Default

· STATUS_OPTS: Uncertain-Non

Bad-Non Specific Propagate Fault Specific

<XD_ERROR> Input Circuit Failure (AL-06)

· STATUS_OPTS: Forward = Active Propagate Fault Bad-Device Failure Forward = Active Bad-Device Failure

<PV.Status>

<OUT.Status>

Uncertain Sensor *1

Conversion not Uncertain-Non

Accurate

Specific

*2

<OUT.Status> · Default Bad-Non Specific <OUT.Status>

· Default

· STATUS_OPTS: Uncertain-Non

Bad-Non Specific Propagate Fault Specific

<SV.Status>

· STATUS_OPTS: Forward= Active

Bad-Device Failure

Propagate Fault Bad-Device Failure Forward = Active Bad-Device Failure

Alarm Reset SW* (default)
Provided (ON)

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 3. OPERATION OF EACH PARAMETER IN FAILURE MODE>

A3-3

LCD Display

Alarm Detail

AL-01

AMP. Module Failure 1 (AL-01)

AL-02

COM. Circuit Failure 1 (AL-02)

AL-03

COM. Circuit Failure 2 (AL-03)

AL-04

AMP. Module Failure 2 (AL-04)

AL-05

Flow Sensor Failure (AL-05)

DI1 Block

DI2 Block

<PV_D.Status> · Default Bad-Non Specific · STATUS_OPTS: Propagate Fault Forward=Active Bad-Device Failure
<OUT_D.Status> · Default Bad-Non Specific · STATUS_OPTS: Propagate Fault Forward=Active Bad-Device Failure
<PV_D.Status> · Default Bad-Non Specific · STATUS_OPTS: Propagate Fault Forward=Active Bad-Device Failure
<OUT_D.Status> · Default Bad-Non Specific · STATUS_OPTS: Propagate Fault Forward=Active Bad-Device Failure
<PV_D.Status> · Default Bad-Non Specific · STATUS_OPTS: Propagate Fault Forward=Active Bad-Device Failure
<OUT_D.Status> · Default Bad-Non Specific · STATUS_OPTS: Propagate Fault Forward=Active Bad-Device Failure
<PV_D.Status> Bad-Non Specific
<OUT_D.Status> Bad-Non Specific
<PV_D.Status> · TARGET in TB's LIMSW = PRIMARY_VALUE Uncertain-Non Specific
<OUT_D.Status> · TARGET in TB's LIMSW = PRIMARY_VALUE Uncertain-Non Specific

PID Block

IT Block

AR Block

Alarm Reset SW* (default)

Not provided

Not provided

Not provided
Not provided Provided (ON)

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 3. OPERATION OF EACH PARAMETER IN FAILURE MODE>

A3-4

LCD Display

Alarm Detail

AL-06

Input Circuit Failure (AL-06)

DI1 Block

DI2 Block

<PV_D.Status> *1 · TARGET in TB's LIMSW = PRIMARY_VALUE Uncertain-Non Specific · TARGET in TB's LIMSW = SECONDARY_ VALUE · Default Bad-Non Specific · STATUS_OPTS: Propagate Fault Forward=Active Bad-Device Failure *2 · Default Bad-Non Specific · STATUS_OPTS: Propagate Fault Forward = Activez Bad-Device Failure
<OUT_D.Status> *1 · TARGET in TB's LIMSW = PRIMARY_VALUE Uncertain-Non Specific · TARGET in TB's LIMSW = SECONDARY_ VALUE · Default Bad-Non Specific · STATUS_OPTS: Propagate Fault Forward = Active Bad-Device Failure *2 · Default Bad-Non Specific · STATUS_OPTS: Propagate Fault Forward = Active Bad-Device Failure

PID Block

IT Block

AR Block

Alarm Reset SW* (default)

Provided (ON)

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 3. OPERATION OF EACH PARAMETER IN FAILURE MODE>

A3-5

LCD Display

Alarm Detail

Temp. AL-07 Converter
Failure (AL-07)

AL-08

Temp. Sensor Failure (AL-08)

No FB AL-20 Scheduled
(AL-20)

AL-21

RB in O/S Mode (AL-21)

AL-22

TB in O/S Mode (AL-22)

AL-23

AI1 in O/S Mode (AL-23)

AL-24

AI2 in O/S Mode (AL-24)

AL-25

DI1 in O/S Mode (AL-25)

AL-26

DI2 in O/S Mode (AL-26)

RS Block

TR Block

AI1 Block

AI2 Block

<BLOCK_ERR> Other
<XD_ERROR> Temp. Converter Failure (AL-07)

<PV.Status> *2 · Default Bad-Non Specific · STATUS_OPTS: Propagate Fault Forward = Active Bad-Device Failure

<PV.Status> · Default Bad-Non Specific · STATUS_OPTS: Propagate Fault Forward = Active Bad-Device Failure

<PV.Status> *2 Bad-Device Failure
<SV.Status> Bad-Device Failure

<OUT.Status> *2 · Default Bad-Non Specific · STATUS_OPTS: Propagate Fault Forward = Active Bad-Device Failure

<OUT.Status> · Default Bad-Non Specific · STATUS_OPTS: Propagate Fault Forward = Active Bad-Device Failure

<BLOCK_ERR> Other
<XD_ERROR> Temp. Sensor Failure (AL-08)

<PV.Status> *2 · Default Bad-Non Specific · STATUS_OPTS: Propagate Fault Forward = Active Bad-Sensor Failure

<PV.Status> · Default Bad-Non Specific · STATUS_OPTS: Propagate Fault Forward = Active Bad-Sensor Failure

<PV.Status> *2 Bad-Sensor Failure
<SV.Status> Bad-Sensor Failure

<OUT.Status> *2 · Default Bad-Non Specific · STATUS_OPTS: Propagate Fault Forward = Active Bad-Sensor Failure

<OUT.Status> · Default Bad-Non Specific · STATUS_OPTS: Propagate Fault Forward = Active Bad-Sensor Failure

<PV.Status> Bad-Non Specific
<SV.Status> Bad-Non Specific
<BLOCK_ERR> Out of Service
<PV.Status> Bad-Out of Service
<SV.Status> Bad-Out of Service

<OUT.Status> Bad-Out of Service
<PV.Status> Bad-Non Specific
<OUT.Status> Bad-Non Specific <BLOCK_ERR> Out of Service <OUT.Status> Bad-Out of Service

<BLOCK_ERR> Out of Service
<OUT.Status> Bad-Out of Service

AI3 Block

Alarm Reset SW* (default)
Not provided
Not provided
Not provided Not provided
Not provided Provided (ON) Provided (OFF) Provided (OFF) Provided (OFF)

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 3. OPERATION OF EACH PARAMETER IN FAILURE MODE>

A3-6

LCD Display

Alarm Detail

DI1 Block

DI2 Block

<PV_D.Status>

*1

· TARGET in TB's LIMSW =

SECONDARY_VALUE

· Default

Bad-Non Specific

· STATUS_OPTS:Propagate Fault

Forward = Active

Bad-Device Failure

*2

· Default

Bad-Non Specific

· STATUS_OPTS:Propagate Fault

Forward = Active

Temp.

Bad-Device Failure

AL-07 Converter

Failure (AL-07) <OUT_D.Status>

*1

· TARGET in TB's LIMSW =

SECONDARY_VALUE

· Default

Bad-Non Specific

· STATUS_OPTS:Propagate Fault

Forward = Active

Bad-Device Failure

*2

· Default

Bad-Non Specific

· STATUS_OPTS:Propagate Fault

Forward = Active

Bad-Device Failure

<PV_D.Status>

*1

· TARGET in TB's LIMSW =

SECONDARY_VALUE

· Default

Bad-Non Specific

· STATUS_OPTS:Propagate Fault

Forward = Active

Bad-Sensor Failure

*2

· Default

Bad-Non Specific

· STATUS_OPTS:Propagate Fault

Forward = Active

AL-08

Temp. Sensor Failure (AL-08)

Bad-Device Failure <OUT_D.Status>

*1

· TARGET in TB's LIMSW =

SECONDARY_VALUE

· Default

Bad-Non Specific

· STATUS_OPTS:Propagate Fault

Forward = Active

Bad-Sensor Failure

*2

· Default

Bad-Non Specific

· STATUS_OPTS:Propagate Fault

Forward = Active

Bad-Device Failure

No FB AL-20 Scheduled
(AL-20)

RB in O/S AL-21 Mode
(AL-21)

<OUT_D.Status> Bad-Out of Service

<PV_D.Status>

AL-22

TB in O/S Mode Bad-Non Specific

(AL-22)

<OUT_D.Status>

Bad-Non Specific

PID Block

IT Block

AR Block

<OUT.Status>

<OUT.Status>

<OUT.Status>

Bad-Out of Service Bad-Out of Service Bad-Out of Service

AlarmReset SW* (default)
Not provided
Not provided
Not provided Not provided Not provided

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 3. OPERATION OF EACH PARAMETER IN FAILURE MODE>

LCD Display

Alarm Detail

DI1 Block

AI1 in O/S AL-23 Mode
(AL-23)

AI2 in O/S AL-24 Mode
(AL-24)

DI1 in O/S AL-25 Mode
(AL-25)

<BLOCK_ERR> Out of Service
<OUT_D.Status> (OFF) Bad-Out of Service

DI2 in O/S AL-26 Mode
(AL-26)

DI2 Block
<BLOCK_ERR> Out of Service <OUT_D.Status> Bad-Out of Service

PID Block

IT Block

AR Block

A3-7
AlarmReset SW* (default)
Provided (ON)
Provided (OFF)
Provided (OFF)
Provided (OFF)

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 3. OPERATION OF EACH PARAMETER IN FAILURE MODE>

A3-8

LCD Display

Alarm Detail

AL-27

PID in O/S Mode (AL-27)

AL-28

AI3 in O/S Mode (AL-28)

AL-29

IT in O/S Mode (AL-29)

AL-30

AR in O/S Mode (AL-30)

AL-41

Flow Rate Over Range (AL-41)

Flow Span AL-42 Exceed Limit
(AL-42)

AL-43

Temp. Over Range (AL-43)

Transient AL-51 Vibration (AL-
51)

AL-52

High Vibration (AL-52)

AL-53

Clogging (AL53)

AL-54

Fluctuating (AL-54)

AL-61

Indicator Over Range (AL-61)

RS Block

TR Block

AI1 Block

AI2 Block

<BLOCK_ERR> Other
<XD_ERROR> Flow Velocity Over Range (AL-41)

<PV.Status> Uncertain-Non Specific

<PV.Status> Uncertain-Sensor Conversion not Accurate

<OUT.Status> Uncertain-Non Specific

<BLOCK_ERR> Other
<XD_ERROR> Flow Span Exceed Limit (AL-42)

<PV.Status> Uncertain-Non Specific

<PV.Status> Uncertain -EngineeringUnit not Violation

<OUT.Status> Uncertain-Non Specific

<BLOCK_ERR> Other
<XD_ERROR> Temp. Over Range (AL-43)

<PV.Status> *2 Uncertain-Non Specific

<PV.Status> *2 Uncertain-Non Specific
<SV.Status> UncertainSubstitude

<OUT.Status> *2 Uncertain-Non Specific

<PV.Status> Uncertain-Last Usable Value

<PV.Status> Uncertain-Non Specific
<OUT.Status> Uncertain-Non Specific

<PV.Status> Bad-Non Specific

<PV.Status> Bad-Non Specific
<OUT.Status> Bad-Non Specific

<PV.Status> Uncertain-Sensor Conversion not Accurate

<PV.Status> Uncertain-Non Specific
<OUT.Status> Uncertain-Non Specific

<PV.Status> Uncertain-Sensor Conversion not Accurate

<PV.Status> Uncertain-Non Specific
<OUT.Status> Uncertain-Non Specific

<PV.Status> Uncertain-Non Specific
<OUT.Status> Uncertain-Non Specific

AI3 Block
<BLOCK_ERR> Out of Service <OUT.Status> Bad-Out of Service

Alarm Reset SW* (default) Provided (OFF)
Provided (OFF)
Provided (OFF)
Provided (OFF)

<PV.Status> Uncertain-Non Specific
<OUT.Status> Uncertain-Non Specific

Not provided

<PV.Status> Uncertain-Non Specific
<OUT.Status> Uncertain-Non Specific

Not provided

Not provided

<PV.Status> Uncertain-Non Specific
<OUT.Status> Uncertain-Non Specific
<PV.Status> Bad-Non Specific
<OUT.Status> Bad-Non Specific
<PV.Status> Uncertain-Non Specific
<OUT.Status> Uncertain-Non Specific
<PV.Status> Uncertain-Non Specific
<OUT.Status> Uncertain-Non Specific

Provided (OFF)
Provided (OFF)
Provided (OFF)
Provided (OFF)
Not provided

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 3. OPERATION OF EACH PARAMETER IN FAILURE MODE>

A3-9

LCD Display

Alarm Detail

DI1 Block

DI2 Block

PID Block

IT Block

AR Block

Alarm Reset SW* (default)

AL-27

PID in O/S Mode (AL-27)

<BLOCK_ERR> Out of Service
<OUT.Status> Bad-Out of Service

Provided (OFF)

AL-28

AI3 in O/S Mode (AL-28)

AL-29

IT in O/S Mode (AL-29)

AL-30

AR in O/S Mode (AL-30)

<PV_D.Status>

· TARGET in TB's LIMSW = PRIMARY_

VALUE

AL-41

Flow Rate Over Uncertain-Non Specific Range (AL-41) <OUT_D.Status>

· TARGET in TB's LIMSW = PRIMARY_

VALUE

Uncertain-Non Specific

Flow Span AL-42 Exceed Limit
(AL-42)

<PV_D.Status> · TARGET in TB's LIMSW = PRIMARY_ VALUE Uncertain-Non Specific
<OUT_D.Status> · TARGET in TB's LIMSW = PRIMARY_ VALUE Uncertain-Non Specific

AL-43

Temp. Over Range (AL-43)

<PV_D.Status> *1 · TARGET in TB's LIMSW = SECONDARY_VALUE Uncertain-Non Specific *2 Uncertain-Non Specific
<OUT_D.Status> *1 · TARGET in TB's LIMSW = SECONDARY_VALUE Uncertain-Non Specific *2 Uncertain-Non Specific

Transient AL-51 Vibration (AL-
51)

<PV_D.Status> · TARGET in TB's LIMSW = PRIMARY_ VALUE Uncertain-Non Specific
<OUT_D.Status> (OFF) · TARGET in TB's LIMSW = PRIMARY_ VALUE Uncertain-Non Specific

AL-52

High Vibration (AL-52)

<PV_D.Status> · TARGET in TB's LIMSW = PRIMARY_ VALUE Uncertain-Non Specific
<OUT_D.Status> (OFF) · TARGET in TB's LIMSW = PRIMARY_ VALUE Uncertain-Non Specific

<BLOCK_ERR> Out of Service
<OUT.Status> Bad -Out of Service
<BLOCK_ERR> Out of Service
<OUT.Status> Bad-Out of Service

Provided (OFF)
Provided (OFF)
Provided (OFF)

Not provided

Not provided

Not provided
Provided (OFF)
Provided (OFF)

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 3. OPERATION OF EACH PARAMETER IN FAILURE MODE>

A3-10

LCD Display

Alarm Detail

DI1 Block

DI2 Block

AL-53

Clogging (AL53)

<PV_D.Status> · TARGET in TB's LIMSW = SECONDARY_VALUE Uncertain-Non Specific
<OUT_D.Status> (OFF) · TARGET in TB's LIMSW = SECONDARY_VALUE Uncertain-Non Specific

AL-54

Fluctuating (AL-54)

<PV_D.Status> · TARGET in TB's LIMSW = PRIMARY_ VALUE Uncertain-Non Specific
<OUT_D.Status> (OFF) · TARGET in TB's LIMSW = PRIMARY_ VALUE Uncertain-Non Specific

AL-61

Indicator Over Range (AL-61)

PID Block

IT Block

AR Block

Alarm Reset SW* (default)

Provided (OFF)

Provided (OFF)
Not provided

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 3. OPERATION OF EACH PARAMETER IN FAILURE MODE>

A3-11

LCD Display

Alarm Detail

RS Block

AL-62

AI1 in Man Mode (AL-62)

AL-63

AI1 Simulation Active (AL-63)

AI1 Not AL-64 Scheduled
(AL-64)

<BLOCK_ERR> Simulation Active

AL-65

AI2 in Man Mode (AL-65)

AL-66

AI2 Simulation Active (AL-66)

<BLOCK_ERR> Simulation Active

AI2 Not AL-67 Scheduled
(AL-67)

AL-68

DI1 in Man Mode (AL-68)

AL-69

DI1 Simulation Active (AL-69)

<BLOCK_ERR> Simulation Active

DI1 Not AL-70 Scheduled
(AL-70)

AL-71

DI2 in Man Mode (AL-71)

AL-72

DI2 Simulation Active (AL-72)

<BLOCK_ERR> Simulation Active

DI2 Not AL-73 Scheduled
(AL-73)

AL-74

PID in Bypass Mode (AL-74)

AL-75

PID Error 1 (AL-75)

AL-76

PID Error 2 (AL-76)

TR Block

AI1 Block
<OUT.Status> · Default · STATUS_OPTS: Uncertain if Man mode = Active Uncertain-Non Specific
<BLOCK_ERR> Simulation Active

AI2 Block

<OUT.Status> · Default · STATUS_OPTS: Uncertain if Man mode =Active Uncertain-Non Specific
<BLOCK_ERR> Simulation Active

AI3 Block

Alarm Reset SW* (default)

Provided (ON)

Provided (ON)
Provided (ON)

Provided (OFF)
Provided (OFF)
Provided (OFF)
Provided (OFF)
Provided (OFF)
Provided (OFF)
Provided (OFF)
Provided (OFF)
Provided (OFF)
Provided (OFF)
Provided (OFF)
Provided (OFF)

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 3. OPERATION OF EACH PARAMETER IN FAILURE MODE>

A3-12

LCD Display

Alarm Detail

DI1 Block

AL-62

AI1 in Man Mode (AL-62)

AL-63

AI1 Simulation Active (AL-63)

AI1 Not AL-64 Scheduled
(AL-64)

AL-65

AI2 in Man Mode (AL-65)

AL-66

AI2 Simulation Active (AL-66)

AI2 Not AL-67 Scheduled
(AL-67)

AL-68

DI1 Man Mode (AL-68)

<OUT.Status> · Default · STATUS_OPTS: Uncertain if Man mode = Active Uncertain-Non Specific

AL-69

DI1 Simulation Active (AL-69)

<BLOCK_ERR> Simulation Active

DI1 Not AL-70 Scheduled
(AL-70)

AL-71

DI2 Man Mode (AL-71)

AL-72

DI2 Simulation Active (AL-72)

DI2 Not AL-73 Scheduled
(AL-73)

AL-74

PID in Bypass Mode (AL-74)

AL-75

PID Error 1 (AL-75)

AL-76

PID Error 2 (AL-76)

DI2 Block
<OUT.Status> · Default Good(NC)-Non Specific · STATUS_OPTS: Uncertain if Man mode = Active Uncertain-Non Specific <BLOCK_ERR> Simulation Active

PID Block

IT Block

AR Block

Alarm Reset SW* (default) Provided (ON) Provided (ON)
Provided (ON)
Provided (OFF)
Provided (OFF)
Provided (OFF)

Provided (OFF)
Provided (OFF)
Provided (OFF)

Provided (OFF)
Provided (OFF)
Provided (OFF)
Provided (OFF)
Provided (OFF)
Provided (OFF)

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 3. OPERATION OF EACH PARAMETER IN FAILURE MODE>

A3-13

LCD Display

Alarm Detail

RS Block

AL-77

AI3 in Man Mode (AL-77)

AL-78

AI3 Simulation Active (AL-78)

<BLOCK_ERR> Simulation Active

AI3 Not AL-79 Scheduled
(AL-79)

AL-80

IT in Man Mode (AL-80)

IT Not AL-81 Scheduled
(AL-81)

IT Total AL-82 Backup Err
(AL-82)

AL-83

IT Conf. Err (AL-83)

AL-84

AR in Man Mode (AL-84)

AR Not AL-85 Scheduled
(AL-85)

AR Range AL-86 Conf. Err
(AL-86)

AR Temp. IN AL-87 Over Range
(AL-87)

AR Press IN AL-88 Over Range
(AL-88)

AR Flow IN Not AL-89 Connected
(AL-89)

AR Temp. IN AL-90 Not Connected
(AL-90)

AR Press IN AL-91 Not Connected
(AL-91)

AR Comp. AL-92 Coef.Conf. Err
(AL-92)

AR Output AL-93 Unit Conf. Err
(AL-93)

TR Block

AI1 Block

AI2 Block

AI3 Block
<OUT.Status> · Default · STATUS_OPTS: Uncertain if Man mode = Active Uncertain-Non Specific
<BLOCK_ERR> Simulation Active

Alarm Reset SW* (default)
Provided (OFF)
Provided (OFF)
Provided (OFF)
Provided (OFF)
Provided (OFF)

Provided (OFF)
Provided (OFF)
Provided (OFF)
Provided (OFF)

Provided (OFF)

Provided (OFF)

Provided (OFF)

Provided (OFF)

Provided (OFF)

Provided (OFF)

Provided (OFF)

Provided (OFF)

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 3. OPERATION OF EACH PARAMETER IN FAILURE MODE>

A3-14

LCD Display

Alarm Detail

AL-77

AI3 in Man Mode (AL-77)

AL-78

AI3 Simulation Active (AL-78)

AI3 Not AL-79 Scheduled
(AL-79)

DI1 Block

AL-80

IT in Man Mode (AL-80)

IT Not AL-81 Scheduled
(AL-81)

IT Total AL-82 Backup Err
(AL-82)

AL-83

IT Conf. Err (AL-83)

AL-84

AR in Man Mode (AL-84)

AR Not AL-85 Scheduled
(AL-85)

AR Range AL-86 Conf. Err
(AL-86)

AR Temp. IN AL-87 Over Range
(AL-87)

AR Press IN AL-88 Over Range
(AL-88)

AR Flow

AL-89

IN Not Connected

(AL-89)

AR Temp.

AL-90

IN Not Connected

(AL-90)

AR Press

AL-91

IN Not Connected

(AL-91)

AR Comp. AL-92 Coef.Conf. Err
(AL-92)

AR Output AL-93 Unit Conf. Err
(AL-93)

DI2 Block

PID Block

IT Block

AR Block

<OUT.Status> · Default Good(NC)-Non Specific · STATUS_OPTS: Uncertain if Man mode = Active Uncertain-Non Specific

<BLOCK_ERR> Lost NV Data
<OUT.Status> (OFF) Bad-Device Failure
<BLOCK_ERR> Configuration Error

<OUT.Status> · Default Good(NC)-Non Specific · STATUS_OPTS: Uncertain if Man mode = Active Uncertain-Non Specific

Alarm Reset SW* (default) Provided (OFF) Provided (OFF) Provided (OFF)
Provided (OFF)
Provided (OFF)
Provided (OFF)
Provided (OFF)
Provided (OFF)
Provided (OFF)

<BLOCK_ERR> Configuration Error
<OUT.Status> Uncertain-Non Specific
<OUT.Status> Uncertain-Non Specific

Provided (OFF)
Provided (OFF)
Provided (OFF)

<OUT.Status> Bad-Non Specific

Provided (OFF)

<OUT.Status> Bad-Non Specific

Provided (OFF)

<OUT.Status> Bad-Non Specific
<BLOCK_ERR> Configuration Error <OUT.Status> Bad-Non Specific <BLOCK_ERR> Configuration Error <OUT.Status> Bad-Configuration Error

Provided (OFF)
Provided (OFF)
Provided (OFF)

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 3. OPERATION OF EACH PARAMETER IN FAILURE MODE>

A3-15

Alarm Reset Switch Settings
Some alarms can be disabled and enabled using switches in parameter ALARM_PERFORM inside the transducer block as explained below.

(1) Setting
As shown in the following table, the individual bits of ALARM_PERFORM at relative index 45 act as switches to disable and enable particular alarms. Write zeros to the respective bits to disable desired alarms, or write ones to enable them.

(2) Default Values

Bit in ALARM_PERFORM

Corresponding Alarms

Bit 15

AL-84 to AL-93 (alarms pertaining to AR)

Bit 14

AL-80 to AL-83 (alarms pertaining to IT)

Bit 13

AL-77 to AL-79 (alarms pertaining to AI3)

Bit 12

AL-62 to AL-64 (alarms pertaining to AI1)

Bit 11

AL-65 to AL-67 (alarms pertaining to AI2)

Bit 10

AL-68 to AL-70 (alarms pertaining to DI1)

Bit 9

AL-71 to AL-73 (alarms pertaining to DI2)

Bit 8

AL-74 to AL-76 (alarms pertaining to PID)

Bit 7

Not used.

Bit 6

Corresponds to parameter K45 in a non-Fieldbus type digitalYEWFLO.

Selects the output action upon occurrence of "High Vibration" in self-diagnostics.

Bit 5

AL-05 (flow sensor fault)

Bit 4

AL-06 (failure of amplifier's input circuit)

Bit 3

AL-51 (transient excessive vibration [transient disturbance])

Bit 2

AL-52 (excessive vibration)

Bit 1

AL-53 (flow anomaly [clogging])

Bit 0

AL-54 (flow anomaly [excessive output fluctuations])

Factory Default (0 = Disable; 1 = Enable)
0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
1
1 1 0 0 0 0

These default bit statuses comprise 0x1070 as the default value of ALARM_PERFORM.

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 4. FUNCTION DIAGRAMS OF FUNCTION BLOCKS>

A4-1

APPENDIX 4. FUNCTION DIAGRAMS OF FUNCTION BLOCKS

A4.1 AI Function Block

Transducer

AI

OUT

FA0401.ai
Figure A4.1 Input/Output of AI Block

CHANNEL

Simulate SIMULATE

FIELD_VAL.Value

Scaling

/100

XD_SCALE

/100

L_TYPE

Ind.Sqr Root Scaling OUT_SCALE
Indirect

Cutoff LOW_CUT

Filter PV_FTIME

Direct

Output

PV OUT

MODE
Figure A4.2 Function Diagram of AI Block

Alarms HI/LO

FA0402.ai

A4.2 DI Function Block

Transducer

DI

OUT_D

FA0403.ai
Figure A4.3 Input/Output of DI Block

CHANNEL

Simulate SIMULATE_D

Optional Invert

Filter PV_FTIME

FIELD_VAL_D

PV_D

Output

OUT_D

MODE

Alarms DISC

Figure A4.4 Function Diagram of DI Block

FA0404.ai

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 5. INTEGRATOR (IT) BLOCK>

A5-1

APPENDIX 5. INTEGRATOR (IT) BLOCK

The Integrator (IT) block adds two main inputs and integrates them for output. The block compares the integrated or accumulated value to TOTAL_SP and PRE_TRIP and generates discrete output signals OUT_TRIP or OUT_PTRIP when the limits are reached. The output is as represented by the following equation (for counting upward and rate conversion).

OUT.Value = Integration start value + Total Total = Total + Current Integral Current Integral = (x + y) × t
x: IN_1 value whose unit has been converted y: IN_2 value whose unit has been converted t: block execution period

A5.1 Schematic Diagram of Integrator Block

The following shows the schematic diagram of the Integrator block.

IN_1 REV_FLOW1
IN_2 REV_FLOW2
RESET_IN

INTEG_OPTS (INPUT TYPE)
TIME_UNIT1 ­1

Convert Rate

Reverse

INTEG_TYPE INTEG_OPTS (QUALITY) GOOD_LIM

Convert Accum

Forward

PULSE_VAL1

INTEG_OPTS (INPUT TYPE) TIME_UNIT2
­1

Convert Rate

Reverse

Convert Accum

Forward

PULSE_VAL2

INTEG_OPTS (FLOW TYPE)

UNCERT_LIM CLOCK_PER

Add

Integrate
TOTAL / RTOTAL

N_RESET

MAN

UNIT_CONV

INTEG_OPTS (CARRY)
OP_CMD_INT (RESET)

MAN PRE_TRIP
Compare
MAN TOTAL_SP

Compare

RESET_CONFIRM

Figure A5.1 Integrator Block

OUT OUT_PTRIP OUT_TRIP
FA0501.ai

IN_1: Block input 1 (value and status) IN_2: Block input 2 (value and status) REV_FLOW1: Indicates whether the sign of IN_1 is reversed. It is a discrete signal. REV_FLOW2: Indicates whether the sign of IN_2 is reversed. It is a discrete signal. RESET_IN: Resets the integrated values. It is a discrete signal. RESET_CONFIRM: Reset confirmation input. It is a discrete signal. OUT: Block output (value and status) OUT_PTRIP: Set if the target value exceeds PRE_ TRIP. It is a discrete signal. OUT_TRIP: Set if the target value exceeds TOTAL_ SP (or 0). It is a discrete signal.

The Integrator block is classified into the following five sections for each function:
· Input process section: Determines the input value status, converts the rate and accumulation, and determines the input flow direction.
· Adder: Adds the two inputs. · Integrator: Integrates the result of the adder into
the integrated value. · Output process section: Determines the status
and value of each output parameter. · Reset process section: Resets the integrated
values.

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 5. INTEGRATOR (IT) BLOCK>
A5.2 Input Process Section
When executed, the Integrator block first performs input processing in the order of: "Determining input status"  "Converting Rate or Accum"  "Determining the input flow direction" Switching between Convert Rate and Convert Accum is made using bit 0 (for IN_1) or bit 1 (for IN_2) of INTEG_OPTS. INTEG_OPTS is one of the system parameters and should be set by the user. The values of IN_1 and IN_2 are not retained if the power is turned OFF.

A5-2

A5.2.1 Determining Input Value Statuses

The following shows the correlation between the statuses of input parameters (IN_1, IN_2) and the statuses of

input values used in the Integrator block.

Statuses of Input

Bit 4 of INTEG_OPTS Bit 5* of INTEG_OPTS Status of Input Values

Parameters (IN_1, IN_2) (Use Uncertain)

(Use Bad)

Handled in IT Block

Good

Irrelevant

Irrelevant

Good

Bad

Irrelevant

H (=1)

Good

Bad

Irrelevant

L (=0)

Bad

Uncertain

H (=1)

Irrelevant

Good

Uncertain

L (=0)

Irrelevant

Bad

For addition (Read APPENDIX 5.3 "Adder"), if the status of an input value is "Bad," the "Good" value just before the status changed to "Bad" is used.

* Even if the Use Bad option is used, changing the internal status to "Good," the value of "Good" just before the status changed to "Bad" is used.

A5.2.2 Converting the Rate The following describes an example of rate conversion. In rate conversion, firstly convert the unit of two inputs to that based on seconds.
Converts the unit into that based on seconds

Next, convert the unit of the inputs to the same unit to be added together. The unit of IN_2 is standardized to that of IN_1. Then, calculates a weight, volume, or energy by multiplying each input value and block execution time. Because unit information is not input to the Integrator block as an input value, the user must input in advance tuned values to the TIME_UNIT1/2 and UNIT_CONV parameters.

input1 kg/hour

TIME_UNIT1 sec:÷1 min:÷60
hour:÷3600 day:÷86400

Converts the unit into that based on seconds

kg/s
Standardizes the unit of IN_2 to that of IN_1. Because "lb/s" is converted into "kg/s" in this example, the input 2 value is multiplied by 0.453. (1 lb = 0.453 kg)

× block execution time

increment1 kg

input2
lb/min lb: pounds

TIME_UNIT2

sec:÷1

min:÷60

hour:÷3600

lb/s

day:÷86400

UNIT_CONV

x [conversion factor]

(Conversion factor:

kg/s

0.453 in this example)

× block execution time

Figure A5.2 Increment Calculation with Rate Input

increment2 kg
FA0502.ai

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 5. INTEGRATOR (IT) BLOCK>

A5-3

A5.2.3 Converting Accumulation
This following describes an example of accumulation conversion. In accumulation conversion, the difference between the value executed previously and the value executed this time is integrated or accumulated. This conversion applies when the output of a function block used as a counter is input to the input process of the Integrator block. In order to convert the rate of change of an input to a value with an engineering unit, the user must configure the factor of conversion to the appropriate engineering unit in the PULSE_VAL1 and PULSE_ VAL2 parameters. Moreover, the unit of IN_2 is standardized to that of IN_1 in the same way as rate conversion. Thus, the user must also set an appropriate value to UNIT_CONV.

A5.2.4 Determining the Input Flow Direction
The Integrator block also considers the input flow direction. Information about the input flow direction is contained in REV_FLOW1 and REV_FLOW2 (0: FORWARD, 1: REVERSE). In input processing, the sign of the value after rate and accumulation conversion is reversed if the REV_FLOW1 and REV_FLOW2 parameters are set to REVERSE. When determination of the flow direction of two input values is complete, these two inputs are passed to the adder. The settings in REV_FLOW will be retained even if the power is turned OFF.

input1 counts

[Current read value] ­ [Previous read value] number of pulse

PULSE_VAL1(#19) × [pulse value1]
kg/pulse

increment1 kg

input2 counts

[Current read value] ­ [Previous read value]

number of pulse

PULSE_VAL2(#20) × [pulse value2]

lb

UNIT_CONV(#18) × [conversion factor]

increment2 kg

lb/pulse
Figure A5.3 Increment Calculation with Counter Input

FA0503.ai

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 5. INTEGRATOR (IT) BLOCK>

A5-4

A5.3 Adder
When input processing is complete, two arguments that have been rate and accumulate converted will be passed to the adder. The adder adds these two values according to the option.
A5.3.1 Status of Value after Addition
If one of the statuses of two arguments is "Bad" or if two of them are both "Bad," the status of the value after addition becomes "Bad." In this case, the value of "Good" just before the status changed to "Bad" is used as the addition value.
When the statuses of two arguments are both "Good," the status of the value after addition becomes "Good." In this case, the status of the value after addition will be used for the status applied to integration.

A5.3.2 Addition

The following three options are available for

addition:

· TOTAL: Adds two argument values as is.

· FORWARD: Adds two argument values,

regarding a negative value as "0."

· REVERSE: Adds two argument values,

regarding a positive value as "0."

You can choose these options using bit 2 and bit 3

of INTEG_OPTS as follows:

Bit 2 of INTEG_OPTS Bit 3 of INTEG_OPTS Adder Options

(Flow Forward)

(Flow Reverse)

H

H

TOTAL

L

L

TOTAL

H

L

FORWARD

L

H

REVERSE

The result of the adder is passed to the integrator. If only one of the inputs is connected, the value of a non-connected input will be ignored. When bit 7 of INTEG_OPTS (Add zero if bad) has been set, if the status of a value after addition is "Bad," the value after addition (increment) becomes "0."

A5.4 Integrator
When addition is complete, its result will be passed to the integrator. Integration consists of combinations of a reset method and counting up/down. There are the following seven integration types, which can be set using INTEG_TYPE.
1. UP_AUTO :Counts up with automatic reset when TOTAL_SP is reached
2. UP_DEM : Counts up from 0 and reset on demand.
3. DN_AUTO : Counts down with automatic reset when zero is reached
4. DN_DEM : Counts down from SP and reset on demand.
5. PERIODIC : Counts up from 0 and is reset periodically according to CLOCK_PER
6. DEMAND : Counts up from 0 and is reset on demand
7. PER&DEM : Counts up from 0 and is reset periodically or on demand
Each type of integration is independently run as a function. There are the following four types of integrated values:
1. Total: Integrates the result of the adder as is. 2. ATotal: Integrates the absolute value of the
result of the adder. 3. RTotal: Integrates the absolute value of the
result of the adder only if the status of the result is "Bad." This value is used for the RTOTAL value. 4. AccTotal: An extension function. The result of the adder is integrated as is and will not be reset. The value is used for the ACCUM_TOTAL (expanded parameter) value. The Table A5.1 shows the details of INTEG_TYPE.

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 5. INTEGRATOR (IT) BLOCK>

Table A5.1 INTEG_TYPE

Name

Integration Method

Integration Range

Reset Trigger (Reset if one of the following conditions is established)

UP_AUTO(1)

Counting up Starting from "0"

-INF< Total <TOTAL_SP 0< ATotal <+INF 0< RTotal <+INF -INF< AccTotal <+INF

· OUT reaches TOTAL_SP · RESET_IN = 1 · OP_CMD_INT = 1

UP_DEM(2)

-INF< Total <+INF Counting up 0< ATotal <+INF Starting from "0" 0< RTotal <+INF
-INF< AccTotal <+INF

· RESET_IN = 1 · OP_CMD_INT = 1

Counting down DN_AUTO(3) Starting from
TOTAL_SP

0< Total <+INF 0< ATotal <+INF 0< RTotal <+INF -INF< AccTotal <+INF

· OUT reaches "0" · RESET_IN = 1 · OP_CMD_INT = 1

DN_DEM(4)

Counting down Starting from TOTAL_SP

-INF< Total <+INF 0< ATotal <+INF 0< RTotal <+INF -INF< AccTotal <+INF

· RESET_IN = 1 · OP_CMD_INT = 1

-INF< Total <+INF

PERIODIC(5)

Counting up Starting from "0"

0< ATotal <+INF 0< RTotal <+INF

-INF< AccTotal <+INF

· At the period specified by CLOCK_PER · OP_CMD_INT = 1

DEMAND(6)

-INF< Total <+INF Counting up 0< ATotal <+INF Starting from "0" 0< RTotal <+INF
-INF< AccTotal <+INF

· RESET_IN = 1 · OP_CMD_INT = 1

-INF< Total <+INF

PER&DEM(7)

Counting up Starting from "0"

0< ATotal <+INF 0< RTotal <+INF

-INF< AccTotal <+INF

· At the period specified by CLOCK_PER · RESET_IN = 1 · OP_CMD_INT = 1

: Trip output is made. ×: No trip output is made.

Trip Output
    × × ×

A5-5

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 5. INTEGRATOR (IT) BLOCK>

A5-6

A5.5 Output Process
There are the following three output parameters: 1. OUT 2. OUT_TRIP 3. OUT_PTRIP
Parameters OUT_TRIP and OUT_PTRIP are used only when INTEG_TYPE is a value from 1 to 4. In case of Integrator block related memory failed, the status of OUT, OUT_TRIP, OUT_PTRIP becomes "Bad-Device Failure".

A5.5.1 Status Determination
The same criteria for determining the status of the output of the Integrator block are used in common for the above three parameters.

Bad

Uncertain

GOOD

0%

UNCERT_LIM

GOOD_LIM

PCT_INCL 100%

PCT_INCL=100×(1 - (msp of RTotal)/(msp of ATotal))
msp of RTotal: RTotal value that is converted into a short floating-point number msp of ATotal: ATotal value that is converted into a short floating-point number RTotal: Integrated value of the absolute values of the increments whose status is bad ATotal: Integrated value of the absolute values of the increments regardless of the output status
Figure A5.4 Status of OUT, OUT_TRIP, and OUT_PTRIP Outputs
OUT.Value, OUT_TRIP.Status, and OUT_PTRIP. Status are determined by the ratio of the "Good" integrated values to all integrated values, which is stored in PCT_INCL (0% to 100%). The user must set the threshold value of each status to UNCERT_ LIM and GOOD_LIM. The Integrator block determines the status of the output using the three parameters: PCT_INCL, UNCERT_LIM, and GOOD_LIM.  PCT_INCLGOOD_LIM
Good  UNCERT_LIMPCT_INCL<GOOD_LIM
Uncertain  PCT_INCL<UNCERT_LIM
Bad If INTEG_TYPE is 5, 6, or 7, the status of the trip output becomes "Good-NS-Constant."

FA0504.ai

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 5. INTEGRATOR (IT) BLOCK>

A5-7

A5.5.2 Determining the Output Value
The value of OUT.Value is determined as follows:  For counting up OUT = integration start value (0) + Total  For counting down OUT = integration start value (TOTAL_SP) Total Total: Total of integrated values. This value is retained even if INTEG_TYPE is changed during integration (in AUTO).

If OUT is rewritten in the MAN mode, integration starts with the value rewritten in MAN mode after the mode was returned to AUTO. The values in OUT_TRIP and OUT_PTRIP are determined according to the correlation between OUT and TOTAL_SP/PRE_TRIP.

· For counting up

PRE_TRIP(#31)

OUT_TRIP(#14):0 OUT_PTRIP(#15):0

OUT_TRIP(#14):0 OUT_TRIP(#14):1 OUT_PTRIP(#15):1 OUT_PTRIP(#15):1

0
Counting up starting from 0
· For counting down

TOTAL_SP(#7)

OUT_TRIP(#14):1 OUT_TRIP(#14):0 OUT_PTRIP(#15):1 OUT_PTRIP(#15):1

OUT_TRIP(#14):0 OUT_PTRIP(#15):0

0 PRE_TRIP(#31)

TOTAL_SP(#7)
Counting down starting from TOTAL_SP
FA0505.ai

For counting up, the OUT value is as follows:  OUT < TOTAL_SP - PRE_TRIP OUT_TRIP = 0, COUT_PTRIP = 0  TOTAL_SP - PRE_TRIP <= OUT < TOTAL_ SP OUT_TRIP = 0, COUT_PTRIP = 1  TOTAL_SP <= OUT OUT_TRIP = 1, COUT_PTRIP = 1
For counting down, the OUT value is as follows:  PRE_TRIP < OUT OUT_TRIP = 0, COUT_PTRIP = 0  0 < OUT <= PRE_TRIP OUT_TRIP = 0, COUT_PTRIP = 1  OUT <= 0 OUT_TRIP = 1, COUT_PTRIP = 1

Note that the given conditions do not apply to the following cases:
·If INTEG_TYPE is 5, 6, or 7, OUT_TRIP and OUT_PTRIP always output "0."
· If INTEG_TYPE is 1 or 3, occurrence of AutoRESET (reset caused if the threshold is exceeded) causes OUT_TRIP to hold "1" for five seconds.

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 5. INTEGRATOR (IT) BLOCK>

A5-8

A5.5.3 Mode Handling

Mode

Action

Output

Automatic (AUTO) Normal action

Normal output

Manual (MAN) Integration calculation is stopped. You may rewrite a value in OUT. If no value is rewritten, the value just before OUT will not be updated unless you running in AUTO is held. When the mode returns to AUTO, integration starts
Out of Service (O/S) set a value to it. No reset is accepted. with the written value or the value just before running in AUTO.

If you rewrite the value in OUT and RTOTAL while the mode is in MAN or O/S, N_RESET is incremented.

A5.6 Reset
A5.6.1 Reset Trigger
There are the following five types of reset triggers: 1. An integrated value exceeds TOTAL_SP. 2. An integrated value falls below "0." 3. RESET_IN is "H." 4. Every period specified in CLOCK_PER 5. OP_CMD_INT is 1.
The Table A5.2 shows the correlation between INTEG_TYPE and RESET triggers.

Table A5.2 RESET Triggers

1:UP_AUTO 2:UP_DEM 3:DN_AUTO 4:DN_DEMO 5:PERIODIC 6:DEMAND 7:PER&DEM

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)



×



×



×

×



×



×





×



×

×



×



×

×

×





×

×



×



×

×







: Reset ×: No Reset

When OP_CMD_INT has become "H" and a reset was made, OP_CMD_INT automatically returns to "L." Even if RESET_IN becomes "H," activating a reset, RESET_IN does not automatically return to "L." The RESET_IN setting will not be retained if the power is turned OFF.

A5.6.2 Reset Timing
All items are reset during execution of the function block. Therefore, the minimum period of a reset is the block execution period.  5-second rule If a reset is made, the next reset will not be accepted for 5 seconds after that. Even if UP_AUTO (or DN_AUTO) is activated and TOTAL_SP (or 0) is reached within 5 seconds, the next reset will not be made for 5 seconds from the previous reset.  CLOCK_PER If INTEG_TYPE is PERIODIC (5) or PER&DEM (7), a reset is made at the period (sec) set to the CLOCK_PER parameter. If the value in CLOCK_PER is smaller than the function block's execution period, bit 1 of BLOCK_ ERR "Block Configuration Error" is set.

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 5. INTEGRATOR (IT) BLOCK>
A5.6.3 Reset Process
The basic reset process sequence is as follows: 1. Snapshot 2. Clearing the integrated values 3. Reset count increment 4. Judging OUT_TRIP and OUT_PTRIP
1. Snapshot
Saves the following values in the specified parameters before clearing the integrated values. These values will be retained until the next reset is made.
STOTAL = Total SRTOTAL = RTotal SSP = TOTAL_SP
2. Clearing the integrated values
The reset process clears the Total, ATotal, and RTotal values in the internal registers.
Total = 0 ATotal = 0 RTotal = 0
3. Reset count increment
Each time a reset is made, the N_RESET parameter will be incremented. The high limit is 999,999, and if this limit is exceeded, the count returns to "0."
4. Judging OUT_TRIP and OUT_PTRIP
OUT_TRIP and OUT_PTRIP are judged again on the basis of the cleared integrated values. Read APPENDIX 5.5 "Output Process" There are three options relating to a reset:
i Confirm reset (bit 8 of INTEG_OPTS) ii Carry (bit 6 of INTEG_OPTS) iiiGenerate reset event (bit 9 of INTEG_
OPTS) i Confirm reset (bit 8 of INTEG_OPTS)
If this option is enabled, the next reset is rejected until "1" is set to RESET_CONFIRM. ii Carry (bit 6 of INTEG_OPTS) If this option is enabled while INTEG_TYPE is UP_AUTO or DN_AUTO, the value exceeding the threshold at a reset will be carried into the next integration. If INTEG_TYPE is any setting other than UP_ AUTO or DN_AUTO, this option is irrelevant. iii Generate reset event (bit 9 of INTEG_OPTS) If this option is enabled, an alert event is generated if a reset occurs.

A5-9

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 5. INTEGRATOR (IT) BLOCK>

A5-10

A5.7 List of Integrator Block Parameters

Index Parameter Name Initial Value

Write Mode

Definition

0 BLOCK_HEADER

TAG: "IT"

Block Tag Information relating to this function block, such as block tag, =O/S DD revision, execution time

1 ST_REV

0

-- The revision level of the set parameters associated with the Integrator block

2 TAG_DESC

Spaces

AUTO Stores comments describing tag information.

3 STRATEGY

1

AUTO The strategy field is used by a high-level system to identify the function block.

4 ALERT_KEY

1

AUTO Key information used to identify the location at which an alert occurred

5 MODE_BLK

AUTO Integrator block mode. O/S, MAN, and AUTO are supported.

6 BLOCK_ERR

0

--

Indicates the active error conditions associated with the function block in bit strings.

7 TOTAL_SP

1000000.0 AUTO The setpoint of an integrated value or a start value for counting down

8 OUT

MAN The block output

100000

9 OUT_RANGE

0.0 m3(1034)

Set scaling for output display. This does not affect operation of the function block. It is used for making memos.

0

10 GRANT_DENY

0

The parameter for checking if various operations have been executed

11 STATUS_OPTS

0

O/S

Allows you to select a status-related option. The Integrator block uses "Uncertain if Man mode" only.

12 IN_1 13 IN_2

0.0

AUTO

Inputs flow (Rate, Accum) signals from the AI block or PI block.

0.0

AUTO

14 OUT_TRIP

0

Value: An output parameter informing the user that the integrated value has exceeded AUTO the setpoint

15 OUT_PTRIP

0

Value: An output parameter informing the user that the integrated value is reaching the AUTO setpoint

16 TIME_UNIT1 17 TIME_UNIT2

sec(1) sec(1)

MAN Set the time unit of the Rate (kg/s, kg/min, kg/h ... etc.) of the corresponding IN.
MAN

18 UNIT_CONV

1.0

AUTO

Specify the unit conversion factor for standardizing the unit of IN_2 into that of IN_1.

19 PULSE_VAL1 20 PULSE_VAL2

1.0

MAN Set the factor for converting the number of pulses for the corresponding IN into an

1.0

MAN appropriate engineering unit.

21 REV_FLOW1 22 REV_FLOW2

0

AUTO Selector switch used to specify the fluid flow direction (forward/reverse) with

0

AUTO respect to the corresponding IN

23 RESET_IN

0

AUTO

The parameter that receives a reset request from an external block to reset the integrated values

24 STOTAL

0.0

-- Indicates the snapshot of OUT just before a reset.

25 RTOTAL

0.0

MAN

Indicates the integrated value of the absolute values of the increments if the input status is "Bad."

26 SRTOTAL

0.0

-- Indicates the snapshot of RTOTAL just before a reset.

27 SSP

0.0

-- Indicates the snapshot of TOTAL_SP just before a reset.

Integration Type Setting

Value Name

Description

1 UP_AUTO Counts up and is automatically reset when TOTAL_SP is reached.

2 UP_DEM Counts up and is reset as demanded.

28 INTEG_TYPE

UP_AUTO (1) AUTO

3 DN_AUTO Counts down and is automatically reset when "0" is reached. 4 DN_DEM Counts down and is reset as demanded.

5 PERIODIC Counts up and is reset at periods specified in CLOCK_PER.

6 DEMAND Counts up and is reset as demanded.

7 PER&DEM Counts up and is reset periodically or as demanded.

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 5. INTEGRATOR (IT) BLOCK>

A5-11

Index Parameter Name Initial Value

29 INTEG_OPTS

0x0004

30 CLOCK_PER 31 PRE_TRIP 32 N_RESET
33 PCT_INCL

86400.0[sec] 100000.0 0.0
0.0[%]

34 GOOD_LIM

0.0[%]

35 UNCERT_LIM

36 OP_CMD_INT

37 OUTAGE_LIM

38

RESET_ CONFIRM

39 UPDATE_EVT

40 BLOCK_ALM 41 ACCUM_TOTAL

0.0[%]
0
0.0
0
1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0.0

Write Mode
AUTO
AUTO AUTO
-- -- AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO -- -- -- -- AUTO -- -- -- -- --

Definition

Specifies an integration optional function.

bit Option Name

Description

0 Input 1 accumulate Selects Rate or Accum input of IN_1.

1 Input 2 accumulate Selects Rate or Accum input of IN_2.

2 Flow forward

Integrates forward flow (interprets reverse flow as zero).*

3 Flow reverse

Integrates reverse flow (interprets forward flow as zero).*

4 Use uncertain

Uses an input value of IN_1 or IN_2 whose status is "Uncertain" regarding it as a value of "Good."

5 Use bad

Uses an input value of IN_1 or IN_2 whose status is "Bad" regarding it as a value of "Good."

6 Carry

Carries over an excess exceeding the threshold at reset to the next integration. (Note that this does not apply to UP_AUTO or DN_AUTO.)

7 Add zero if bad

Interprets an increment as zero if the status of the increment is "Bad."

8 Confirm reset

After a reset, rejects the next reset until "Confirm" is set to RESET_CONFIRM.

9

Generate reset event

Generates an alert event at reset.

10~15 Reserved

* If both forward and reverse flows are enabled or disabled, both forward and reverse flows are integrated.
Specify the period at which a periodic reset is made.
Set an allowance applied before an integrated value exceeds the setpoint.
Indicates the number of resets in the range of 0 to 999999.
The ratio of "the integrated values of the absolute values of the increments whose status is Good" to the "integrated values of the absolute values of the increments irrelevant to the status" (Equation)
The threshold value of the ratio of "the integrated values of the increments whose status is Good" to all integrated values in which the status of OUT is "Good"
The threshold value of the ratio of "the integrated values of the increments whose status is Good" to all the integrated values in which the status of OUT is "Uncertain"
Operator command that resets integrated values
Maximum time for which values can be retained in the event of power failure. It does not effect the block operation.
Reset confirmation input, which is enabled when the Confirm reset option of INTEG_OPTS is chosen

Indicates event information if an update event occurs.

Indicates alarm information if a block alarm occurs. Accumulated integrated values (no extension parameter is reset)

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 6. Enhanced ARITHMETIC (AR) BLOCK>

A6-1

APPENDIX 6. Enhanced ARITHMETIC (AR) BLOCK

The Arithmetic (AR) block switches two main inputs of different measurement ranges seamlessly and combines the result with three auxiliary inputs through the selected compensation function (10 types) to calculate the output. For the METHOD of AR block, read APPENDIX 10.2 "Enhanced AR Block."
A6.1 Schematic Diagram of Arithmetic Block
The diagram below shows the Arithmetic block schematic.

IN IN_LO
IN_1 IN_2 IN_3

Input RANGE_LO
RANGE_HI

Computing ARITH_TYPE

RANGE EXTENSION FUNCTION
(IN_1+BIAS_IN_1) x GAIN_IN_1
(IN_2+BIAS_IN_2) x GAIN_IN_2
(IN_3+BIAS_IN_3) x GAIN_IN_3

PV

ARITH_TYPE

t_1

1 to 10

func

t_2 ARITH_TYPE 32 to 36
t_3

Output OUT_HI_LIM MAN
O/S PRE_OUT x GAIN + BIAS
OUT_LO_LIM

OUT

BIAS_IN_i GAIN_IN_i

COMP_LO_LIM COMP_HI_LIM

Figure A6.1 AR Block

FA0601.ai

The Arithmetic block is divided into three sections:

· Input section: Makes a go/no-go decision on the use of an input value, switches the range, and determines the PV status.
· Computation section: Makes calculations through ARITH_TYPE.
· Output section: Applies gain multiplication and bias addition to the calculated result to perform limitation processing for output.

* The range extension function compensates the IN and IN_LO input values when two devices with different ranges are connected, to make smooth input switching.

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 6. Enhanced ARITHMETIC (AR) BLOCK>

A6-2

A6.2 Input Section
There are five inputs: IN and IN_LO main inputs and IN_1, IN_2, and IN_3 auxiliary inputs. IN and IN_LO are intended to connect devices with different measurement ranges and allow the use of switching a measurement range by selecting the measuring device. However, because there are slight differences between IN and IN_LO values even when the same item is measured, instantaneous switching causes abrupt changes in the output. To prevent this phenomenon, the Arithmetic block uses a function known as range extension to compensate the IN and IN_LO values between RANGE_HI and RANGE_LO. This enables the input to be switched smoothly. The result of the range extension function is substituted into PV to be used for calculations.
A6.2.1 Main Inputs
The range extension function determines the PV value in the following order: 1. If IN  RANGE_HI  PV = IN 2. If IN  RANGE_LO  PV = IN_LO 3. If RANGE_HI > IN > RANGE_LO  PV = g × IN
+ (1- g) × IN_LO g = (IN - RANGE_LO) / (RANGE_HI - RANGE_LO) RANGE_HI and RANGE_LO are threshold values
for switching two main inputs seamlessly.

PV = IN_LO PV=g 3 IN+(1-g) 3 IN_LO
Formula based on (1) and (2)

PV =IN

(2): Range for IN

PV is a parameter with status information, and PV status is determined by the value of "g."
If "g" < 0.5  The status of IN_LO is used.
If "g"  0.5  The status of IN is used. Determination of the status is made with a hysteresis of 10% provided for 0.5. If RANGE_LO > RANGE_HI, the statuses of PV and OUT are "Bad. Configuration Error." Then "Configuration Error" is output to BLOCK_ERR. If there is only one main input, the input is incorporated into the computation section as is, not taking into account RANGE_HI and RANGE_LO. Example:
Assuming that
RANGE_LO 20 RANGE_HI 300
the following are established: IN = 310, IN_LO = 20  PV = 310 IN = 230, IN_LO = 20  g = (230 - 20) / (300 - 20) = 0.75 PV = 0.75 × 230 + (1 0.75) × 20 = 177.5 IN = 90, IN_LO = 20  g = (90 - 20) / (300 - 20) = 0.25 PV = 0.25 × 230 + (1 + 0.25) × 20 = 37.5 IN = 19, IN_LO = 10  PV = 10
A6.2.2 Auxiliary Inputs
There are bias and gain parameters for the IN_1, IN_2, and IN_3 auxiliary inputs. The following shows the equation using them.
t_i = (IN_i + BIAS_IN_i) × GAIN_IN_i

(1): Range for IN_LO

The bias parameter is used for calculating absolute temperature or absolute pressure, while the gain parameter is used for normalization of square root extraction.

RANGE_LO

RANGE_HI

IN
FA0602.ai

Figure A6.2 Range Extension Function and PV

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 6. Enhanced ARITHMETIC (AR) BLOCK>

A6-3

A6.2.3 INPUT_OPTS
INPUT_OPTS has an option that handles an input with "uncertain" or "bad" status as a "good" status input.

Bit

Function

0

Handles IN as a "good" status input if its status is "uncertain."

1

Handles IN_LO as a "good" status input if its status is "uncertain."

2

Handles IN_1 as a "good" status input if its status is "uncertain."

3

Handles IN_1 as a "good" status input if its status is "bad."

4

Handles IN_2 as a "good" status input if its status is "uncertain."

5

Handles IN_2 as a "good" status input if its status is "bad."

6

Handles IN_3 as a "good" status input if its status is "uncertain."

7

Handles IN_3 as a "good" status input if its status is "bad."

8 to 15 Reserved

· If the status of IN is anything other than "good" and that of "IN_LO" is "good" IN_LO < RANGE_HI  PV = IN_LO IN_LO  RANGE_H  Read APPENDIX 6.2.1 "Main Inputs."
If the status of IN is "good" and that of "IN_LO" is anything other than "good"

PV = g × IN + (1-g) × IN_LO

PV = IN

IN RANGE_LO

If the status of IN is anything other than "good" and that of "IN_LO" is "good"

PV = IN_LO

PV = g × IN + (1-g) × IN_LO

RANGE_HI

IN_LO
FA0603.ai

There are options called "IN Use uncertain" and "IN_LO Use uncertain" for the IN and IN_LO inputs. When these options are valid, IN and IN_LO are internally interpreted as "good" IN and IN_LO even if their statuses are "uncertain." (There is no option for "bad" status.) For the IN_1, IN_2, and IN_3 auxiliary inputs, there are options known as "IN_i Use uncertain" and "IN_i Use bad." If these options are valid, an IN_i with "uncertain" or "bad" status is internally interpreted as a "good" IN_i. * The exception is that if the input status is "Bad.
Not Connected," INPUT_OPTS does not apply and the input is considered "bad" as is.

A6.2.4 Relationship between the Main Inputs and PV
The value and PV status are determined by the statuses of two main inputs, INPUT_OPTS, and RANGE_LO and RANGE_HI. · If the statuses of two main inputs are both "good"
or anything other than "good", read APPENDIX 6.2.1 "Main Inputs." · If only one of two main inputs has "good" status after application of INPUT_OPTS, the PV value is determined as follows: · If the status of IN is "good" and that of "IN_LO"
is anything other than "good" IN > RANGE_LO  PV = IN IN  RANGE_LO  Read APPENDIX 6.2.1 "Main Inputs."

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 6. Enhanced ARITHMETIC (AR) BLOCK>

A6-4

A6.3 Computation Section

A6.3.1 Computing Equations

This subsection shows computing equations used

in the computation section:

1) Flow compensation (linear)

func = PV × f

f = (t_1 / t_2)

2) Flow compensation (square root)

func = PV × f

f = sqrt(t_1 / t_2 / t_3)

3) Flow compensation (approximate expression)

func = PV × f

f = sqrt(t_1 × t_2 × t_3 × t_3)

4) Quantity of heat calculation

func = PV × f

f = (t_1 - t_2)

5) Multiplication and division

func = PV × f

f = ((t_1 / t_2) + t_3)

6) Average calculation

func = (PV + t_1 + t_2 + t_3) / N

where N: number of inputs

7) Summation

func = PV + t_1 + t_2 + t_3

8) Polynomial computation

func = PV + t_12 + t_23 + t_34

9) HTG-level compensation

func = (PV - t_1) / (PV - t_2)

10) Polynomial computation

func = PV + GAIN_IN_1 × PV2 + GAIN_IN_2 ×

PV3 +GAIN_IN_3 × PV4

* Precaution for computation

Division by "0":

If a value is divided by "0,"

the calculation result is

interpreted as 1037 and,

depending with core, a plus

sign is added to it.

Negative square root: The square root of an

absolute value is extracted

and a minus sign is added to

it.

A6.3.2 Enhanced Computing Equations

32) Saturated steam (Temp): Saturated steam density calculation (by temperature: based on IAPWS-IF97) func = PV x Correction Value Correction Value: Saturated Steam density calculated from t_1 (temp input). Temperature range: 100 to 330°C

33) Saturated steam (Pressure): Saturated steam density calculation (by pressure based on IAPWS-IF97) func = PV x Correction Value. Correction Value: Saturated steam density calculated from t_2 (Press. input). Pressure range: 0.101417978 to 12.85752189 MPa
34) Superheat steam: Superheat steam density calculation (based on IAPWS-IF97) func = PV x Correction Value Correction Value: Superheat steam density calculated from t_1 (Temp. input) and t_2 (Press. input). Temperature range: 100 to 330°C Pressure range: 0.101417978 to 12.85752189 MPa
35) Gas temp pressure comp (Simple): Gas temperature and pressure compensation calculation. (Deviation factor: Fixed based on Boyle-Charle's law.) func = PV x Correction Value Correction Value: Gas density ratio (f /b) calculated from t_1 (Temp. input) and t_2 (Press. input), or, density at operating condition (f).
36) Liquid temp comp (Simple): Liquid temperature compensation calculation (based on API, JIS K 2249.) func = PV x Correction Value Correction Value: Liquid density at operating condition calculated from t_1 (Temp. input).
37) Gas temp pressure comp (Detail): Gas temperature and pressure compensation calculation (approximating polynomial calculation: 0 to 11). func = PV x Correction Value Correction Value: Gas density (Flow unit: Mass flow rate) at operating condition calculated from approximating polynomial calculation: 0 to 11, or Density ratio (Flow unit: Volumetric flow rate at normal condition) calculated from density at normal condition.
38) Liquid temp comp (Detail): Liquid temperature and pressure compensation calculation (approximating polynomial calculation). func = PV x Correction Value Correction Value: Liquid density at operating condition calculated from approximating polynomial calculation: 0 to 3.

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 6. Enhanced ARITHMETIC (AR) BLOCK>

A6-5

A6.3.3 Compensated Values
In computing equations 1) to 5) in APPENDIX 6.3.1 "Computing Equations" and 32) to 38) in APPENDIX 6.3.2 "Enhanced Computing Equations", the value "f" is restricted by the COMP_ HI_LIM or COMP_LO_LIM parameter. In this case, the value "f" is treated as follows:
Calculation formura 1) to 5) If f > COMP_HI_LIM:
f = COMP_HI_LIM
If f < COMP_LO_LIM: f = COMP_LO_LIM
Calculation formura 32) to 38) If Correction value > COMP_HI_LIM:
Correction value = COMP_HI_LIM If Correction value < COMP_LO_LIM:
Correction value = COMP_LO_LIM
A6.3.4 Average Calculation
In computing equation 6) in APPENDIX 6.3.1 "Computing Equations", the average of input value is calculated. Here, it is necessary to obtain the number of inputs, N. For this, determination is made to see if the sub-status of each input is "Not Connected." Note that the main inputs may be accepted if IN or IN_LO is not in "Not Connected" sub-status. In this case, the number of inputs that are not in "Not Connected" sub-status is regarded as "N."

A6.4 Output Section
After executing the computing equation, the block applies a gain to the calculated result and then adds a bias to it. It then substitutes the result into PRE_OUT and if the mode is in AUTO, the value of PRE_OUT is taken as OUT.
PRE_OUT = func × gain + bias where func: result of computing equation execution OUT = PRE_OUT (when the mode is in AUTO) Next, the block performs limitation processing (OUT_HI_LIM, OUT_LOW_LIM). This processing is described as follows with respect to the value of PRE_OUT. If PRE_OUT > OUT_HI_LIM:
PRE_OUT = OUT_HI_LIM The "high limited" processing is applied to the status of PRE_OUT. If PRE_OUT < OUT_LO_LIM: PRE_OUT = OUT_LO_LIM The "low limited" processing is applied to the status of PRE_OUT.

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 6. Enhanced ARITHMETIC (AR) BLOCK>

A6-6

A6.4.1 Mode Handling

Mode Auto MAN O/S

OUT = PRE_OUT

Output

For OUT, the OUT value in the Auto mode just before change to MAN or O/S is retained.

In the Manual mode (including O/S), the value of OUT in the Auto mode just before a change to the Manual mode is held or the value written to OUT is output. If the mode is switched from Manual to Auto, the value of OUT that is linearly changed with respect to the value of PRE_OUT for time set by BAL_TIME is output. The PRE_OUT always indicates the results of calculation. After elapse of BAL_TIME, OUT = PRE_OUT is established. Note that if the value of BAL_TIME is changed during linear change of the OUT value, it is not reflected. The value of BAL_TIME will be reflected only after the mode is changed the next time.

AUTO

MAN

AUTO

BAL_TIME PRE_OUT Case of BAL_TIME = 5 sec OUT

FA0604.ai

The value of OUT is represented by the following equation.
yn = yn-1 + (xn -yn-1) / ( - n)  = (T / tc) + 1 *: The value of T/tc truncates digits to the right of the decimal point.
where y : OUT x : PRE_OUT tc : period of execution T : BAL_TIME n : period

A6.4.2 Status Handling

The setting of INPUT_OPTS is applied to the input

status. When INPUT_OPTS is applied, there are

cases where the PV status becomes "good" even if

the status of main inputs is "uncertain" or the status

of auxiliary inputs is "uncertain" or "bad."

The PV status is classified by the following:

· If the statuses of two main inputs are both

"good" or anything other than "good":

Read APPENDIX 6.2.1 "Main Inputs"

· If only one of the statuses of two main inputs is

"good":

· If the status of IN is "good" and that of "IN_

LO" is anything other than "good"

IN > RANGE_LO  The status of IN

applies.

IN  RANGE_LO  Read APPENDIX 6.2.1

"Main Inputs"

· If the status of IN is anything other than

"good" and that of "IN_LO" is "good"

IN_LO < RANGE_H  The status of IN_LO

applies.

IN_LO  RANGE_HI  Read APPENDIX

6.2.1 "Main Inputs"

The exception is that if RANGE_LO > RANGE_HI,

the PV status is made "Bad. Configuration Error."

The input status irrelevant to the computing

equation selected by ARITH_TYPE will be ignored

and does not affect other statuses. The statuses

of outputs (OUT.Status and PRE_OUT.Status) are

interpreted as the status of the worst input among

the statuses of PV and auxiliary inputs (IN_1,

IN_2, and IN_3) to which INPUT_OPTS has been

applied.

Example: If input status and INPUT_OPTS has

been applied

Case 1

Case 2

Case 3

PV

Good

IN_1

Uncertain

IN_2

Bad

IN_3

Bad

Handled as a

IN_1

"good" input if its status is

No option

INPUT_

"uncertain."

OPTS

IN_2

Handled as a "good" input if its status is "bad."

No option

IN_3

No option

ARITH_TYPE

1) Flow compensation (linear) in APPENDIX 6.3.1 "Computing Equations"

OUT.Status

Good

Uncertain

Bad

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 6. Enhanced ARITHMETIC (AR) BLOCK>

A6-7

A6.5 List of the Arithmetic Block Parameters

Relative Index

Parameter

Write Mode

Initial Value

Description / Remarks

0

Block Header

Block Tag = O/S

TAG="AR"

Information relating to this function block, such as block tag, DD revision, and execution time

1 ST_REV

Indicates the revision level of the set parameters associated with the Arithmetic

--

0 block. If a setting is modified, this revision is updated. It is used to check for

parameter changes, etc.

2 TAG_DESC

AUTO

Null A universal parameter that stores comments describing tag information

3 STRATEGY

AUTO

1

A universal parameter intended for use by a high-level system to identify function blocks

4 ALERT_KEY

AUTO

Key information used to identify the location at which an alert has occurred.

1

Generally, this parameter is used by a high-level system to identify specific areas in a plant that are under the control of specific operators, to separate necessary alerts

only. This is one of the universal parameters.

5 MODE_BLK

AUTO

A universal parameter representing the operation status of the Arithmetic block. It consists of the Actual, Target, Permit, and Normal modes.

6 BLOCK_ERR

--

Indicates the error status relating to the Arithmetic block.

0

The bit used by this function block is as follows: Bit 1: Block Configuration Error

Bit 15: O/S mode

7 PV

--

0

The result of a range extension function is substituted into this. When viewed from the computing equation, PV is the main input.

8 OUT

MAN

0 Block output

9 PRE_OUT 10 PV_SCALE 11 OUT_RANGE

-- O/S AUTO

0 Always indicates the calculation result. The value is substituted into OUT in Auto mode. Indicates PV scaling (for making a memo). Output scaling for the host (for making a memo)

12 GRANT_DENY

AUTO

The parameter used to check if various operations have been executed. The bits

in the GRANT parameter corresponding to various operations are set before any

0

of them are executed. After the operations are complete, the DENY parameter is checked to find out if any bit corresponding to the relevant operation has been

set. If no bit has been set, it is evident that the operations have been executed

successfully.

Determines whether an input is used as a "good" input when the input status is "bad" or "uncertain."

Bit

Function

0 Handles IN as "good" input if its status is "uncertain."

1 Handles IN_LO as "good" input if its status is "uncertain."

13 INPUT_OPTS

AUTO

2 Handles IN_1 as "good" input if its status is "uncertain."

0

3 Handles IN_1 as "good" input if its status is "bad."

4 Handles IN_2 as "good" input if its status is "uncertain."

5 Handles IN_2 as "good" input if its status is "bad."

6 Handles IN_3 as "good" input if its status is "uncertain."

7 Handles IN_3 as "good" input if its status is "bad."

8 to 15 Reserved

14 IN
15 IN_LO
16 IN_1 17 IN_2 18 IN_3 19 RANGE_HI 20 RANGE_LO 21 BIAS_IN_1 22 GAIN_IN_1 23 BIAS_IN_2 24 GAIN_IN_2 25 BIAS_IN_3 26 GAIN_IN_3 27 COMP_HI_LIM 28 COMP_LO_LIM

AUTO
AUTO
AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO

0
0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 +INF -INF

Input block Input for a low-range transmitter. This is used for the range extension function. Auxiliary input 1 Auxiliary input 2 Auxiliary input 3 High limit for switching to a high-range transmitter by the range extension function. Low limit for switching to a low-range transmitter by the range extension function. IN_1 bias IN_1 gain IN_2 bias IN_2 gain IN_3 bias IN_3 gain High limit of compensation factor f Low limit of compensation factor f

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 6. Enhanced ARITHMETIC (AR) BLOCK>

A6-8

Relative Index

Parameter

Write Mode

29 ARITH_TYPE

AUTO

30 BAL_TIME

31 BIAS

32 GAIN

33 OUT_HI_LIM

34 OUT_LO_LIM

35 UPDATE_EVT

36 BLOCK_ALM

AR_ 37 VOLUMETRIC_
FLOW_UNIT

AR_ 38 TEMPERATURE_
UNIT

39

AR_BASE_ TEMPERATURE

AR_ 40 PRESSURE_
UNIT

41

AR_BASE_ PRESSURE_ABS

42 AR_DEVIATION

43

AR_DENSITY_ UNIT

44

AR_BASE_ DENSITY

45

AR_FIRST_ TEMP_COEF

46

AR_SECOND_ TEMP_COEF

47

AR_FLOW_ CONFIG

48

AR_DENSITY_ FACTOR

49

AR_DENSITY_ FACTOR_UNIT

AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO
-- -- O/S
O/S
MAN
O/S
MAN MAN O/S MAN MAN MAN
MAN
--
--

Initial Value
0x01

Description / Remarks

Computation algorithm identification no.

Value

Selection Name

Description

1 Flow compensation, linear

Flow compensation (linear)

2 Flow compensation, square root Flow compensation (square root)

3 Flow compensation, approximate Flow compensation (approximate expression)

4 BTU flow (*)

Quantity of heat calculation

5 Traditional Multiply Divide

Multiplication and division

6 Average

Average calculation

7 Traditional summer

Summation

8 Fourth order Polynomial, (Type 1) 4th-order (auxiliary input) polynomial computation

9 HTG level compensation (*)

HTG-level compensation

10 Fourth order Polynomial, (Type 2) 4th-order (main input) polynomial computation

11 to 31 Reserve

For reserve of FF Std calculation.

32 Saturated steam (Temperature) Density calculation of Sat.Steam (Temp.)

33 Saturated steam (Pressure)

Density calculation of Sat.Steam (Press.)

34 Superheat steam

Gas Temp./Press. compensation calculation (Deviation factor: Fixed).

35 Gas temperature pressure compensation

Density calculation of S.H.Steam

36 Liquid temperature compensation Liquid Temp. compensation Calculation

37 Gas temperature pressure compensation (Detail)

Gas Temp./Press. compensation calculation (approximating polynomial calculation: 0 to 11).

38 Liquid temperature compensation Liquid Temp./Press. compensation calculation

(Detail)

(approximating polynomial calculation: 0 to 3).

0 0 1 +INF -INF

* BTU stands for British thermal unit. HTG stands for hydrostatic tank gauging.
Time taken to return to the set value Bias value used to calculate the output Gain value used to calculate the output Maximum output value Minimum output value Indicates event information if an update event (setting change) occurs. Indicates alarm information if a block alarm occurs.

m3/h (1349)

Volumetric flow unit

°C (1001)

Temperature unit

0.0 Temperature unit at normal condition

MPa (1132)

Pressure unit

0.1013 Pressure unit at normal condition (abs)

1.0 Deviation factor

kg/m3 (1097)

Density unit

1.0 Density unit at normal condition

0.0 1st temperature coefficient for liquid

0.0 2nd temperature coefficient for liquid

all 0.0

A polynomial coefficient for density calculation (16) Gas Temp./Press. Calculation (Detail): use FLOW_CONFIG[0] to [11] Liquid calculation (Detail): use FLOW_CONFIG [0] to [3]

Correction value:

--

Mass flow output: density at operating condition Volumetric flow output: ratio of density at operation condition to density at normal

condition.)

Correction value unit. (The unit is indicated only for density at operation condition.)

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 6. Enhanced ARITHMETIC (AR) BLOCK>

A6-9

Relative Index

Parameter

50

AR_CONFIG_ SOFT_REV

51

AR_CONFIG_ DATE

52

AR_CONFIG_ WHO

53

AR_CONFIG_ STATUS

54

AR_CONFIG_ VSTRING32

55

AR_CONFIG_ VSTRING16

56

AR_CONFIG_ OSTRING32

57

AR_CONFIG_ OSTRING2

Write Mode AUTO AUTO AUTO

Initial Value

Description / Remarks

(Space)

Memo; The version of MV tool which is calculated multinominal approximation coefficient.

(Space) Memo; The date of multinomial approximation coefficient setting.

(Space) Memo; The person who set the multinominal approximation coefficient.

AUTO

0 Memo; Setting download status.

AUTO

(Space) Memo; 32 characters

AUTO

(Space) Memo; 16x2 characters

AUTO AUTO

0 Memo; 32 characters

0

SUM of coefficient which is calculated at multinominal approximation coefficient setting.

A6.6 Example of Connection

ARITH_TYPE:32 Saturated steam (Temperature) In case of using external temperature output

ARITH_TYPE:35 Gas temperature pressure compensation ARITH_TYPE:37 Gas temperature pressure compensation (Detail)

DYF AI3 Temp. AI

IN
IN_1 AR OUT
IN_2

Mass Flow Rate

In case of using external temperature output

DYF AI3 Temp. AI Press. AI

IN
AR OUT
IN_1 IN_2

Mass Flow Rate or Volumetric Flow Rate at Normal Condition

In case of using built-in temperature sensor output

DYF AI3 DYF AI2

IN
AR OUT
IN_1 IN_2

Mass Flow Rate

In case of using built-in temperature sensor output

DYF AI3
DYF AI2 Press. AI

IN
IN_1 AR OUT
IN_2

Mass Flow Rate or Volumetric Flow Rate at Normal Condition

ARITH_TYPE:33 Saturated steam (Pressure)

DYF AI3 Press. AI

IN

IN_1 IN_2

AR OUT

ARITH_TYPE:34 Superheat steam In case of using external temperature output

DYF AI3

IN

Temp. AI Press. AI

IN_1 AR OUT
IN_2

ARITH_TYPE:36 Liquid temperature compensation ARITH_TYPE:38 Liquid temperature compensation (Detail)

Mass Flow Rate In case of using external temperature output

DYF AI3 Temp. AI

IN
AR OUT
IN_1 IN_2

Mass Flow Rate

Mass Flow Rate

In case of using built-in temperature sensor output

DYF AI3 DYF AI2

IN
AR OUT
IN_1 IN_2

Mass Flow Rate

In case of using built-in temperature sensor output

DYF AI3
DYF AI2 Press. AI

IN
IN_1 AR OUT
IN_2

Mass Flow Rate

FA0605.ai

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 6. Enhanced ARITHMETIC (AR) BLOCK>
A6.7 Setting Procedure of the Mass Flow Rate Calculation
Mass flow rate calculation, Setting start

A6-10

Choice of calculation method
Input and output unit parameter settings

Choose from the following ARITH_TYPE. 32 : Saturated steam (Temperature) (Saturated steam density calculation (Temperature)) 33 : Saturated steam (Pressure) (Saturated steam density calculation (Temperature)) 34 : Superheat steam (Superheat steam density calculation) 35 : Gas temperature pressure compensation (Gas temperature and pressure correction operation) 36 : Liquid temperature compensation (Liquid temperature correction calculation)
Set the input of the following, the parameters of the output section. GAIN = 1.0 If you are using a temperature input, GAIN_IN_1 = 1.0 If you use a pressure input, GAIN_IN_2 = 1.0compensation (liquid temperature correction calculation)

Unit setting of volume flow input

Set to AR_VOLUME_FLOW_UNIT the volume flow input unit. Selectable units ;
AR_VOLUMETRIC_FLOW_UNIT
m3/s (1347), m3/min (1348), m3/h (1349), m3/d (1350), L/s (1351), L/min (1352), L/h (1353), L/d (1354), CFS (1356), CFM (1357), CFH (1358), ft3/d (1359), gal/s (1362), GPM (1363), gal/h (1364), gal/d (1365), ImpGal/s (1367), ImpGal/min (1368), ImpGal/h (1369), ImpGal/d (1370), bbl/s (1371), bbl/min (1372), bbl/h (1373), bbl/d (1374)

Unit-range setting of output
Unit setting of pressure or input temperature input

Set to OUT_RANGE.Units Index units of output. Selectable units,
Mass flow rate units: kg/s, kg/min, kg/h, t/s, t/min, t/h Volumetric flow rate units: Nm3/s, Nm3/min, Nm3/h, NL/s, NL/min, NL/h If the gas pressure temperature correction calculation, units of all of the above can be set. Otherwise, it can only be set in mass flow units.
Also, set the output range (100%, 0%) the EU_100, to EU_0.
If you are using a temperature input, set the AR_TEMP_UNIT the temperature unit. Selectable units ;
AR_TEMPERATURE_UNIT K (1000), °C (1001), °F (1002)
If you use a pressure input, set the AR_PRESSURE_UNIT the pressure unit. Selectable units ;
AR_PRESSURE_UNIT Pa (1130), Gpa (1131), Mpa (1132), kPa (1133), mpa (1134), µpa (1135), hPa (1136), bar (1137), mbar (1138), torr (1139), atm (1140), psi (1141), g/cm2 (1144), kg/cm2 (1145), inH2O (1146), inH2O (4°C) (1147), inH2O (68°F) (1148), mmH2O (1149), mmH2O (4°C) (1150), mmH2O (68°F) (1151), ftH2O (1152), ftH2O (4°C) (1153), ftH2O (68°F) (1154), inHg (1155), inHg (0°C) (1156), mmHg (1157), mmHg (0°C) (1158),
AR_DENSITY_UNIT kg/m3 (1097), lb/ft3 (1107), lb/gal (1108), lb/ImpGal (1430)
AR_DENSITY_FACTOR_UNIT kg/m3 (1097), lb/ft3 (1107), lb/gal (1108), lb/ImpGal (1430), No units (1588)
(Pressure unit does not distinguish gauge pressure, absolute pressure.) Also, if the input is a pressure gauge pressure, set the value of atmospheric pressure in BIAS_IN_2.

Set of parameters to be used for correction
End

If you want to steam saturation density operation (temperature or pressure), the superheated steam density computation is set density units (AR_DENSITY_UNIT).

If you are the gas temperature and pressure correction computation is set standard state temperature AR_BASE_TEMP, standard state pressure AR_BASE_PRESSURE, the coefficient of variation AR_DEVIATION. For a mass flow unit, standard density of states and density AR_BASE_DENSITY unit AR_DENSITY_UNIT also please set the output unit.

If the solution is temperature correction calculation, set the standard density of states and density AR_BASE_DENSITY unit AR_DENSITY_UNIT, standard state temperature AR_BASE_TEMP, primary, secondary temperature correction factor AR_FIRST_TEMP_COEF, the AR_SECOND_TEMP_COEF.

*The configuration please use the Method (read Appendix 10 "METHOD")

FA0606.ai

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 7. LINK MASTER FUNCTIONS>

A7-1

APPENDIX 7. LINK MASTER FUNCTIONS

A7.1 Link Active Scheduler

A link active scheduler (LAS) is a deterministic, centralized bus scheduler that can control communications on an H1 fieldbus segment. There is only one LAS on an H1 fieldbus segment. A digitalYEWFLO supports the following LAS functions.

1 PN transmission
2 PT transmission
3 CD transmission
4 Time synchronization 5 Live list equalization 6 LAS transfer

Identifies a fieldbus device newly connected to the same fieldbus segment. PN is short for Probe Node.
Passes a token governing the right to transmit, to a fieldbus device on the same segment. PT is short for Pass Token.
Carry out a scheduled transmission to a fieldbus device on the same segment. CD is short for Compel Data.
Periodically transmits the time data to all fieldbus devices on the segment and returns the time data in response to a request from a device.
Sends the live list data to link masters on the same segment.
Transfers the right to be the LAS on the segment to another link master.

A7.2 Link Master

A link master (LM) is any device containing a link active scheduler. There must be at least one LM on a segment. When the LAS on a segment has failed, another LM on the same segment starts working as the LAS.

LM LAS

Node address: 0x14 SlotTime = 5

There are 3 LMs on this segment.

LM Node address:
0x15 SlotTime = 5

LM Node address:
0x16 SlotTime = 5

Basic device Node address:
0xF1

Basic device Node address:
0xF2

Basic device Node address:
0xF3

Basic device Node address:
0xF4
FA0701.ai

Figure A7.1 Example of Fieldbus configuration-3 LMs on Same Segment

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 7. LINK MASTER FUNCTIONS>

A7-2

A7.3 Transfer of LAS

There are two procedures for an LM to become the LAS: (1) If the LM whose value of [V(ST)×V(TN)] is the smallest on a segment, with the exception of the current
LAS, judges that there is no LAS on the segment, in such a case as when the segment has started up or when the current LAS has failed, the LM declares itself as the LAS, then becomes the LAS. (With this procedure, an LM backs up the LAS as shown in the following figure.) (2) The LM whose value of [V(ST)×V(TN)] is the smallest on a segment, with the exception of the current LAS, requests the LAS on the same segment to transfer the right of being the LAS, then becomes the LAS.

LM LAS

Node address: 0x14 SlotTime = 5

In the event that the current LAS in this segment (node address 0x14) fails, the LM with the address of 0x15 takes its place to become the LAS.

LAS

LM Node address:
0x15 SlotTime = 5

LM Node address:
0x16 SlotTime = 5

Basic device Node address:
0xF1

Basic device Node address:
0xF2

Basic device Node address:
0xF3

Basic device Node address:
0xF4
FA0702.ai

Figure A7.2 Backup of LAS

To set up a digitalYEWFLO as a device that is capable of backing up the LAS, follow the procedure below. NOTE: When changing the settings in a digitalYEWFLO, add the digitalYEWFLO to the segment in which an LAS is running. After making changes to the settings, do not turn off the power to the digitalYEWFLO for at least 60 seconds.
(1) Set the node address of the digitalYEWFLO. In general, use an address from 0x14 to [V(FUN) ­ 1].

0x00 0x0F 0x10 0x13 0x14 V (FUN)

Not used Bridge device
LM device

Not used

V (FUN) + V (NUN)

0xF7

Basic device

0xF8 0xFB

Default address

0xFC Portable-device address

0xFF

Figure A7.3 Node Address Ranges

V (NUN)
FA0703.ai

(2) In the LAS settings of the digitalYEWFLO, set the values of V(ST), V(MRD), and V(MID) to the same as the respective lowest capability values in all the devices within the segment. An example is shown below.

DlmeBasicInfo (digitalYEWFLO Index 361 (SM))

Subindex

Element

digital Device Device Device YEWFLO 1 2 3

Description

1 Slot Time

4

8

10

20

Capability value for V(ST)

3

MaxResponse Delay

3

Capability 6 3 5 value for
V(MRD)

6

MinInterPdu Delay

4

Capability 8 12 10 value for
V(MID)

In this case, set SlotTime, MaxResponseTime, and MinInterPduDelay as follows:
ConfiguredLinkSettingsRecord (digitalYEWFLO Index 369 (SM))

Subindex

Element

1 SlotTime 3 MaxResponseDelay 6 MinInterPduDelay

Setting (Default) 20 (4095)
6 (5)
12 (12)

Description
V (ST) V (MRD) V (MID)

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 7. LINK MASTER FUNCTIONS>

(3) In the LAS settings of the digitalYEWFLO, set the values of V(FUN) and V(NUN) so that they include the node addresses of all nodes within the same segment. (Read Figure A7.3.)

ConfiguredLinkSettingsRecord (digitalYEWFLO Index 369 (SM))

Subindex

Element

Default Value

Description

4 FirstUnpolledNodeId

0x25 V (FUN)

7 NumConsecUnpolledNodeId 0xBA V (NUN)

A7.4 LM Functions

No.

Function

Description

1 LM initialization

When a fieldbus segment starts, the LM with the smallest [V(ST) × V(TN)] value within the segment becomes the LAS. At all times, each LM is checking whether or not a carrier is on the segment.

2 Startup of other nodes (PN and Node Activation SPDU transmissions)

Transmits a PN (Probe Node) message, and Node Activation SPDU message to devices which return a new PR (Probe Response) message.

3 PT transmission (including final bit monitoring)

Passes a PT (Pass Token) message to devices included in the live list sequentially, and monitors the RT (Return Token) and final bit returned in reply to the PT.

4 CD transmission

Transmits a CD (Compel Data) message at the scheduled times.

5 Time synchronization

Supports periodic TD (Time Distribution) transmissions and transmissions of a reply to a CT (Compel Time).

6 Domain download server

Sets the schedule data. The schedule data can be equalized only when the Domain Download command is carried out from outside the LM in question. (The version of the schedule is usually monitored, but no action takes place, even when it changes.)

7 Live list equalization Transmits SPDU messages to LMs to equalize live lists.

8 LAS transfer

Transfers the right of being the LAS to another LM.

9 Reading/writing of Read APPENDIX 7.5 "LM

NMIB for LM

Parameters."

10 Round Trip Delay Reply (RR) Reply to DLPDU

Not yet supported in the current version.

11 Long address

Not yet supported in the current version.

A7-3

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 7. LINK MASTER FUNCTIONS>

A7-4

A7.5 LM Parameters

A7.5.1 LM Parameter List

The tables below show LM parameters of a digitalYEWFLO.
Meanings of Access column entries: RW = read/write possible; R = read only

Index (SM)

Parameter Name

Sub-parameter Name (Sub Index)

Default Factory Setting

Access

Remarks

362 DLME_LINK_MASTER_CAPABILITIES_VARIABLE

0x04

RW

363 DLME_LINK_

0

RW

MASTER_ INFO_ RECORD

1 MaxSchedulingOverhead

0

2 DefMinTokenDelegTime

100

3 DefTokenHoldTime

300

4 TargetTokenRotTime

4096

5 LinkMaintTokHoldTime

400

6 TimeDistributionPeriod

5000

7 MaximumInactivityToClaimLasDelay

8

8 LasDatabaseStatusSpduDistributionPeriod 6000

364 PRIMARY_LINK_MASTER_FLAG_VARIABLE

­

RW LAS: True = 0xFF non-LAS: False = 0x00

365 LIVE_LIST_STATUS_ARRAY_VARIABLE

­

R

366 MAX_TOKEN_HOLD_ 0

TIME_ARRAY

1 Element1

RW 0x0000×16, 0x012c×16

2 Element2

0x012c×5, 0x0000×27

3 Element3

0x0000×32

4 Element4

0x0000×32

5 Element5

0x0000×32

6 Element6

0x0000×32

7 Element7

0x0000×31, 0x012c×1

8 Element8

0x012c×32

367 BOOT_OPERAT_FUNCTIONAL_CLASS

Specified at the time of order

RW 0x01 (Standard); 0x02 (LM)

368 CURRENT_LINK_ SETTING_RECORD

0 1 SlotTime

R Settings for LAS

2 PerDlpduPhlOverhead

3 MaxResponseDelay

4 FirstUnpolledNodeId

5 ThisLink

6 MinInterPduDelay

7 NumConseeUnpolledNodeId

8 PreambleExtension

9 PostTransGapExtension

10 MaxInterChanSignalSkew

11 TimeSyncClass

369 CONFIGURED_LINK_ 0 SETTING_RECORD 1 SlotTime

4095

RW

4

2 PerDlpduPhlOverhead

5

3 MaxResponseDelay

37

4 FirstUnpolledNodeId

0

5 ThisLink

12

6 MinInterPduDelay

186

7 NumConseeUnpolledNodeId

2

8 PreambleExtension

1

9 PostTransGapExtension

0

10 MaxInterChanSignalSkew

4

11 TimeSyncClass

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 7. LINK MASTER FUNCTIONS>

A7-5

Index (SM)

Parameter Name

Sub-parameter Name (Sub Index)

370 PLME_BASIC_

0

CHARACTERISTICS 1 ChannelStatisticsSupported

2 MediumAndDataRatesSupported

3 IecVersion

4 NumOfChannels

5 PowerMode

371 CHANNEL_STATES 0

1 channel-1

2 channel-2

3 channel-3

4 channel-4

5 channel-5

6 channel-6

7 channel-7

8 channel-8

372 PLME_BASIC_INFO 0

1 InterfaceMode

2 LoopBackMode

3 XmitEnabled

4 RcvEnabled

5 PreferredReceiveChannel

6 MediaTypeSelected

7 ReceiveSelect

373 LINK_SCHEDULE_ACTIVATION_VARIABLE

374 LINK_ SCHEDULE_LIST_ CHARACTERISTICS_ RECORD

0 1 NumOfSchedules 2 NumOfSubSchedulesPerSchedule 3 ActiveScheduleVersion

4 ActiveSheduleOdIndex

5 ActiveScheduleStartingTime

375 DLME_SCHEDULE_ 0

DESCRIPTOR.1

1 Version

2 MacrocycleDuration

3 TimeResolution

376 DLME_SCHEDULE_ 0

DESCRIPTOR.2

1 Version

2 MacrocycleDuration

3 TimeResolution

377 DOMAIN.1

378 DOMAIN.2

Default Factory Setting
0x00 0x4900000000000000 1 (0x1) 1 (0x1) 0 (0x0)
0 (0x0) 128 (0x80) 128 (0x80) 128 (0x80) 128 (0x80) 128 (0x80) 128 (0x80) 128 (0x80)
0 (0x0) 0 (0x0) 1 (0x1) 1 (0x1) 1 (0x1) 73 (0x49) 1 (0x1)
0 1 0 0 0
0 0 0
0 0 0

Access R

Remarks

R

R
RW R
R
R
Read/write impossible. Get-OD possible. Read/write impossible. Get-OD possible.

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 7. LINK MASTER FUNCTIONS>

A7-6

A7.5.2 Descriptions for LM Parameters

The following describes LM parameters of digitalYEWFLO.
NOTE: Do not turn off the power to the digitalYEWFLO for 60 seconds after making a change to its parameter settings.

(1) DlmeLinkMasterCapabilitiesVariable

Bit Position

Meaning

Description

Value

LAS

Whether the LAS schedule can

B3: 0x04

Schedule in Non-volatile

(= 1) or cannot (= 0) be saved to the non-volatile memory

1

Memory

Last Values Whether to support (= 1) or not to B2: 0x02 Record support (= 0) LastValuesRecord. 0
Supported

Link Master Whether to support (= 1) or not

B1: 0x01

Statistics Record

to support (= 0) DlmeLinkMasterStatisticsRecord.

0

Supported

(2) DlmeLinkMasterInfoRecord

Subindex

Element

Size Descrip[bytes] tion

1 MaxSchedulingOverhead

1 V(MSO)

2 DefMinTokenDelegTime

2 V(DMDT)

3 DefTokenHoldTime

2 V(DTHT)

4 TargetTokenRotTime

2 V(TTRT)

5 LinkMaintTokHoldTime

2 V(LTHT)

6 TimeDistributionPeriod

4 V(TDP)

7 MaximumInactivityToClaimLasDelay

2 V(MICD)

8 LasDatabaseStatusSpduDistributionPeriod 2 V(LDDP)

(3) PrimaryLinkMasterFlagVariable
Explicitly declares the LAS. Writing "true" (0xFF) to this parameter in a device causes that device to attempt to become the LAS. However, a request of writing "true" to this parameter in a device is rejected if the value of the same parameter in any other device that has a smaller node address within the same segment is true.
(4) LiveListStatusArrayVariable
A 32-byte variable, in which each bit represents the status of whether a device on the same segment is live or not. The leading bit corresponds to the device address 0x00, and final bit to 0xFF. The value of LiveListStatusArrayVariable in the case where devices having the addresses 0x10 and 0x15 in the fieldbus segment is shown below.

0x00 00 84 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
Bit correspondences: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0×00
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0... 0×10 0×15
FA0704.ai
(5) MaxTokenHoldTimeArray
An 8 × 64-byte variable, in which each set of 2 bytes represents the delegation time (set as an octet time) assigned to a device. The delegation time denotes a time period that is given to a device by means of a PT message sent from the LAS within each token circulation cycle. The leading 2 bytes correspond to the device address 0x00, and the final 2 bytes to the device address 0xFF. Specify the subindex to access this parameter.

(6) BootOperatFunctionalClass
Writing 1 to this parameter in a device and restarting the device causes the device to start as a basic device. On the contrary, writing 2 to this parameter and restarting the device causes the device to start as an LM.

(7) CurrentLinkSettingRecord and ConfiguredLinkSettingsRecord

CurrentLinkSettingRecord indicates the

bus parameter settings currently used.

ConfiguredLinkSettingsRecord indicates the

bus parameter settings to be used when the

device becomes the LAS. Thus, when a device

is the LAS, its CurrentLinkSettingRecord and

ConfiguredLinkSettingsRecord have the same

values.

Subindex

Element

Size Descrip[bytes] tion

1 SlotTime

2 V(ST)

2 PerDlpduPhlOverhead

1 V(PhLO)

3 MaxResponseDelay

1 V(MRD)

4 FirstUnpolledNodeId

1 V(FUN)

5 ThisLink

2 V(TL)

6 MinInterPduDelay

1 V(MID)

7 NumConsecUnpolledNodeId

1 V(NUN)

8 PreambleExtension

1 V(PhPE)

9 PostTransGapExtension

1 V(PhGE)

10 MaxInterChanSignalSkew

1 V(PhIS)

11 TimeSyncClass

1 V(TSC)

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 7. LINK MASTER FUNCTIONS>

A7-7

(8) DlmeBasicInfo

Subindex

Element

Size [bytes]

Description

1 SlotTime

2 Indicates the capability value for V(ST) of the device.

2 PerDlpduPhlOverhead

1 V(PhLO)

3 MaxResponseDelay

1 Indicates the capability value for V(MRD) of the device.

4 ThisNode

1 V(TN), node address

5 ThisLink

2 V(TL), link-id

6 MinInterPduDelay

1 Indicates the capability value for V(MID) of the device.

7 TimeSyncClass

1 Indicates the capability value for V(TSC) of the device.

8 PreambleExtension

1 V(PhPE)

9 PostTransGapExtension 1 V(PhGE)

10 MaxInterChanSignalSkew 1 V(PhIS)

(9) PlmeBasicCharacteristics

Subindex

Element

Size [bytes]

Value

Description

1 Channel 1 0 Statistics Supported

Statistics data are not supported.

2 Medium 8 0x49 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Wire medium,

AndData

voltage mode,

Rates

and 31.25 kbps

Supported

are supported.

3 IceVersion 2 0x0403

IEC 4.3 is supported.

4 NumOf

1 1

Channels

5 Power Mode

1 0

0: Bus-powered; 1: Self-powered

(10) ChannelStates

Subindex

Element

Size [bytes]

Value

Description

1 Channel 1 1 0x00 In Use, No Bad since last read, No Silent since last read, No Jabber since last read, Tx Good, Rx Good

2 Channel 2 1 0x80 Unused

3 Channel 3 1 0x80 Unused

4 Channel 4 1 0x80 Unused

5 Channel 5 1 0x80 Unused

6 Channel 6 1 0x80 Unused

7 Channel 7 1 0x80 Unused

8 Channel 8 1 0x80 Unused

(11) PlmeBasicInfo

Subindex

Element

Size [bytes]

Value

Description

1 InterfaceMode

1 0

0: Half duplex; 1: Full duplex

2 LoopBackMode

1 0

0: Disabled; 1: MAU; 2: MDS

3 XmitEnabled

1 0x01 Channel 1 is enabled.

4 RcvEnebled

1 0x01 Channel 1 is enabled.

5 PreferredReceive 1 0x01 Channel 1 is used for

Channel

reception.

6 MediaType Selected

1 0x49 Wire medium, voltage mode, and 31.25 kbps are selected.

7 ReceiveSelect

1 0x01 Channel 1 is used for reception.

(12) LinkScheduleActivationVariable
Writing the version number of an LAS schedule, which has already been downloaded to the domain, to this parameter causes the corresponding schedule to be executed. On the other hand, writing 0 to this parameter stops execution of the active schedule.

(13) LinkScheduleListCharacteristicsRecord

Subindex

Element

Size [bytes]

Description

1 NumOf Schedules

1 Indicates the total number of LAS schedules that have been downloaded to the domain.

2 NumOfSub SchedulesPer Schedule

1 Indicates the maximum number of sub-schedules an LAS schedule can contain. (This is fixed to 1 in the Yokogawa communication stacks.)

3 ActiveSchedule 2 Indicates the version number

Version

of the schedule currently

executed.

4 ActiveSchedule 2 Indicates the index number

OdIndex

of the domain that stores the

schedule currently executed.

5 ActiveSchedule 6 Indicates the time when the

StaringTime

current schedule began being

executed.

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 7. LINK MASTER FUNCTIONS>

A7-8

(14) DlmeScheduleDescriptor

This parameter exists for the same number as the

total number of domains, and each describes the

LAS schedule downloaded to the corresponding

domain. For the domain to which a schedule

has not yet been downloaded, the values in this

parameter are all zeros.

Subindex

Element

Size [bytes]

Description

1 Version

2 Indicates the version number of the LAS schedule downloaded to the corresponding domain.

2 Macrocycle Duration

4 Indicates the macro cycle of the LAS schedule downloaded to the corresponding domain.

3 TimeResolution 2 Indicates the time resolution that is required to execute the LAS schedule downloaded to the corresponding domain.

(15) Domain
Read/write: impossible; get-OD: possible Carrying out the GenericDomainDownload command from a host writes an LAS schedule to the domain.

A7.6 Trouble Shooting
Q1. When the LAS stops, a digitalYEWFLO does not back it up by becoming the LAS. Why?
A1-1. Is that digitalYEWFLO running as an LM? Check that the value of BootOperatFunctionalClass (index 367) is 2 (indicating that it is an LM).
A1-2. Check the values of V(ST) and V(TN) in all LMs on the segment and confirm that the following condition is met:

digitalYEWFLO V(ST) × V(TN) <

Other LMs V(ST) × V(TN)

Q2. How can I make a digitalYEWFLO become the LAS?
A2-1. Check that the version numbers of the active schedules in the current LAS and the digitalYEWFLO are the same by reading: LinkScheduleListCharacteristicsRecord (index 374 for a digitalYEWFLO) - ActiveScheduleVersion (subindex 3)

A2-2. Make the digitalYEWFLO declare itself as and become the LAS by writing: · 0x00 (false) to PrimaryLinkMasterFlagVariable in the current LAS; and · 0xFF (true) to PrimaryLinkMasterFlagVariable (index 364) in the digitalYEWFLO.

Q3. On a segment where a digitalYEWFLO works as the LAS, another device cannot be connected. Why?
A3-1. Check the following bus parameters that indicate the bus parameter as being the LAS for the digitalYEWFLO and the capabilities of being the LAS for the device that cannot be connected: · V(ST), V(MID), and V(MRD) of digitalYEWFLO: ConfiguredLinkSettingsRecord (index 369) · V(ST), V(MID), and V(MRD) of problematic device: DlmeBasicInfo Then, confirm that the following conditions are met:

digitalYEWFLO

Problematic Device

V(ST)

>

V(ST)

V(MID)

>

V(MID)

V(MRD)

>

V(MRD)

A3-2. Check that the node address of the problematic device does not lie within either 0x00 to 0x10 or the range of unused (unpolled) node addresses determined by the digitalYEWFLO's LM parameter settings, which is 0x00 to 0x10 or V(FUN) to V(FUN) + V(NUM). (Read Section 5.2 "Network Definition.")

Q4. The LCD keeps showing "-- -- --". It is presumed that an LAS does not exist on the bus or the digitalYEWFLO cannot establish communication with the LAS. What should be done?
A4-1. Check that an LAS is connected on the bus. (When using the digitalYEWFLO as the LAS [which requires an option], perform steps (1) to (3) in APPENDIX 7.3 "Transfer of LAS.")

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 7. LINK MASTER FUNCTIONS>

A4-2. Make the parameters in the current LAS match the capabilities parameter in the digitalYEWFLO as follows (Read Section 5.2 "Network Definition"):

LAS V(ST) V(MID) V(MRD)

digitalYEWFLO

>

V(ST)  4

>

V(MID)  4

>

V(MRD)  12

A4-3. Check that the digitalYEWFLO is assigned an appropriate address. The address of the digitalYEWFLO must not lie within either 0x00 to 0x10 or the range of unused (unpolled) node addresses determined by the current LAS's LM parameter settings, which is V(FUN) to V(FUN) + V(NUM). (Read Section 5.2 "Network Definition.")

A7-9

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 8. PID BLOCK>

A8-1

APPENDIX 8. PID BLOCK

A PID block performs the PID control computation based on the deviation of the measured value (PV) from the setpoint (SV), and is generally used for constant-setpoint and cascaded-setpoint control.

A8.1 Function Diagram

The figure below depicts the function diagram of a PID block.

BKCAL_OUT RCAS_OUT

FF_VAL

BKCAL_IN ROUT_IN

ROUT_OUT

CAS_IN RCAS_IN

Setpoint

SP Bypass

Feed-forward

Output

OUT

PID Control

IN

Input Filter

PV Computation

Mode Control

Alarm Processing

Data Status Management
Output Tracking

TRK_IN_D TRK_VAL

FA0801.ai

A8.2 Functions of PID Block

The table below shows the functions provided in a PID block.

Function

Description

PID control computation Computes the control output in accordance with the PID control algorithm.

Control output

Converts the change in control output MV to the manipulated value MV that is to be actually output.

Switching of direction of control action

Switches over the direction of control action between direct and reverse, i.e., the direction of changes in the control output depending on the changes in the deviation.

Control action bypass

When the bypass is on, the value of the SP is scaled to the range of the OUT and output as the OUT.

Feed-forward

Adds the value of the FF_VAL (input to the PID block) to the output from the PID computation.

Measured-value tracking Equalizes the setpoint SP to the measured value PV.

Setpoint limiters

Limit the value of setpoint SP within the preset upper and lower levels as well as limit the rate of change when the PID block is in Auto mode.

External-output tracking Performs the scaling of the value of TRK_VAL to the range of the OUT and outputs it as the OUT.

Mode change

Changes the block mode between 8 modes: O/S, IMan, LO, Man, Auto, Cas, RCas, ROut.

Bumpless transfer

Prevents a sudden change in the control output OUT at changes in block mode and at switching of the connection from the control output OUT to the cascaded secondary function block.

Initialization and manual fallback

Changes the block mode to IMan and suspends the control action when the specified condition is met.

Manual fallback

Changes the block mode to Man and aborts the control action.

Auto fallback

Changes the block mode to Auto when it is Cas, and continues the control action with the setpoint set by the operator.

Mode shedding upon computer failure

Changes the block mode in accordance with the SHED_OPT setting upon a computer failure.

Alarm processing

Generates block alarms and process alarms, and performs event updates.

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 8. PID BLOCK>

A8-2

A8.3 Parameters of PID Block

NOTE: In the table below, the Write column shows the modes in which the respective parameters can be

written. A blank in the Write column indicates that the corresponding parameter can be written in all modes of

the PID block. A dash (­) indicates that the corresponding parameter cannot be written in any mode.

Index

Parameter Name

Default (factory setting)

Write

Valid Range

Description

0 Block Header

TAG: "PID" Block Tag = O/S

Same as that for an AI block.

1 ST_REV

­

Same as that for an AI block.

2 TAG_DESC

(blank)

Same as that for an AI block.

3 STRATEGY

0

Same as that for an AI block.

4 ALERT_KEY

1

1 to 255

Same as that for an AI block.

5 MODE_BLK

6 BLOCK_ERR

­

Same as that for an AI block.

7 PV

­

Measured value; the non-dimensional value that is

converted from the input (IN) value based on the PV_

SCALE values and filtered.

8 SP

0

AUTO PV_SCALE ±10% Setpoint

9 OUT

MAN

Output

10 PV_SCALE

100

O/S

0

1342 (%)

1

Upper and lower scale limit values used for scaling of the input (IN) value.

11 OUT_SCALE

100

O/S

0

1342 (%)

1

Upper and lower scale limit values used for scaling of the control output (OUT) value to the values in the engineering unit.

12 GRANT_DENY

0

AUTO

Same as that for an AI block.

13 CONTROL_OPTS

0

O/S

Setting for control action. Read APPENDIX 8.13 "Measuredvalue Tracking" for details.

14 STATUS_OPTS

0

O/S

Read APPENDIX 8.15 "Manual Fallback" for details.

15 IN

0

Controlled-value input

16 PV_FTIME

0sec

AUTO Non-negative

Time constant (in seconds) of the first-order lag filter applied to IN

17 BYPASS

1 (off)

MAN 1, 2

Whether to bypass the control computation. 1 (off): Do not bypass. 2 (on): Bypass.

18 CAS_IN

0

Cascade setpoint

19 SP_RATE_DN

1.#INF

Positive

Rate-of-decrease limit for setpoint (SP)

20 SP_RATE_UP

1.#INF

Positive

Rate-of-increase limit for setpoint (SP)

21 SP_HI_LIM

100

PV_SCALE ±10% Upper limit for setpoint (SP)

22 SP_LO_LIM

0

PV_SCALE ±10% Lower limit for setpoint (SP)

23 GAIN

1

Proportional gain (= 100 / proportional band)

24 RESET

10

Integration time (seconds)

25 BAL_TIME

0

Positive

Unused

26 RATE

0

Positive

Derivative time (seconds)

27 BKCAL_IN

0

Read-back of control output

28 OUT_HI_LIM

100

OUT_SCALE ±10% Upper limit for control output (OUT)

29 OUT_LO_LIM

0

OUT_SCALE ±10% Lower limit for control output (OUT)

30 BKCAL_HYS

0.5 (%)

0 to 50%

Hysteresis for release from a limit for OUT.status

31 BKCAL_OUT

0

­

Read-back value to be sent to the BKCAL_IN in the upper block

32 RCAS_IN

0

Remote setpoint set from a computer, etc.

33 ROUT_IN

0

Remote control output value set from a computer, etc.

34 SHED_OPT

0

Action to be performed in the event of mode shedding. SHED_OPT defines the changes to be made to MODE. BLK.target and MODE.BLK.actual when the value of RCAS_IN.status or ROUT_IN.status becomes Bad if MODE_BLK.actual = RCas or ROut. Read APPENDIX 8.17 "Mode Shedding upon Computer Failure."

35 RCAS_OUT

0

­

Remote setpoint sent to a computer, etc.

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 8. PID BLOCK>

A8-3

Index Parameter Name 36 ROUT_OUT 37 TRK_SCALE
38 TRK_IN_D

Default (factory setting)
0
100 0
1342 (%) 1
0

Write
­ MAN

39 TRK_VAL

0

40 FF_VAL

0

Valid Range

41 FF_SCALE
42 FF_GAIN 43 UPDATE_EVT 44 BLOCK_ALM 45 ALARM_SUM 46 ACK_OPTION 47 ALARM_HYS
48 HI_HI_PRI 49 HI_HI_LIM 50 HI_PRI 51 HI_LIM 52 LO_PRI 53 LO_LIM 54 LO_LO_PRI 55 LO_LO_LIM 56 DV_HI_PRI 57 DV_HI_LIM 58 DV_LO_PRI 59 DV_LO_LIM 60 HI_HI_ALM

100 0
1342 (%) 1 0
Enable 0
0.5%

MAN
MAN ­ ­
0 to 50%

0 1.#INF
0 1.#INF
0 -1.#INF
0 -1.#INF
0 1.#INF
0 -1.#INF
­

0 to 15 PV_SCALE 0 to 15 PV_SCALE 0 to 15 PV_SCALE 0 to 15 PV_SCALE 0 to 15
0 to 15
­

61 HI_ALM 62 LO_ALM
63 LO_LO_ALM 64 DV_HI_ALM
65 DV_LO_ALM

­

­

­

­

­

­

­

­

­

­

Description
Remote control output value Upper and lower scale limits used to convert the output tracking value (TRK_VAL) to non-dimensional.
Switch for output tracking. Read APPENDIX 8.12 "Externaloutput Tracking" for details. Output tracking value (TRK_VAL) When MODE_BLK.actual = LO, the value scaled from the TRK_VAL value is set in OUT. Feedforward input value. The FF_VAL value is scaled to a value with the same scale as for OUT, multiplied by the FF_GAIN value, and then added to the output of the PID computation. Scale limits used for converting the FF_VAL value to a nondimensional value.
Gain for FF_VAL Same as that for an AI block. Same as that for an AI block. Same as that for an AI block. Same as that for an AI block. Hysteresis for alarm detection and resetting to prevent each alarm from occurring and recovering repeatedly within a short time. Priority order of HI_HI_ALM alarm Setting for HI_HI_ALM alarm Priority order of HI_ALM alarm Setting for HI_ALM alarm Priority order of LO_ALM alarm Setting for LO_ALM alarm Priority order of LO_LO_ALM alarm Setting for LO_LO_ALM alarm Priority order of DV_HI_ALM alarm Setting for DV_HI_ALM alarm Priority order of DV_LO_ALM alarm Setting for DV_LO_ALM alarm Alarm that is generated when the PV value has exceeded the HI_HI_LIM value and whose priority order* is defined in HI_HI_PRI. * Priority order: Only one alarm is generated at a time. When two or more alarms occur at the same time, the alarm having the highest priority order is generated. When the PV value has decreased below [HI_HI_LIM ­ ALM_HYS], HI_HI_ALM is reset. As above As above Reset when the PV value has increased above [LO_LIM + ALM_HYS]. As above Alarm that is generated when the value of [PV - SP] has exceeded the DV_HI_LIM value. Other features are the same as HI_HI_ALM. Alarm that is generated when the value of [PV - SP] has decreased below the DV_LO_LIM value. Other features are the same as LO_LO_ALM.

IM 01F06F00-01EN

A8.4 PID Computation Details

For PID control, the PID block in a digitalYEWFLO employs the PV-proportional and -derivative type PID control algorithm (referred to as the I-PD control algorithm), or the PV-derivative type PID control algorithm (referred to as the PI-D control algorithm) depending on the mode, as described below.

· PV-proportional and -derivative Type PID (IPD) Control Algorithm versus PV-derivative Type PID (PI-D) Control Algorithm

The I-PD control algorithm, which is expressed by the equation below, ensures control stability against sudden changes in the setpoint, such as when the user enters a new setpoint value. The I-PD algorithm also ensures excellent controllability by performing proportional, integral, and derivative control actions in response to changes of characteristics in the controlled process, changes in load, and occurrences of disturbances. When the PID block is in Auto or RCas mode, this I-PD algorithm is used for control. In Cas mode, however, the PV-derivative type PID (PI-D) algorithm takes over since the response to setpoint changes is more important. The control algorithm in use thus switches over automatically in line with the mode transitions. The following shows the basic computation formulas of these algorithms.

PV-proportional and -derivative (I-PD) control algorithm:

MVn = K PVn +

T Ti

(PVn ­ SPn) +

Td T

(PVn)

FA0802.ai

PV-derivative (PI-D) control algorithm:

MVn = K (PVn ­ SPn) +

T Ti

(PVn ­ SPn) +

Td T

(PVn)

FA0803.ai

Where,

MVn = change in control output

PVn =change in measured (controlled)

value = PVn - PVn-1

T =control period = period_of_execution

in Block Header

K

=proportional gain = GAIN (= 100/

proportional band)

TI = integral time = RESET

TD = derivative time = RATE

<APPENDIX 8. PID BLOCK>

A8-4

The subscripts, n and n-1, represent the time of sampling such that PVn and PVn-1 denote the PV value sampled most recently and the PV value sampled at the preceding control period, respectively.

· PID Control Parameters

The table below shows the PID control parameters.

Parameter

Description

Valid Range

GAIN

Proportional gain 0.05 to 20

RESET

Integral time

0.1 to 10,000 (seconds)

RATE

Derivative time

0 to infinity (seconds)

A8.5 Control Output
The final control output value, MV, is computed based on the change in control output MVn, which is calculated at each control period in accordance with the aforementioned algorithm. The PID block in a digitalYEWFLO performs the velocity type output action for the control output.
· Velocity Type Output Action
The PID block determines the control output (OUT) value by adding the change in control output calculated in the current control period, MVn, to the value read back from the output destination, BKCAL_IN. This velocity type output action can be expressed as:
OUT = BKCAL_IN ­ MVn' where MVn' is MVn scaled based on PV_SCALE and OUT_SCALE. Note: MV indicates the PID computation result.

A8.6 Direction of Control Action

The direction of the control action is determined by

the Direct Acting setting in CONTROL_OPTS.

Value of Direct Acting

Resulting Action

True

The output increases when the input PV is greater than the setpoint SP.

False

The output decreases when the input PV is greater than the setpoint SP.

IM 01F06F00-01EN

A8.7 Control Action Bypass
The PID control computation can be bypassed so as to set the SP value in the control output OUT as shown below. Setting BYPASS to "On" bypasses the PID control computation.
BYPASS
Output OUT

CAS_IN RCAS_IN
SP
IN

Setpoint Filter

Control PV

Feedforward

FA0804.ai

A8.8 Feed-forward
Feed-forward is an action to add a compensation input signal FF_VAL to the output of the PID control computation, and is typically used for feed-forward control. The following figure illustrates the action.
FF_VAL

FF_SCALE OUT_SCALE

PV

PID computation

FF_GAIN OUT
FA0805.ai

<APPENDIX 8. PID BLOCK>

A8-5

A8.9 Block Modes

The block mode is set in the parameter MODE_

BLK.

MODE_ Target BLK

Stipulates the target mode to which the PID block transfers.

Actual

Indicates the current mode of the PID block.

Permitted

Stipulates all the modes that the PID block can enter. The PID block is prohibited to enter any mode other than those set in this element.

Normal Stipulates the mode in which the PID block normally resides.

There are eight modes for a PID block as shown below.

Block Mode

Description

ROut Remote output mode, in which the PID block outputs the value set in ROUT_IN.

RCas

Remote cascade mode, in which the PID block carries out the PID control computation based on the setpoint (SP) set via the remote cascade connection, such as from a computer, and outputs the computed result.

Cas Cascade mode, in which the PID block carries out the PID control computation based on the setpoint (SP) set from another fieldbus function block, and outputs the computed result.

Auto The PID block carries out automatic control and outputs the result computed by the PID control computation.

Man Manual mode, in which the PID block outputs the value set by the user manually.

LO The PID block outputs the value set in TRK_VAL.

IMan

Initialization and manual mode, in which the control action is suspended. The PID block enters this mode when the specified condition is met (Read APPENDIX 8.14 "Initialization and Manual Fallback (IMAN)").

O/S Out of service mode, in which neither the control computation nor action is carried out, and the output is kept at the value that was output before the PID block entered into O/S mode.

IM 01F06F00-01EN

Mode Transitions

Transition Destination
Mode

Condition

1 O/S

If O/S is set in MODE_ BLK. target (or if O/S is set in target inside the resource block)

NOT Conditions

2 IMan

If the specified condition is met (read APPENDIX 8.14 "Initialization and Manual Fallback (IMAN).")

NOT if condition 1 is
met

3 LO

If Track Enable is specified in NOT if either CONTROL_OPTS and the or both of value of TRK_IN_D is true conditions 1
and 2 are met

4 Man

If Man is set in MODE_ BLK. NOT if any

target or if IN.status (input one or more of

status) is Bad

conditions 1 to

3 are met

5 Auto*

If Auto is set in MODE_ BLK. NOT if any

target

one or more of

- AND -

conditions 1 to

if IN.status (input status) is 3 are met

not Bad

6 Cas*, **

If Cas is set in MODE_ BLK. target - AND if neither IN.status (input status) nor CAS_IN.status is Bad.

NOT if any one or more of
conditions 1 to
3 are met

7 RCas*, **

If RCas is set in MODE_ BLK.target - AND if neither IN.status (input status) nor RCAS_IN.status is Bad.

NOT if any one or more of
conditions 1 to
3 are met.

8 ROut*, **

If ROut is set in MODE_ BLK. NOT if any

target

one or more of

- AND -

conditions 1 to

if ROUT_IN.status (input 3 are met.

status) is not Bad

9 In accordance If RCAS_IN.status or

with the

ROUT_ IN.status is Bad

SHED_OPT (indicating a computer failure;

setting

Read APPENDIX 8.17 "Mode

Shedding upon Computer

Failure" for details)

* To activate mode transitions to AUTO, CAS, RCAS, and ROUT, the respective target modes must be set beforehand to MODE_BLK.permitted.
** A transition to CAS, RCAS, or ROUT requires that initialization of the cascade connection has been completed.

<APPENDIX 8. PID BLOCK>

A8-6

A8.10 Bumpless Transfer
Prevents a sudden change in the control output OUT at changes in block mode (MODE_BLK) and at switching of the connection from the control output OUT to the cascaded secondary function block. The action to perform a bump less transfer differs depending on the MODE_BLK values.

A8.11 Setpoint Limiters
Active setpoint limiters that limit the changes in the SP value, differ depending on the block mode as follows.
A8.11.1 When PID Block is in AUTO Mode
When the value of MODE_BLK is AUTO, the four types of limiters are in force: high limit, low limit, rate-of-increase limit, and rate-of-decrease limit.
· Setpoint High/Low Limits
· A value larger than the value of SP_HI_LIM cannot be set for SP.
· A value smaller than the value of SP_LO_LIM cannot be set for SP.
· Setpoint Rate Limits
The setpoint rate limits are used to restrict the magnitude of changes in the SP value so as to change the SP value gradually towards a new setpoint.
· An increase of the SP value at each execution period (period of execution in the Block Header) is limited to the value of SP_RATE_UP.
· A decrease of the SP value at each execution period (period of execution in the Block Header) is limited to the value of SP_RATE_DOWN.
A8.11.2 When PID Block is in CAS or RCAS Mode
By selecting Obey SP Limits if Cas or RCas in CONTROL_OPTS (Read APPENDIX 8.13 "Measured-value Tracking"), the setpoint high/low limits can be put into force also when the value of MODE_BLK is CAS or RCAS.

IM 01F06F00-01EN

A8.12 External-output Tracking
External tracking is an action of outputting the value of the remote output TRK_VAL set from outside the PID block, as illustrated in the figure below. External tracking is performed when the block mode is LO.
TRK_VAL

TRK_SCALE OUT_SCALE

PID control computation result

TRK_IN_D OUT

LO mode
FA0806.EPS
To change the block mode to LO: (1) Select Track Enable in CONTROL_OPTS. (2) Set TRK_IN_D to true.

However, to change the block mode from MAN to LO, Track in Manual must also be specified in CONTROL_OPTS.

A8.13 Measured-value Tracking
Measured-value tracking, also referred to as SP-PV tracking, is an action to equalize the setpoint SP to the measured value PV when the block mode (MODE_BLK.actual) is MAN in order to prevent a sudden change in control output from being caused by a mode change to AUTO. While a cascade primary control block is performing the automatic or cascade control (in the AUTO or CAS mode), when the mode of its secondary control block is changed from CAS to AUTO, the cascade connection is opened and the control action of the primary block stops. The SP of the primary controller can be equalized to its cascade input signal CAS_IN also in this case. The settings for measured-value tracking are made in the parameter CONTROL_OPTS, as shown in the table below.

<APPENDIX 8. PID BLOCK>

A8-7

· CONTROL_OPTS

Options in CONTROL_OPTS

Description

Bypass Enable This parameter allows BYPASS to be set.

SP-PV Track in Equalizes SP to PV when MODE_BLK.

Man

target is set to Man.

SP-PV Track in Equalizes SP to PV when MODE_BLK.

ROut

target is set to ROut.

SP-PV Track in Equalizes SP to PV when actual is set to LO

LO or IMan

or IMAN.

SP-PV Track retained Target

Equalizes SP to RCAS_IN when MODE_ BLK.target is set to RCas, and to CAS_IN when MODE_BLK.target is set to Cas when the actual mode of the block is IMan, LO,
Man or ROut.

Direct Acting Set the PID block to a direct acting controller.

Track Enable

This enables the external tracking function. The value in TRK_VAL will replace the value of OUT if TRK_IN_D becomes true and the target mode is not Man.

Track in Manual

This enables TRK_VAL to replace the value of OUT when the target mode is Man and TRK_IN_D is true. The actual mode will then be LO.

Use PV for BKCAL_OUT

Sets the value of PV in BKCAL_OUT and RCAS_OUT, instead of the value of SP.

Obey SP limits if Puts the setpoint high/low limits in force in Cas or RCas the Cas or RCas mode.

No OUT limits in Disables the high/low limits for OUT in the

Manual

Man mode.

A8.14 Initialization and Manual Fallback (IMAN)
Initialization and manual fallback denotes a set of actions in which a PID block changes mode to IMAN (initialization and manual) and suspends the control action. Initialization and manual fallback takes place automatically as a means of abnormality handling when the following condition is met:
· The quality component of BKCAL_IN.status is Bad.
- OR · The quality component of BKCAL_IN.status is Good (c) - AND The sub-status component of BKCAL_IN.status is FSA, LO, NI, or IR.
The user cannot manually change the mode to IMAN. A mode transition to IMAN occurs only when the condition above is met.

IM 01F06F00-01EN

A8.15 Manual Fallback
Manual fallback denotes an action in which a PID block changes mode to MAN (manual) and suspends the control action. Manual fallback takes place automatically as a means of abnormality handling when the following condition is met:
· IN.status is Bad except when the control action bypass is on.

To enable the manual fallback action to take place when the above condition is met, Target to Manual if Bad IN must be specified beforehand in STATUS_ OPTS. The table below shows the options in STATUS_ OPTS.

· STATUS_OPTS

Options in STATUS_OPTS IFS if Bad IN
IFS if Bad CAS IN
Use Uncertain as Good

Description
Sets the sub-status component of OUT. status to IFS if IN.status is Bad except when PID control bypass is on.
Sets the sub-status component of OUT. status to IFS if CAS_IN.status is Bad.
Does not regard IN as being in Bad status when IN.status is Uncertain (to prevent mode transitions from being affected when it is Uncertain).

Target to Manual if Automatically changes the value of

Bad IN

MODE_BLK.target to MAN when IN falls

into Bad status.

Target to next permitted mode if Bad CAS IN

Automatically changes the value of
MODE_BLK.target to Auto (or to Man if Auto is not set in Permitted) when CAS_IN falls into Bad status.

<APPENDIX 8. PID BLOCK>

A8-8

A8.16 Auto Fallback
Auto fallback denotes an action in which a PID block changes mode from CAS (cascade) to AUTO (automatic) and continues automatic PID control with the user-set setpoint. Auto fallback takes place automatically when the following condition is met:
· IN.status (data status of IN) is Bad except when the control action bypass is on.

To enable the manual fallback action to take place when the above condition is met:
· Target to next permitted mode if Bad CAS IN must be previously specified in STATUS_ OPTS.

- AND · AUTO must be previously set in MODE_BLK.
permitted.

A8.17 Mode Shedding upon Computer Failure
When the data status of RCAS_IN or ROUT_IN, which is the setting received from a computer as the setpoint SP, falls to Bad while the PID block is running in the RCAS (remote cascade) or ROUT (remote output) mode, the mode shedding occurs in accordance with the settings in SHED_OPT.
· SHED_OPT
The SHED_OPT setting stipulates the specifications of mode shedding as shown below. Only one can be set.

IM 01F06F00-01EN

Available Setting for SHED_OPT Normal shed, normal return Normal shed, no return Shed to Auto, normal return Shed to Auto, no return Shed to Manual, normal return Shed to Manual, no return Shed to retained target, normal return
Shed to retained target, no return

Actions upon Computer Failure
Sets MODE_BLK.actual to Cas*, and leaves MODE_BLK.target unchanged.
Sets both MODE_BLK.actual and MODE_ BLK.target to Cas*.
Sets MODE_BLK.actual to Auto**, and leaves MODE_BLK.target unchanged.
Sets both MODE_BLK.actual and MODE_ BLK.target to Auto**.
Sets MODE_BLK.actual to Man, and leaves MODE_BLK.target unchanged.
Sets both MODE_BLK.actual and MODE_ BLK.target to Man.
If Cas is in MODE_BLK.target, sets MODE_BLK.actual to Cas*, and leaves MODE_BLK.target unchanged. If Cas is not set in MODE_BLK.target, sets MODE_BLK.actual to Auto**, and leaves MODE_BLK.target unchanged.
If Cas is set in MODE_BLK.target, sets both MODE_BLK.actual and MODE_BLK. target to Cas*. If Cas is not set in MODE_BLK.target, sets MODE_BLK.actual to Auto**, and MODE_ BLK.target to Cas.

* The modes to which a PID block can transfer are limited to those set in MODE_BLK. permitted, and the priority levels of modes are as shown below. In fact, if Normal shed, normal return is set for SHED_OPT, detection of a computer failure causes MODE_BLK.actual to change to CAS, AUTO, or MAN, whichever is set in MODE_BLK.permitted and has the lowest priority level.

MAN AUTO CAS RCAS ROUT

Higher priority level Lower priority level

FA0807.ai
** Only if Auto is included in MODE_BLK. permitted. If the block upstream of the PID block in question is a control block, mode transitions of the PID block to CAS occur in the following sequence due to initialization of the cascade connection: RCAS or ROUT  AUTO  CAS.

<APPENDIX 8. PID BLOCK>

A8-9

A8.18 Alarms

There are two kinds of alarms generated by a PID block: block and process alarms.

A8.18.1 Block Alarm (BLOCK_ALM)

The block alarm BLOCK_ALM is generated upon

occurrence of either of the following errors (values

set in BLOCK_ERR) and notifies the content of

BLOCK_ERR.

Value of BLOCK_ERR

Condition

Input Failure

IN.status of the PID block is either of the following:
· Bad-Device Failure
· Bad-Sensor Failure

Out of Service MODE_BLK.target of the PID block is O/S.

A8.18.2 Process Alarms

There are six types of process alarms. Only one

process alarm can be generated at the same time,

and the process alarm having the highest priority

level from among those occurring at the same

time is generated. The priority level is set for each

process alarm type.

Process Alarm

Cause of Occurrence

Parameter Containing Priority Level
Setting

HI_HI_ALM Occurs when the PV increases HI_HI_PRI above the HI_HI_LIM value.

HI_ALM

Occurs when the PV increases HI_PRI above HI_LIM value.

LO_ALM

Occurs when the PV decreases LO_PRI below the LO_LIM value.

LO_LO_ALM Occurs when the PV decreases LO_LO_LIM below the LO_LO_LIM value.

DV_HI_ALM Occurs when the value of [PV - DV_HI_PRI SP] increases above the DV_HI_ LIM value.

DV_LO_ALM Occurs when the value of [PV DV_LO_PRI - SP] decreases below the DV_ LO_LIM value.

IM 01F06F00-01EN

A8.19 Example of Block Connections

AI OUT

IN PID BKCAL_IN OUT

CAS_IN

AO

BKCAL_OUT

FA0808.ai

When configuring a simple PID control loop by combining a digitalYEWFLO with a fieldbus valve positioner that contains an AO block, follow the procedure below to make the settings of the corresponding fieldbus function blocks: 1. Connect the AI block and PID block of the
digitalYEWFLO, and the AO block of the valve positioner as shown above. 2. Set MODE_BLK.target of the PID block to O/S, and then set GAIN, RESET, and RATE to appropriate values. 3. Check that the value of MODE_BLK.actual of the AI block is AUTO. 4. Set MODE_BLK.target of the AO block to CAS|AUTO (meaning "CAS and AUTO"). 5. Check that the value of BKCAL_IN.status of the PID block is not Bad. 6. Check that the value of IN.status of the PID block is not Bad. 7. Check that AUTO is set in MODE_BLK. permitted of the PID block. 8. Set MODE_BLK.target of the PID block to AUTO.

When finishing all steps in order, the PID block and AO block exchange the respective information and initialize the cascade connection. Consequently, the value of MODE_BLK.actual of the PID block changes to AUTO and automatic PID control starts.

<APPENDIX 8. PID BLOCK>

A8-10

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 9. DD MENU>
APPENDIX 9. DD MENU

(1) Resource Block

Menus

Block Info

| Block Tag

| Tag Description

| Strategy

| Alert Key

Block Mode

| Target

| Actual

| Permitted

| Normal

Configuration

| Block Mode

| | Target

| | Actual

| | Permitted

| | Normal

| Confirm Time

| Write Lock

| Feature Info

| | Features

| | Feature Selection

| Cycle Info

| | Cycle Type

| | Cycle Selection

| | Minumum Cycle Time

| Notify Info

| | Max Notif

| Limit Notify

| Sheding

|

Shed Remote Cascade

|

Shed Remote Out

| SoftDL Protection

| SoftDL Format

Diagnostics/Alerts

| Block Error

| Resource State

| Fault State

| Set Fault State

| Clear Fault State

| Device Status

| | Device Status 1

| | Device Status 2

| | Device Status 3

| | Device Status 4

| | Device Status 5

| | Device Status 6

| | Device Status 7

| | Device Status 8

Note: Parameter name may differ according to a tool or host.

||

||

| Alert Parameters

|

Block Alarm

|

| Unacknowledged

|

| Alarm State

|

| Time Stamp

|

| Subcode

|

| Value

|

Alarm Sum

|

| Current

|

| Unacknowledged

|

| Unreported

|

| Disabled

|

Acknowledge Option

|

Write Priority

|

Write Alarm

|

| Unacknowledged

|

| Alarm State

|

| Time Stamp

|

| Subcode

|

| Discrete Value

|

Update Event

|

Unacknowledged

|

Update State

|

Time Stamp

|

Static Rev

| Others

Relative Index

| Restart

| Grant Deny

| | Grant

| | Deny

| Sim Enable Message

| Hardware Info

| | Hard Types

| | Memory Size

| | Nonvolatile Cycle Time

| | Free Space

| | Free Time

| Identification

| | Manufacturer Id

| | Device Type

| | Device Revision

| | DD Revision

| Other Info

| | ITK Version

| | Soft Revision

| | Soft Description

| SoftDL Count

| SoftDL Act Area

| SoftDL Module Revision

| SoftDL Error

Query Device

RS Standard parameters

Enhanced parameters

FA0901.ai

A9-1

IM 01F06F00-01EN

(2) Transducer Block

Transducer Block (Top menu)

Block Info

| Block Tag

| Tag Description

| Strategy

| Alert Key

| Transducer Directory

| Transducer Type

Block Mode

| Target

| Actual

| Permitted

| Normal

Dynamic Variables

| Primary Value

| | Value

| | Status

| Secondary Value

| | Status

| | Value

| | Secondary Value Unit

| Tertiary Value

| | Status

| | Value

| | Tertiary Value Unit

| Volumetric Flow

|

Status

|

Value

|

Volumetric Flow Unit

Configuration/Calibration

| Block Mode

| | Target

| | Actual

| | Permitted

| | Normal

| Setup Wizard

| General

| | Model

| | Sensor Info

| | | Sensor Type

| | | Sensor Status

| | | Sensor Serial Number

| | | Sensor Range

| | | | EU at 100

| | | | EU at 0

| | | | Units Index

| | | | Decimal

| | | Linearization Type

| | | Primary Value Type

| | Primary Value Range

| | | EU at 100

| | | EU at 0

| | | Units Index

| | | Decimal

| | Transducer Calibration Info

| | | Sensor Calibration Method

| | | Calibration Highest Point

| | | Calibration Lowest Point

| | | Calibration Minimum Span

| | | Calibration Unit

| | | Sensor Calibration Location

| | | Sensor Calibration Date

| | | Sensor Calibration Who

| Fluid Condition

| | Fluid Type

| | | Sensor Status

| | | Fluid Type

| | | Thermometer Function

| | Temperature Set

| | | Temparature Unit

| | | Process Temparature

| | | Base Temparature

| | Density Set

| | | Density Unit

| | | Process Density

| | | Base Density

| | Pressure Set

| | | Pressure Unit

| | | Process Pressure

| | | Base Pressure

| | Other Condition set

||

Primary Value Filter Time

||

Deviation

||

First Temperature Coef.

||

Second Temperature Coef.

||

Secondary Value Filter Time

||

Cable Length

Note: Parameter name may differ according to a tool or host.

<APPENDIX 9. DD MENU>

||

| Characterize Meter

| | Size Select

| | Body Type

| | Vortex Sensor Type

| | K-Factor Unit

| | K-Factor Value

| Display Set

| | Upper Display Mode

| | Lower Display Mode

| | Display Cycle

| Adjust

| | Reynolds Adjust

| | Viscosity Value

| | Flow Adjust

| | User Adjust

| | Gas Expansion Fact

| Maintenance

| | Low Cut Flow

| | Trigger Level

| | Noise Balance Mode

| | Noise Ratio

| | Noise Balance Wizard

| | Signal Level

| | Sensor Error Record

| | Flow Velocity

| | Span Velocity

| | Vortex Frequency

| | Span Frequency

| | Fluid Density

| Limit Switch 1 Set

| | Limit Switch 1 Value D

| | | Status

| | | Value

| | Limsw 1 Target

| | Limsw 1 Setpoint

| | Limsw 1 Act Direction

| | Limsw 1 Hysteresis

| | Limsw 1 Unit

| Limit Switch 2 Set

|

Limit Switch 2 Value D

|

| Status

|

| Value

|

Limsw 2 Target

|

Limsw 2 Setpoint

|

Limsw 2 Act Direction

|

Limsw 2 Hysteresis

|

Limsw 2 Unit

Diagnostics/Alerts

| Block Error

| Transducer Error

| Alarm Perform

| Block Alarm

| | Unacknowledged

| | Alarm State

| | Time Stamp

| | Subcode

| | Value

| Alarm Summary

| | Current

| | Unacknowledged

| | Unreported

| | Disabled

| Update Event

|

Unacknowledged

|

Update State

|

Time Stamp

|

Static Rev

|

Relative Index

Query Device

TB Profile Parameters

TB Original Parameters(part1)

TB Original Parameters(part2)

TB Original Parameters(part3)

TB Original Parameters(part4)

TB Service Parameters

FA0902.ai

A9-2

IM 01F06F00-01EN

(3) AI1 Function Block

Menus

Block Info

| Block Tag

| Tag Description

| Strategy

| Alert Key

Block Mode

| Target

| Actual

| Permitted

| Normal

Dynamic Variables

| Field Value

| | Status

| | Value

| Process Value

| | Status

| | Value

| Output

| | Status

| | Value

| Total

Configuration

| Block Mode

| | Target

| | Actual

| | Permitted

| | Normal

| Channel

| Transducer Scale

| | EU at 100%

| | EU at 0%

| | Units Index

| | Decimal

| Output Scale

| | EU at 100%

| | EU at 0%

| | Units Index

| | Decimal

| Process Value Filter Time

| Options

| | Linearization Type

| | Low Cutoff

| | I/O Options

| | Status Options

| Total Setup

|

Total Start

|

Total Rate Value

|

Total Reset

Note: Parameter name may differ according to a tool or host.

<APPENDIX 9. DD MENU>

A9-3

|

|

Diagnostics/Alerts

| Block Error

| Alert Parameters

|

Block Almarm

|

| Unacknowledged

|

| Alarm State

|

| Time Stamp

|

| Subcode

|

| Value

|

Alarm Summary

|

| Current

|

| Unacknowledged

|

| Unreported

|

| Disabled

|

Acknowledge Option

|

Alarm Hysteresis

|

High High Alarm Set

|

| High High Priority

|

| High High Limit

|

| High High Alarm

|

| | Unacknowledged

|

| | Alarm State

|

| | Time Stamp

|

| | Subcode

|

| | Float Value

|

High Alarm Set

|

| High Priority

|

| High Limit

|

| High Alarm

|

| | Unacknowledged

|

| | Alarm State

|

| | Time Stamp

|

| | Subcode

|

| | Float Value

|

Low Alarm Set

|

| Low Priority

|

| Low Limit

|

| Low Alarm

|

| | Unacknowledged

|

| | Alarm State

|

| | Time Stamp

|

| | Subcode

|

| | Float Value

|

Low Low Alarm Set

|

| Low Low Priority

|

| Low Low Limit

|

| Low Low Alarm

|

| | Unacknowledged

|

| | Alarm State

|

| | Time Stamp

|

| | Subcode

|

| | Float Value

|

Update Event

|

Unacknowledged

|

Update State

|

Time Stamp

|

Static Rev

|

Index

Others

| Simulation Enable

| Simulation Disable

| Grant Deny

|

Grant

|

Deny

Query Device

AI Standard parameters

FA0903.ai

IM 01F06F00-01EN

(4) AI2 Function Block

Menus

Block Info

| Block Tag

| Tag Description

| Strategy

| Alert Key

Block Mode

| Target

| Actual

| Permitted

| Normal

Dynamic Variables

| Field Value

| | Status

| | Value

| Process Value

| | Status

| | Value

| Output

|

Status

|

Value

Configuration

| Block Mode

| | Target

| | Actual

| | Permitted

| | Normal

| Channel

| Transducer Scale

| | EU at 100%

| | EU at 0%

| | Units Index

| | Decimal

| Output Scale

| | EU at 100%

| | EU at 0%

| | Units Index

| | Decimal

| Process Value Filter Time

| Options

|

Linearization Type

|

Low Cutoff

|

I/O Options

|

Status Options

Note: Parameter name may differ according to a tool or host.

<APPENDIX 9. DD MENU>

|

|

Diagnostics/Alerts

| Block Error

| Alert Parameters

|

Block Almarm

|

| Unacknowledged

|

| Alarm State

|

| Time Stamp

|

| Subcode

|

| Value

|

Alarm Summary

|

| Current

|

| Unacknowledged

|

| Unreported

|

| Disabled

|

Acknowledge Option

|

Alarm Hysteresis

|

High High Alarm Set

|

| High High Priority

|

| High High Limit

|

| High High Alarm

|

| | Unacknowledged

|

| | Alarm State

|

| | Time Stamp

|

| | Subcode

|

| | Float Value

|

High Alarm Set

|

| High Priority

|

| High Limit

|

| High Alarm

|

| | Unacknowledged

|

| | Alarm State

|

| | Time Stamp

|

| | Subcode

|

| | Float Value

|

Low Alarm Set

|

| Low Priorit

|

| Low Limit

|

| Low Alarm

|

| | Unacknowledged

|

| | Alarm State

|

| | Time Stamp

|

| | Subcode

|

| | Float Value

|

Low Low Alarm Set

|

| Low Low Priorit

|

| Low Low Limit

|

| Low Low Alarm

|

| | Unacknowledged

|

| | Alarm State

|

| | Time Stamp

|

| | Subcode

|

| | Float Value

|

Update Event

|

Unacknowledged

|

Update State

|

Time Stamp

|

Static Rev

|

Index

Others

| Simulation Enable

| Simulation Disable

| Grant Deny

|

Grant

|

Deny

Query Device

AI Standard parameters

FA0904.ai

A9-4
IM 01F06F00-01EN

(5) AI3 Function Block

Menus

Block Info

| Block Tag

| Tag Description

| Strategy

| Alert Key

Block Mode

| Target

| Actual

| Permitted

| Normal

Dynamic Variables

| Field Value

| | Status

| | Value

| Process Value

| | Status

| | Value

| Output

|

Status

|

Value

Configuration

| Block Mode

| | Target

| | Actual

| | Permitted

| | Normal

| Channel

| Transducer Scale

| | EU at 100%

| | EU at 0%

| | Units Index

| | Decimal

| Output Scale

| | EU at 100%

| | EU at 0%

| | Units Index

| | Decimal

| Process Value Filter Time

| Options

|

Linearization Type

|

Low Cutoff

|

I/O Options

|

Status Options

Note: Parameter name may differ according to a tool or host.

<APPENDIX 9. DD MENU>

|

|

Diagnostics/Alerts

| Block Error

| Alert Parameters

|

Block Almarm

|

| Unacknowledged

|

| Alarm State

|

| Time Stamp

|

| Subcode

|

| Value

|

Alarm Summary

|

| Current

|

| Unacknowledged

|

| Unreported

|

| Disabled

|

Acknowledge Option

|

Alarm Hysteresis

|

High High Alarm Set

|

| High High Priority

|

| High High Limit

|

| High High Alarm

|

| | Unacknowledged

|

| | Alarm State

|

| | Time Stamp

|

| | Subcode

|

| | Float Value

|

High Alarm Set

|

| High Priority

|

| High Limit

|

| High Alarm

|

| | Unacknowledged

|

| | Alarm State

|

| | Time Stamp

|

| | Subcode

|

| | Float Value

|

Low Alarm Set

|

| Low Priorit

|

| Low Limit

|

| Low Alarm

|

| | Unacknowledged

|

| | Alarm State

|

| | Time Stamp

|

| | Subcode

|

| | Float Value

|

Low Low Alarm Set

|

| Low Low Priorit

|

| Low Low Limit

|

| Low Low Alarm

|

| | Unacknowledged

|

| | Alarm State

|

| | Time Stamp

|

| | Subcode

|

| | Float Value

|

Update Event

|

Unacknowledged

|

Update State

|

Time Stamp

|

Static Rev

|

Index

Others

| Simulation Enable

| Simulation Disable

| Grant Deny

|

Grant

|

Deny

Query Device

AI Standard parameters

FA0905.ai

A9-5

IM 01F06F00-01EN

(6) DI1 Function Block

Menus

Block Info

| Block Tag

| Tag Description

| Strategy

| Alert Key

Block Mode

| Target

| Actual

| Permitted

| Normal

Dynamic Variables

| Field Value Discrete

| | Status

| | Value

| Process Value Discrete

| | Status

| | Value

| Output Discrete

|

Status

|

Value

Configuration

| Block Mode

| | Target

| | Actual

| | Permitted

| | Normal

| Channel

| Process Value Filter Time

| I/O Options

| Status Options

Diagnostics/Alerts

| Block Error

| Alert Parameters

|

Block Almarm

|

| Unacknowledged

|

| Alarm State

|

| Time Stamp

|

| Subcode

|

| Value

|

Alarm Summary

|

| Current

|

| Unacknowledged

|

| Unreported

|

| Disabled

|

Acknowledge Option

|

Discrete Primary

|

Discrete Limit

|

Discrete Alarm

|

| Unacknowledged

|

| Alarm State

|

| Time Stamp

|

| Subcode

|

| Value

|

Update Event

|

Unacknowledged

|

Update State

|

Time Stamp

|

Static Rev

|

Index

Others

| Simulate Discrete

| Grant Deny

| | Grant

| | Deny

Query Device

Standard parameters

Note: Parameter name may differ according to a tool or host.

<APPENDIX 9. DD MENU>

(7) DI2 Function Block

Menus

Block Info

| Block Tag

| Tag Description

| Strategy

| Alert Key

Block Mode

| Target

| Actual

| Permitted

| Normal

Dynamic Variables

| Field Value Discrete

| | Status

| | Value

| Process Value Discrete

| | Status

| | Value

| Output Discrete

|

Status

|

Value

Configuration

| Block Mode

| | Target

| | Actual

| | Permitted

| | Normal

| Channel

| Process Value Filter Time

| I/O Options

| Status Options

Diagnostics/Alerts

| Block Error

| Alert Parameters

|

Block Almarm

|

| Unacknowledged

|

| Alarm State

|

| Time Stamp

|

| Subcode

|

| Value

|

Alarm Summary

|

| Current

|

| Unacknowledged

|

| Unreported

|

| Disabled

|

Acknowledge Option

|

Discrete Primary

|

Discrete Limit

|

Discrete Alarm

|

| Unacknowledged

|

| Alarm State

|

| Time Stamp

|

| Subcode

|

| Value

|

Update Event

|

Unacknowledged

|

Update State

|

Time Stamp

|

Static Rev

|

Index

Others

| Simulate Discrete

| Grant Deny

| | Grant

| | Deny

Query Device

Standard parameters

FA0906.ai

A9-6

IM 01F06F00-01EN

(8) IT Function Block

Menus

Block Info

| Block Tag

| Tag Description

| Strategy

| Alert Key

Block Mode

| Target

| Actual

| Permitted

| Normal

Dynamic Variables

| Input 1

| | Status

| | Value

| Input 2

| | Status

| | Value

| Output

| | Status

| | Value

| Reset/Reverse Inputs

| | Reset Input

| | | Status

| | | Value

| | Reset Confirm

| | | Status

| | | Value

| | Reverse Flow1

| | | Status

| | | Value

| | Reverse Flow2

||

Status

||

Value

| Trip Outputs

| | Output Trip

| | | Status

| | | Value

| | Output Pre-Trip

||

Status

||

Value

| Total/Snapshots

|

Snapshot of Total

|

Snapshot of Rejected Total

|

Snapshot of Setpoint

|

Accumulate Total

Configuration

| Block Mode

| | Target

| | Actual

| | Permitted

| | Normal

| Operator Command Integration

| Basic Settings

| | Integration Type

| | Total Setpoint

| | Pre Trip

| | Clock Period

| Unit/Conversions

| | Time Unit1

| | Time Unit2

| | Unit Conversion

| | Pulse Val1

| | Pulse Val2

| Scaling/Limits

| | Good Limit

| | Uncertain Limit

| | Outage Limit

| | Output Range

||

EU at 100%

||

EU at 0%

||

Units Index

||

Decimal

| Options

|

Integration Options

|

Status Options

Note: Parameter name may differ according to a tool or host.

<APPENDIX 9. DD MENU>

|

| Diagnostics/Alerts

| Block Error

| Number of Reset

| Rejected Total

| Percentage Included

| Alert Parameters

|

Block Alarm

|

| Unacknowledged

|

| State

|

| Time Stamp

|

| Subcode

|

| Value

|

Update Event

|

Unacknowledged

|

Update State

|

Time Stamp

|

Static Rev

|

Relative Index

Others

| Grant Deny

|

Grant

|

Deny

Query Device

IT Standard parameters

FA0907.ai

A9-7

IM 01F06F00-01EN

(9) AR Function Block

Menus

Block Info

| Block Tag

| Tag Description

| Strategy

| Alert Key

Block Mode

| Target

| Actual

| Permitted

| Normal

Dynamic Variables

| Inputs

| | Input

| | | Status

| | | Value

| | Input Low

| | | Status

| | | Value

| | Input 1

| | | Status

| | | Value

| | Input 2

| | | Status

| | | Value

| | Input 3

||

Status

||

Value

| Output

| | Status

| | Value

| Process Value

| | Status

| | Value

| Pre Output

| | Status

| | Value

| Density Factor

|

Status

|

Value

|

Density Factor Unit

Configuration

| Block Mode

| | Target

| | Actual

| | Permitted

| | Normal

| Input Parameters

| | Range Extension

| | | Range High

| | | Range Low

| | Bias/Gain

| | | Bias Input 1

| | | Gain Input 1

| | | Bias Input 2

| | | Gain Input 2

| | | Bias Input 3

| | | Gain Input 3

| | Input Options

| | Process Value Scale

||

EU at 100%

||

EU at 0%

||

Units Index

||

Decimal

| Algorithm Parameters

| | Arithmetic Type

| | Compensation High Limit

| | Compensation Low Limit

| Output Parameters

| | Balance Time

| | Bias

| | Gain

| | Output High Limit

| | Output Low Limit

| | Output Range

||

EU at 100%

||

EU at 0%

||

Units Index

||

Decimal

Note: Parameter name may differ according to a tool or host.

<APPENDIX 9. DD MENU>

||

||

| Density Factor Parameters

|

Density Factor Setup Wizard

|

Volumetric Flow Unit

|

Temperature Set

|

Temperature Unit

|

Base Temperature

|

Pressure Set

|

Pressure Unit

|

Base Pressure Abs.

|

Density Set

|

Density Unit

|

Base Density

|

Other Value Set

|

Deviation

|

First Temperature Coef.

|

Second Temperature Coef.

|

Flow Configuration Coef.

|

Maintenance Info

|

Configuration Soft Revision

|

Configuration Date

|

Configuration Who

|

Configuration Status

|

Configuration Memo 1

|

Configuration Memo 2

|

Configuration Memo 3

|

Configuration Setting Info

|

Diagnostics/Alerts

| Block Error

| Alert Parameters

|

Block Alarm

|

| Unacknowledged

|

| State

|

| Time Stamp

|

| Subcode

|

| Value

|

Update Event

|

Unacknowledged

|

Update State

|

Time Stamp

|

Static Rev

|

Relative Index

Others

| Grant Deny

|

Grant

|

Deny

Query Device

AR Standard parameters

AR Enhanced parameters

FA0908.ai

A9-8

IM 01F06F00-01EN

(10) PID Function Block

Menus

Block Info

| Block Tag

| Tag Description

| Strategy

| Alert Key

Block Mode

| Target

| Actual

| Permitted

| Normal

Dynamic Variables

| Cascade Input

| | Status

| | Value

| Setpoint

| | Status

| | Value

| Input

| | Status

| | Value

| Process Value

| | Status

| | Value

| Output

| | Status

| | Value

| Back Calculation Input

| | Status

| | Value

| Back Calculation Output

| | Status

| | Value

| Remote I/O

| | Remote Cascade Input

| | | Status

| | | Value

| | Remote Out Input

| | | Status

| | | Value

| | Remote Cascade Output

| | | Status

| | | Value

| | Remote Out Output

||

Status

||

Value

| Others

| | Feed Forward Value

| | | Status

| | | Value

| | Tracking Value

| | | Status

| | | Value

| | Tracking Input Discrete

||

Status

||

Value

Configuration

| Block Mode

| | Target

| | Actual

| | Permitted

| | Normal

| Scaling/Filter/Limits

| | Process Value Scale

| | | EU at 100%

| | | EU at 0%

| | | Units Index

| | | Decimal

| | Output Scale

| | | EU at 100%

| | | EU at 0%

| | | Units Index

| | | Decimal

| | Setpoint Rate Down

| | Setpoint Rate Up

| | Process Value Filter Time

| | Setpoint High Limit

| | Setpoint Low Limit

| | Output High Limit

| | Output Low Limit

| Control Parameters

| | Gain

| | Reset

| | Rate

| | Bypass

| | Balance Time

| Feed Forward Control

| | Feed Forward Scale

| | | EU at 100%

| | | EU at 0%

| | | Units Index

| | | Decimal

| | Feed Forward Gain

| Tracking

| | Tracking Scale

| | | EU at 100%

| | | EU at 0%

| | | Units Index

| | | Decimal

| Options

|

Control Options

|

Status Options

|

Shed Options

|

Back Calculation Hysteresis

Note: Parameter name may differ according to a tool or host.

<APPENDIX 9. DD MENU>

|

|

Diagnostics/Alerts

| Block Error

| Alert Parameters

|

Block Alarm

|

| Unacknowledged

|

| Alarm State

|

| Time Stamp

|

| Subcode

|

| Value

|

Alarm Summary

|

| Current

|

| Unacknowledged

|

| Unreported

|

| Disabled

|

Acknowledge Option

|

Alarm Hysteresis

|

High High Alarm Set

|

| High High Priority

|

| High High Limit

|

| High High Alarm

|

| | Unacknowledged

|

| | Alarm State

|

| | Time Stamp

|

| | Subcode

|

| | Value

|

High Alarm Set

|

| High Priority

|

| High Limit

|

| High Alarm

|

| | Unacknowledged

|

| | Alarm State

|

| | Time Stamp

|

| | Subcode

|

| | Value

|

Low Alarm Set

|

| Low Priority

|

| Low Limit

|

| Low Alarm

|

| | Unacknowledged

|

| | Alarm State

|

| | Time Stamp

|

| | Subcode

|

| | Value

|

Low Low Alarm Set

|

| Low Low Priority

|

| Low Low Limit

|

| Low Low Alarm

|

| | Unacknowledged

|

| | Alarm State

|

| | Time Stamp

|

| | Subcode

|

| | Value

|

Deviation High Alarm Set

|

| Deviation High Priority

|

| Deviation High Limit

|

| Deviation High Alarm

|

| | Unacknowledged

|

| | Alarm State

|

| | Time Stamp

|

| | Subcode

|

| | Value

|

Deviation Low Alarm Set

|

| Deviation Low Priority

|

| Deviation Low Limit

|

| Deviation Low Alarm

|

| | Unacknowledged

|

| | Alarm State

|

| | Time Stamp

|

| | Subcode

|

| | Value

|

Update Event

|

Unacknowledged

|

Alarm State

|

Time Stamp

|

Subcode

|

Value

Others

| Grant Deny

|

Grant

|

Deny

Query Device

Standard parameters

A9-9

FA0909.ai

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 10. METHOD>
APPENDIX 10. METHOD

A10.1 Transducer Block
METHOD is a program to facilitate the parameter settings. Set TR block to "O/S", for parameter setting by METHOD. (1) Setup Wizard Method
Setup Wizard Method
Display the start message

Auto

Check the Mode.Actual (automatically judgement)

OOS
Set the following parameter: TEMPERATURE_UNIT PROCESS_TEMP *1

Check the SENSOR_STATUS (automatically judgement)
Standard
Jump to method of FLUID_TYPE

Built-in Temp Sensor
Jump to method of THERMOMETER_FUNCTION

Set the following parameters: DENSITY_UNIT
PROCESS_DENSITY *1
Do you want to set the following parameter: CHARACTERIZE_METER
No

Yes
Set following parameter: SIZE_SELECT BODY_TYPE
VORTEX_SENSOR_TYPE K_FACTOR_UNIT K_FACTOR *1

Display the PV Range value

Display the end message END

*1: Skip mode including

Sub-method FLUID_TYPE

No

Do you want to set the following parameter:

FLUID_TYPE

Yes

Cancel (Abort)
Setup Wizard terminating

Set the following parameter: FLUID_TYPE
Liquid: Volume Gas/Steam: Volume
Liquid: Mass Gas/ Steam: Mass

Gas: STD/ Normal

Set the following parameter:

BASE_TEMP

*1

Set the following parameters: PRESSURE_UNIT
PROCESS_PRESSURE BASE_PRESSURE *1

Set the following parameter: DEVIATION *1

END

*1: Skip mode including

FA1001.ai

A10-1

IM 01F06F00-01EN

(1) Continued

Setup Wizard terminating

Cancel (Abort)

Sub-method THERMOMETER_FUNCTION
Do you want to set the following parameter: THERMOMETER_FUNCTION
Yes
Set the following parameter: THERMOMETER_FUNCTION

<APPENDIX 10. METHOD>

A10-2

No (Skip)

Not Use
Jump to method of FLUID_TYPE

Saturated Steam

Monitor Only
Jump to method of FLUID_TYPE

Superheat Steam
Set the following parameters: PRESSURE_UNIT
PROCESS_PRESSURE *1

Gas: STD/ Normal Set the following parameter:
BASE_TEMP *1
Set the following parameters: PRESSURE_UNIT
PROCESS_PRESSURE BASE_PRESSURE *1
Set the following parameter: DEVIATION *1

Set the following parameters:
SECONDARY_VALUE_FTIME CABLE_LENGTH *1

Liquid: Mass
Set the following parameters: DENSITY_UNIT BASE_DENSITY *1
Set the following parameter: BASE_TEMP *1
Set the following parameters: FIRST_TEMP_COEF
SECOND_TEMP_COEF *1

END

*1: Skip mode including

FA1002.ai

IM 01F06F00-01EN

(2) Noise Balance Wizard Method
Noise Balance Wizard Method
Display the start message

Auto Auto

Check the Mode.Actual (automatically judgement)
O/S
Set the following parameter: NOISE_BALANCE_MODE
Manual Set the following parameters:
NOISE_RATIO

<APPENDIX 10. METHOD>

A10-3

Tuning at zero
(automatically judgement) Check the NOISE_BALANCE_
MODE Manual
Display the following parameters: NOISE_BALANCE_MODE NOISE_RATIO TRIGGER_LEVEL

Tuning at zero

Display the end message END

(3) Reynolds Adjust Method
Reynolds Adjust Method

Display the start message

Auto

(automatically judgement)

Mode.Actual

O/S

Set the following parameter: REYNOLDS_ADJUST

NOT ACTIVE

ACTIVE

Set the following parameter:

PROCESS_DENSITY

*1

Set the following parameter:

VISCOSITY

*1

FA1003.ai

Display the end message END

*1: Skip mode including

FA1004.ai

IM 01F06F00-01EN

(4) Flow Adjust Method
Flow Adjust Method

Display the start message

Auto

(automatically judgement)

Mode.Actual

OOS

Set the following parameter: FLOW_ADJUST
NOT ACTIVE

Display the end message END

<APPENDIX 10. METHOD>

A10-4

ACTIVE

Do you want to set the following parameters:
FLOW_ADJ_FREQ FLOW_ADJ_DATA

EXIT

FLOW_ADJ_DATA

FLOW_ADJ_FREQ

Set the following parameter: FLOW_ADJ_FREQ(5 elements) *1

Set the following parameters: FLOW_ADJ_DATA(5 elements) *1

*1: Skip mode including
FA1005.ai

IM 01F06F00-01EN

A10.2 Enhanced AR Block
(1) Density Factor Setup Wizard
DENSITY FACTOR SETUP WIZARD
Display the start message

Not Man/OOS

(automatically judgement) Mode.Actual
Man/OOS

Set the following parameters: ARITH_TYPE

<APPENDIX 10. METHOD>

A10-5

FA1006.ai

IM 01F06F00-01EN

(1) Continued

<APPENDIX 10. METHOD>

A10-6

FA1007.ai

IM 01F06F00-01EN

(2) Flow Configuration Method
Flow Configuration Coef. method
Display the start message
Display the following parameters: CONFIG_ELEMENT01-16

Not Man/OOS

Do you want to change the Flow Config Parameters?
Yes
(automatically judgement) Mode.Actual
Man/OOS

Exit

Select the Flow Config Coef.

display mode

Show Flow Config. Parameters

Display the following parameters: CONFIG_ELEMENT01-16

Display the end message END

<APPENDIX 10. METHOD>

A10-7

Change Flow Config. Parameters
Enter an element number to change

Do you want to change

No

this element?

Yes

Set the following parameters: AR_FLOW_CONFIG_ELEMENT

FA1008.ai

IM 01F06F00-01EN

(3) Configuration Memo 2 Method
Configuration Memo 2 method

<APPENDIX 10. METHOD>

A10-8

Display the end message
FA1009.ai
IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 11. SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD (Option /EE)>

A11-1

APPENDIX 11. SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD (Option /EE)

A11.1 Benefits of Software Download
This function enables you to download software to field devices via a FOUNDATION Fieldbus to update their software. Typical uses are to add new features such as function blocks to existing devices, and to optimize existing field devices for your plant.

Update Program

New

I/O

Diagnostics

PID

AI

AI

Figure A11.1 Concept of Software Downloading

FA1101.ai

A11.2 Specifications
Current Draw (Steady-state): 15mA (max) Current Draw (Software Download state): 24mA
(max) Current during FlashROM blanking time:
Max. 24 mA additional to steady-state current Based on Fieldbus Foundation Specification Download class: Class 1
NOTE
Class 1 devices can continue the specified measurement and/or control actions even while software is being downloaded to them. Upon completion of a download, however, the devices will be reset internally to make the new, downloaded software take effect, and this will halt fieldbus communication and function block executions for about one minute.

A11.3 Preparations for Software Downloading
For software downloading, you need to prepare the following:
· Software download tool · Software for downloading file for each of the
target field devices
For the software download tool, use only a program developed for that purpose. For details, see the software's User's Manual. For information about updates of software binary files for field devices and how to obtain them, visit the following web site. http://www.yokogawa.com/fld/
CAUTION
Do not hook up the software download tool to a fieldbus segment while the plant is in operation, as it may temporarily disturb the communication. Always connect the tool before starting operation.

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 11. SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD (Option /EE)>

A11-2

NOTE
The download tool can not execute downloading during other system connects to the system/ network management VFD of the device.

A11.4 Software Download Sequence
The flowchart below outlines the software download procedure. Although the time taken for the entire procedure varies depending on the size of the field bus device's software, it generally take about 20 minutes where there is a one-to-one connection between a fieldbus device and download tool, and longer when multiple field devices are connected to the fieldbus.
Start download tool

Select file(s) Select device(s)

Select the software file(s) you want to download.
Select the device(s) to which you want to download software.

CAUTION
The current dissipation of the target field device increases transitorily immediately after a download due to erasing of the FlashROM's contents. Use a fieldbus power supply which has sufficient capacity to cover such increases in feed current.
CAUTION
Upon completion of the activation, the target fieldbus device performs resetting internally, which temporarily halts fieldbus communication and function block executions. Be especially careful about a valve positioner; the output air pressure will fall to the minimum level (i.e., zero).
CAUTION
Do not turn off the power to a field device or disconnect the download tool during a download or activation. The device may fail as a result.

Carry out download

Transmit the software to the field device(s).

Activate device(s)

Activate the device(s) to start with new software.

FA1102.ai

Figure A11.2 Flow of Software Download Procedure

CAUTION
Carrying out a software download leaves the PD tag, node address, and transducer block calibration parameters that are retained in the nonvolatile memory inside the target device, but may reset other parameters to the defaults (except a minor update that does not change the number of parameters). Hence, where necessary, save the parameters using an engineering tool, parameter setting utility, or the like before carrying out a software download, and then reconfigure the field device(s) after the download. For details, read APPENDIX 11.6 "Steps after Activating a Field Device."

NOTE
Be careful about the noise on the fieldbus link. If the fieldbus is noisy, the downloading may take a very long time or fail.
A11.5 Download Files
Download files have the following filenames (with the filename extension of ".ffd"). Take care to choose the correct download file for the target field device:
"594543" + device family + "_" + device type + "_" + domain name + "_" + software name + "_" + software revision + ".ffd"
For example, the name of the download file for the DYF. may have the following name:
5945430009_0009_DYF.-SD_ORIGINAL_R202. ffd

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 11. SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD (Option /EE)>
The device type is "0009" for the digitalYEWFLO. The software name is "ORIGINAL" or "UPDATE." The former indicates an original file and the latter an update file. Whenever performing a download to update the device revision, obtain the original file. In general, an addition to the parameters or blocks requires a device revision update.

A11.6 Steps after Activating a Field Device
When the communication with a field device has recovered after activating the device, check using the download tool that the software revision of the field device has been updated accordingly. The value of SOFT_REV of the resource block indicates the software revision. The PD tag, node address, and transducer block calibration parameters that are retained in the nonvolatile memory inside the target device will remain unchanged after a software download. However, after a software update which causes an addition to the block parameters or blocks, or to the system/network management VFD parameters, some parameters may be reset to the defaults, thus requiring parameter setup and engineering again. For details, read Table A11.1. Also note that a change in the number of parameters or blocks requires the DD and capabilities files corresponding to the new software revision.

Table A11.1 Actions after Software Update

Contents of Software Update

Action

Does not change the number Re-setup of parameters not

of parameters.

needed.

Adds a block parameter.

Setup of the added parameter needed.

Adds a block.

Reengineering and setup of the added block's parameters needed.

Changes the number of

Reengineering needed.

system/network management

VFD parameters.

A11-3

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 11. SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD (Option /EE)>
A11.7 Troubleshooting
For information on the download tool's error messages, see also the software's User's Manual.

A11-4

Table A11.2 Problems after Software Update

Symptom An error occurs before starting a download, disabling the download. An error occurs after starting a download, disabling the download.
The download takes far longer than expected or fails frequently. An error occurs after activation. The new software does not work after the activation.

Cause

Remedy

The selected download file is not for the selected field device.

Check SOFTDWN_ERROR in the resource block and obtain the correct file.

You attempted to update the device revision by Check SOFTDWN_ERROR in the resource downloading a file which is not an original file. block and obtain the original file.

The selected field device does not support software downloading.

Check whether the option code /EE is included in the model and suffix codes of the device.

The voltage on the fieldbus segment falls below Check the capacity of the field bus power

the specified limit (9 volts).

supply used and the voltage at the terminal.

There was an error in a checksum or the number of transmission bytes.

Check SOFTDWN_ERROR in the resource block and obtain the correct file.

The download tool does not allow download with same software revision.

Check the setting of the download tool.

The fieldbus segment is noisy.

Check the noise level on the fieldbus segment.

Transient error caused by the internal resetting Check whether communication with the field

of the field device

device has recovered after a while.

The file of the current revision was downloaded. Obtain the correct file.

Failure of the memory in field device, etc.

Check SOFTDWN_ERROR in the resource block, and re-try downloading. If fails, place a service call.

A11.8 Resource Block's Parameters Relating to Software Download

Table A11.3 Additional Parameters of Resource Block

Relative Index
53

Index 1053

Parameter Name
SOFTDWN_ PROTECT

Default (Factory Set)
0x01

Write Mode
AUTO

54

1054 SOFTDWN_

FORMAT

0x01

55

1055 SOFTDWN_COUNT 0

AUTO --

56

1056 SOFTDWN_ACT_ 0

--

AREA

57

1057 SOFTDWN_MOD_ 1, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,

--

REV

0, 0, 0

58

1058 SOFTDWN_ERROR 0

--

Description
Defines whether to accept software downloads. 0x01: Unprotected 0x02: Protected
Selects the software download method. 0x01: Standard
Indicates the number of times the internal FlashROM was erased.
Indicates the ROM number of the currently working FlashROM. 0: FlashROM #0 working 1: FlashROM #1 working
Indicates the software module revision.
Indicates an error during a software download. Read Table A11.4 for error codes.

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 11. SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD (Option /EE)>

Table A11.4 Download Error Codes

Error Code 0 32768 32769 32770 32771 32772 32773 32774 32775 32776 32777 32778 32779 32780 32781 32782 32783 32784 32785 32786 32787 32788 32789 32790 32791 32792 32793 32794 32795 32796 32797 32798 32799 32800 32801 36863

Detail No error Unsupported header version Abnormal header size Abnormal manufacturer ID Abnormal device family Abnormal device revision Abnormal vendor specification version Abnormal number of modules Abnormal number of bytes in module 1 Abnormal number of bytes in module 2 Device error in module 1 Checksum error in module 1 Checksum error in file Unused Write-prohibited area in FlashROM Verification error during FlashROM writing Polling error during FlashROM erasing Polling time-out during FlashROM erasing Polling error during FlashROM writing Polling time-out during FlashROM writing FlashROM driver undefined number error File endcode error File type error (UPDATE, ORIGINAL) FlashROM driver undefined number error On-start state error (other than DWNLD_NOT_READY) Start segment error in module 1 Binary file error Binary file error Device error in module 2 Detection of EEPROM state other than backup after activation Checksum error in module 2 Not in DWNLD_READY state when receiving GenericDomainInitiate Not in DWNLD_OK state when receiving GenericDomainTerminate Not in DOWNLOADING state when receiving GenericDomainSegment Firmware error Unused

A11-5

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 11. SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD (Option /EE)>

A11-6

A11.9 System/Network Management VFD Parameters Relating to Software Download

A11.9.1 Parameter List

Table A11.5 System/Network Management VFD Parameters

Index (SM) 400
410

Parameter Name DWNLD_PROPERTY
DOMAIN_DESCRIPTOR

Sub Index
0 1 2
3
4 5 6 0

Sub-parameter Name
Download Class Write Rsp Returned For ACTIVATE Write Rsp Returned For PREPARE Reserved ReadyForDwnld Delay Secs Activation Delay Secs

420 DOMAIN_HEADER.1 430 DOMAIN_HEADER.2 440 DOMAIN

1 Command 2 State 3 Error Code 4 Download Domain Index 5 Download Domain Header
Index 6 Activated Domain Header
Index 7 Domain Name 0 1 Header Version Number 2 Header Size 3 Manufacturer ID 4 Device Family 5 Device Type 6 Device Revision 7 DD Revision 8 Software Revision 9 Software Name 10 Domain Name 0 1 Header Version Number 2 Header Size 3 Manufacturer ID 4 Device Family 5 Device Type 6 Device Revision 7 DD Revision 8 Software Revision 9 Software Name 10 Domain Name

Write Mode: R/W = read/write; R = read only

Default (Factory Set)

Write Mode

Remarks

R

1

1

1

0 300 60
R/W Read/write-permitted only for sub-index 1
3 1 0 440 420

430

(Device name)

0 0

0 0

1 44 0x594543 (DEV_TYPE of RB) (DEV_TYPE of RB) (DEV_REV of RB) (DD_REV of RB) (SOFT_REV of RB) ORIGINAL (Device name)

Read/write: prohibited Get-OD: permitted

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 11. SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD (Option /EE)>
A11.9.2 Descriptions for Parameters

A11-7

IMPORTANT
Do not turn off the power to a field device immediately after changing parameter settings. Data writing actions to the EEPROM are dual redundant to ensure reliability. If the power is turned off within 60 seconds after setup, the parameters may revert to the previous settings.

(1) DWNLD_PROPERTY

Sub Index
1

Element Download Class

2

Write Rsp Returned For

ACTIVATE

3

Write Rsp Returned For

PREPARE

4

Reserved

5

ReadyForDwnld Delay Secs

6

Activation Delay Secs

Size (Bytes)
1
1
1
1 2
2

Description
Indicates the download class. 1: Class 1
Indicates whether a write response is returned to the ACTIVATE command. 1: Write Response Returned
Indicates whether a write response is returned to the PREPARE command. 1: Write Response Returned
(Reserved)
Indicates the maximum delay after receipt of the PREPARE_FOR_DWNLD command to proceed to transition from DWNLD_NOT_READY to DWNLD_READY.
Indicates the maximum delay after receipt of the ACTIVATE command to proceed to transition from DWNLD_OK to DWNLD_NOT_READY.

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 11. SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD (Option /EE)>

A11-8

(2) DOMAIN_DESCRIPTOR

Sub Index
1

Element Command

2

State

3

Error Code

4

Download Domain Index

5

Download Domain Header Index

6

Activated Domain Header Index

7

Domain Name

Size (Bytes)
1
1
2 4 4 4 8

Description
Reads/writes software download commands. 1: PREPARE_FOR_DWNLD (instruction of download preparation) 2: ACTIVATE (activation instruction) 3: CANCEL_DWNLD (instruction of download cancellation)
Indicates the current download status. 1: DWNLD_NOT_READY (download not ready) 2: DWNLD_PREPARING (download under preparation) 3: DWNLD_READY (ready for download) 4: DWNLD_OK (download complete) 5: DOWNLOADING (download underway) 6: CHECKSUM_FAIL (not used in this product) 7: FMS_DOWNLOAD_FAIL (failure during download) 8: DWNLD_INCOMPLETE (download error detected at restart) 9: VCR_FAIL (not used in this product) 10: OTHER (download error other than 6 and 7 detected)
Indicates the error during a download and activation. 0: success, configuration retained (download successfully completed) 32768 - 65535: Download error (See Table 4 for error codes.)
Indicates the index number of the domain for software downloading.
Indicates the index number of the domain header to which the download is performing.
Indicates the index numbers of the domain header currently running.
Indicates the domain name. With this product, Domain Name indicates the field device name.

(3) DOMAIN_HEADER

Sub Index
1
2
3

Element
Header Version Number Header Size Manufacturer ID

4

Device Family

5

Device Type

6

Device Revision

7

DD Revision

8

Software Revision

9

Software Name

10 Domain Name

Size (Bytes)
2 2 6
4
4 1 1 8 8
8

Description
Indicates the version number of the header.
Indicates the header size.
Indicates the value of resource block's MANUFAC_ID (manufacturer ID) as character string data.
Indicates the device family. With this product, Device Family indicates the value of resource block's DEV_TYPE as character string data.
Indicates the value of resource block's DEV_TYPE as character string data.
Indicates the value of resource block's DEV_REV.
Indicates the value of resource block's DD_REV.
Indicates the value of resource block's SOFT_REV.
Indicates the attribute of the binary file. With this product, Software Name indicates either of the following: "ORIGINAL" followed by one space: Original file "UPDATE" followed by two spaces: Update file
Indicates the domain name. With this product, Domain Name indicates the field device name.

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 12. DEVICEVIEWER WINDOW EXECUTED FROM PRM (Plant Resource Manager)>

A12-1

APPENDIX 12. DEVICEVIEWER WINDOW EXECUTED FROM PRM (Plant Resource Manager)

With DeviceViewer, it is possible to display whether or not the hardware status and configuration are normal as the result of self-diagnosis performed by an FF-H1 device. (Read IM 33Y05Q10-11E.) The following figure shows an example of the DeviceViewer window displayed for the digitalYEWFLO module.

[Refresh] button [Stop] button [Set Refresh Period] button

If several alarms were generated, the items are displayed in sequential cycles.

FA1201.ai IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 12. DEVICEVIEWER WINDOW EXECUTED FROM PRM (Plant Resource Manager)>

A12-2

Table A12.1 Hardware Failure

Alarm item Alarm No.

Description

AMP. Module Failure 1 (AL-01)

AL-01

The EEPROM(S) failed. (AL-01) [Remedy]: Contact the nearest office or service center.

COM. Circuit Failure 1 (AL-02)

AL-02

The serial communication circuit in the amplifier failed (type 1 error). (AL-02) [Remedy]: Contact the nearest office or service center.

COM. Circuit Failure 2 (AL-03)

AL-03

The serial communication circuit in the amplifier failed (type 2 error). (AL-03) [Remedy]: Contact the nearest office or service center.

AMP. Module Failure 2 (AL-04)

AL-04

The EEPROM(F) failed. (AL-04) [Remedy]: Contact the nearest office or service center.

Flow Sensor Failure (AL-05)

AL-05

The flow sensor failed. (AL-05) [Remedy]: Contact the nearest office or service center.

Input Circuit Failure (AL-06)

AL-06

The input circuit in the amplifier failed. (AL-06) [Remedy]: Contact the nearest office or service center.

Temp. Converter Failure (AL-07)

AL-07

The temperature circuit in the amplifier failed. (AL-07) [Remedy]: Contact the nearest office or service center.

Temp. Sensor Failure (AL-08)

AL-08

The temperature sensor failed. (AL-08) [Remedy]: Contact the nearest office or service center.

Parameter
RS DEVICE_ STATUS_2 bit0
RS DEVICE_ STATUS_2 bit1
RS DEVICE_ STATUS_2 bit2
RS DEVICE_ STATUS_1 bit19
RS DEVICE_ STATUS_2 bit3
RS DEVICE_ STATUS_2 bit4
RS DEVICE_ STATUS_2 bit5
RS DEVICE_ STATUS_2 bit6

Table A12.2 Transducer Status

Alarm item Alarm No.

Description

Parameter

Flow Rate Over Range (AL-41)

AL-41

Flow rate is over the range. (AL-41) [Remedy]: This case is out of specifications. Check the process flow.

RS DEVICE_ STATUS_4 bit7

Flow Span Exceed Limit (AL-42)

AL-42

The flow rate span setting exceeds the range limit. (AL-42) [Remedy]: Check the TB and AI1 parameters.

RS DEVICE_ STATUS_4 bit6

Temp. Over Range (AL-43)

Temperature is over the range. (AL-43) AL-43 (Regulated in the upper or lower limit value)
[Remedy]: This case is out of specifications. Check the process temperature.

RS DEVICE_ STATUS_4 bit5

Transient Vibration (AL-51)

AL-51

The transient vibration makes the current flow rate output constant. (AL-51) [Remedy]: Check the pipeline condition. When this alarm occurs several nearest office or service center.

time,

contact

the

RS DEVICE_ STATUS_4 bit3

High Vibration (AL-52)

AL-52

The high vibration makes the current flow rate output zero. (AL-52) [Remedy]: In case of outputting the current flow rate, Change the value of High vibration output select in TB Alarm Perform(TB.ALARM_PERFORM) to ON. When this alarm occurs several time, contact the nearest office or service center.

RS DEVICE_ STATUS_4 bit2

Clogging (AL-53)

AL-53

The shedder bar is clogged with a material. (AL-53) [Remedy]: Remove a material according to device manual (IM 01F06F00-01EN).

RS DEVICE_ STATUS_4 bit1

Fluctuating (AL-54)

AL-54

The current flow rate is fluctuating more than 20%. (AL-54) [Remedy]: Check the pipeline condition. When this alarm occurs nearest office or service center.

several

time,

contact

the

RS DEVICE_ STATUS_4 bit0

Indicator Over Range (AL-61)

Indicator is over the range. (AL-61) AL-61 [Remedy]: Check the value of AI1 Transducer Scale (AI1.XD_SCALE) or AI1 Output
Scale (AI1.OUT_SCALE).

RS DEVICE_ STATUS_4 bit0

SoftDL Incomplete

Software download is incomplete. - [Remedy]: Check the cables, power, and RB Softdown Error (RB.SOFTDOWN_
ERROR).

RS DEVICE_ STATUS_1 bit24

SoftDL Failure

-

Software download failed.

RS DEVICE_

[Remedy]: Check the download file and RB Softdown Error (RB.SOFTDOWN_ERROR). STATUS_1 bit25

Abnormal Boot Process

Abnormal boot processing was detected at the time of startig. - [Remedy]: Check cable, power and RB.SOFTDWN_ERROR (RB.SOFTDOWN_
ERROR).

RS DEVICE_ STATUS_1 bit26

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 12. DEVICEVIEWER WINDOW EXECUTED FROM PRM (Plant Resource Manager)>

A12-3

Table A12.3 Configuration(Mandatory)

Alarm item Alarm No.

Description

RB in O/S Mode (AL-21)

AL-21

Resource Block is in O/S mode. (AL-21) [Remedy]: Change the RB Block Mode. Target (RB.MODE_BLK.Target) to Auto mode.

TB in O/S Mode (AL-22)

AL-22

Transducer Block is in O/S mode. (AL-22) [Remedy]: Change the TB Block Mode. Target (TB.MODE_BLK.Target) to Auto mode.

AI1 in O/S Mode (AL-23)

AL-23

AI1 Block is in O/S mode. (AL-23) [Remedy]: Change the AI1 Block Mode. Target (AI1.MODE_BLK.Target) to Auto or other mode. In addition, check that RB Block Mode. Actual (RB.MODE_BLK.Actual) is set to Auto mode.

AI1 in Man Mode (AL-62)

AL-62

AI1 Block is in Manual mode. (AL-62) [Remedy]: Change the AI1 Block Mode. Target (AI1.MODE_BLK.Target) to Auto or other mode.

AI1 Simulation Active (AL-63)

AI1 Block is in simulation mode. (AL-63) AL-63 [Remedy]: Change the AI1 Simulation Enable/Disable (AI1.SIMULATE_ENABLE) to
Disabled.

AI1 Not Scheduled (AL-64)

AL-64

AI1 Block is not scheduled. (AL-64) [Remedy]: Make a schedule of AI1 Block.

Parameter RS DEVICE_ STATUS_1 bit22 RS DEVICE_ STATUS_3 bit25
RS DEVICE_ STATUS_3 bit24
RS DEVICE_ STATUS_3 bit18
RS DEVICE_ STATUS_3 bit17
RS DEVICE_ STATUS_3 bit16

Table A12.4 Configuration(Optional)

Alarm item Alarm No.

Description

AI2 in O/S Mode (AL-24)

AL-24

AI2 Block is in O/S mode. (AL-24) [Remedy]: Change the AI2 Block Mode. Target (AI2.MODE_BLK.Target) to Auto or other mode. In addition, check that RB Block Mode. Actual (RB.MODE_BLK.Actual) is set to Auto mode.

AI2 in Man Mode (AL-65)

AL-65

AI2 Block is in Manual mode. (AL-65) [Remedy]: Change the AI2 Block Mode. Target (AI2.MODE_BLK.Target) to Auto or other mode.

AI2 Simulation Active (AL-66)

AI2 Block is in simulation mode. (AL-66) AL-66 [Remedy]: Change the AI2 Simulation Enable/Disable (AI2.SIMULATE_ENABLE) to
Disabled.

AI2 Not Scheduled (AL-67)

AL-67

AI2 Block is not scheduled. (AL-67) [Remedy]: Make a schedule of AI2 Block.

AI3 in O/S Mode (AL-28)

AL-28

AI3 Block is in O/S mode. (AL-28) [Remedy]: Change the AI3 Block Mode. Target (AI3.MODE_BLK.Target) to Auto or other mode. In addition, check that RB Block Mode. Actual (RB.MODE_BLK.Actual) is set to Auto mode.

AI3 in Man Mode (AL-77)

AL-77

AI3 Block is in Manual mode. (AL-77) [Remedy]: Change the AI3 Block Mode. Target (AI3.MODE_BLK.Target) to Auto or other mode.

AI3 Simulation Active (AL-78)

AI3 Block is in simulation mode. (AL-78) AL-78 [Remedy]: Change the AI3 Simulation Enable/Disable (AI3.SIMULATE_ENABLE) to
Disabled.

AI3 Not Scheduled (AL-79)

AL-79

AI3 Block is not scheduled. (AL-79) [Remedy]: Make a schedule of AI3 Block.

DI1 in O/S Mode (AL-25)

AL-25

DI1 Block is in O/S mode. (AL-25) [Remedy]: Change the DI1 Block Mode. Target (DI1.MODE_BLK.Target) to Auto or other mode. In addition, check that Block Mode. Actual (RB.MODE_BLK.Actual) is set to Auto mode.

DI1 in Man Mode (AL-68)

AL-68

DI1 Block is in Manual mode. (AL-68) [Remedy]: Change the DI1 Block Mode. Target (DI1.MODE_BLK.Target) to Auto or other mode.

DI1 Simulation Active (AL-69)

DI1 Block is in simulation mode. (AL-69) AL-69 [Remedy]: Change the DI1 Simulation Enable/Disable (DI1.SIMULATE_ENABLE) to
Disabled.

DI1 Not Scheduled (AL-70)

AL-70

DI1 Block is not scheduled. (AL-70) [Remedy]: Make a schedule of DI1 Block.

Parameter
RS DEVICE_ STATUS_3 bit23
RS DEVICE_ STATUS_3 bit14
RS DEVICE_ STATUS_3 bit13
RS DEVICE_ STATUS_3 bit12
RS DEVICE_ STATUS_5 bit27
RS DEVICE_ STATUS_5 bit 23 RS DEVICE_ STATUS_5 bit22
RS DEVICE_ STATUS_5 bit21
RS DEVICE_ STATUS_3 bit22
RS DEVICE_ STATUS_3 bit10
RS DEVICE_ STATUS_3 bit9
RS DEVICE_ STATUS_3 bit8

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 12. DEVICEVIEWER WINDOW EXECUTED FROM PRM (Plant Resource Manager)>

A12-4

Alarm item Alarm No.

Description

DI2 in O/S Mode (AL-26)

AL-26

DI2 Block is in O/S mode. (AL-26) [Remedy]: Change the DI2 Block Mode. Target (DI2.MODE_BLK.Target) to Auto or other mode. In addition, check that RB Block Mode. Actual (RB.MODE_BLK.Actual) is set to Auto mode.

DI2 in Man Mode (AL-71)

AL-71

DI2 Block is in Manual mode. (AL-71) [Remedy]: Change the DI2 Block Mode. Target (DI2.MODE_BLK.Target) to Auto or other mode.

DI2 Simulation Active (AL-72)

DI2 Block is in simulation mode. (AL-72) AL-72 [Remedy]: Change the DI2 Simulation Enable/Disable (DI2.SIMULATE_ENABLE) to
Disabled.

DI2 Not Scheduled (AL-73)

DI2 Block is not scheduled. (AL-73) AL-73 [Remedy]: Make a schedule of DI2 Block.

Simulation Switch ON

Software or hardware simulation switch is ON. - [Remedy]: Change the value of RB Sim Enable Message (RB.SIM_ENABLE_MSG) or
turn off the hardware simulation switch.

Parameter
RS DEVICE_ STATUS_3 bit21
RS DEVICE_ STATUS_3 bit6
RS DEVICE_ STATUS_3 bit5
RS DEVICE_ STATUS_3 bit4
RS DEVICE_ STATUS_1 bit23

Table A12.5 Others

Alarm item Alarm No.

Description

PID in O/S Mode (AL-27)

AL-27

PID Block is in O/S mode. (AL-27) [Remedy]: Change the PID Block Mode. Target (PID.MODE_BLK.Target) to Auto or other mode. In addition, check that RB Block Mode. Actual (RB.MODE_BLK.Actual) is set to Auto mode.

PID in Bypass Mode (AL-74)

AL-74

PID Block is in Bypass mode. (AL-27) [Remedy]: Change the value of PID Bypass (PID.BYPASS) to OFF.

IT in O/S Mode (AL-29)

AL-29

IT Block is in O/S mode. (AL-29) [Remedy]: Change the IT Block Mode. Target (IT.MODE_BLK.Target) to Auto or other mode. In addition, check that RB Block Mode. Actual (RB.MODE_BLK.Actual) is set to Auto mode.

IT in Man Mode (AL-80)

IT Block is in Manual mode. (AL-80) AL-80 [Remedy]: Change the IT Block Mode. Target (IT.MODE_BLK.Target) to Auto or other
mode.

IT Not Scheduled (AL-81)

AL-81

IT Block is not scheduled. (AL-81) [Remedy]: Make a schedule of IT Block.

IT Total Backup Err (AL-82)

AL-82

IT Total backup failed. Last IT Output.Value (IT.OUT.Value) could not saved. (AL-82) [Remedy]: Contact the nearest office or service center.

IT Conf. Err (AL-83)

AL-83

IT Clock Period (IT.CLOCK_PER) is smaller than IT Period of Execution (IT. EXECUTION_PERIOD). (AL-83) [Remedy]: Change the value as IT Clock Period (IT.CLOCK_PER) is larger than IT Period of Execution (IT.EXECUTION_PERIOD).

AR in O/S Mode (AL-30)

AL-30

AR Block is in O/S mode. (AL-30) [Remedy]: Change the AR Block Mode. Target (AR.MODE_BLK.Target) to Auto or other mode. In addition, check that RB Block Mode. Actual (RB.MODE_BLK.Actual) is set to Auto mode.

AR in Man Mode (AL-84)

AR Block is in Manual mode. (AL-84) AL-84 [Remedy]: Change the AR Block Mode. Target (AR.MODE_BLK.Target) to Auto or other
mode.

AR Not Scheduled (AL-85)

AL-85

AR Block is not scheduled. (AL-85) [Remedy]: Make a schedule of AR Block.

AR Range Conf. Err (AL-86)

AL-86

AR Range High (AR.RANGE_HI) is smaller than AR Range Low (AR.RANGE_LOW). (AL-86) [Remedy]: Change the value as AR Range High (AR.RANGE_HI) is larger than AR Range Low (AR.RANGE_LO).

AR Temp. IN Over Range (AL-87)

AR Input1 (AR.IN_1) is over range. (AL-87) AL-87 [Remedy]: This case is out of specification. Read IM, Check the engineering setting or
AR Temperature Unit (AR.AR_TEMPERATURE_UNIT).

AR Press IN Over Range (AL-88)

AR Input2 (AR.IN_2) is over range. (AL-88) AL-88 [Remedy]: This case is out of specification. Read IM, Check the engineering setting or
AR Pressure Unit (AR.AR_PRESSURE_UNIT) and AR Bias Input2 (AR.BIAS_IN_2).

Parameter
RS DEVICE_ STATUS_3 bit20
RS DEVICE_ STATUS_3 bit2
RS DEVICE_ STATUS_5 bit26
RS DEVICE_ STATUS_5 bit19 RS DEVICE_ STATUS_5 bit18 RS DEVICE_ STATUS_5 bit17
RS DEVICE_ STATUS_5 bit16
RS DEVICE_ STATUS_5 bit25
RS DEVICE_ STATUS_5 bit14
RS DEVICE_ STATUS_5 bit13
RS DEVICE_ STATUS_5 bit12
RS DEVICE_ STATUS_5 bit11
RS DEVICE_ STATUS_5 bit10

IM 01F06F00-01EN

<APPENDIX 12. DEVICEVIEWER WINDOW EXECUTED FROM PRM (Plant Resource Manager)>

A12-5

Alarm item Alarm No.

Description

Parameter

AR Flow IN NotConnected (AL-89)

AL-89

AR Input (AR.IN) is not connected to the volumetric flow. (AL-89) [Remedy]: Connect the volumetric flow data into AR Input (AR.IN).

RS DEVICE_ STATUS_5 bit9

AR Temp. IN NotConnected (AL-90)

AL-90

AR Input1 (AR.IN_1) is not connected to the temperature. (AL-90) [Remedy]: Connect the temperature data into AR Input1 (AR.IN_1).

RS DEVICE_ STATUS_5 bit8

AR Press IN NotConnected (AL-91)

AL-91

AR Input2 (AR.IN_2) is not connected to the pressure. (AL-91) [Remedy]: Connect the pressure data into AR Input2 (AR.IN_2).

RS DEVICE_ STATUS_5 bit7

AR Comp. Coef. Conf. Err (AL-92)

AL-92

AR Compensation Coefficient (AR.AR_FLOW_CONFIG.Element) changed unexpected.

Therefore AR Output (AR.OUT.Value) is uncertainty. (AL-92)

RS DEVICE_

[Remedy]: Set the AR Compensation Coefficient (AR.AR_FLOW_CONFIG.element) STATUS_5 bit6

again.

AR Output Unit Conf. Err (AL-93)

AL-93

AR Output Range. Units Index (AR.OUT_RANGE.Unit Index) is not selected rightly the

corresponding to AR Arithmetic Type (AR.ARITH_TYPE) (AL-93).

RS DEVICE_

[Remedy]: Read IM or Check the AR Output Range. Units Index (AR.OUT_RANGE.Unit STATUS_5 bit5

Index) and AR Arithmetic Type (AR.ARITH_TYPE).

Table A12.6 Additional Information

Alarm item Output of AI1 Total Output of AI2 Output of DI1 Output of DI2

Alarm No.

Description

The primary value calculated as a result of executing the function in AI1

Indicates the totalized value

The primary value calculated as a result of executing the function in AI2

The primary value calculated as a result of executing the function in DI1

The primary value calculated as a result of executing the function in DI2

Parameter AI01. OUT AI01. TOTAL AI02. OUT DI01. OUT_D DI02. OUT_D

IM 01F06F00-01EN

i
Revision Information
 Title:Model DY Vortex Flowmeter Model DYA Vortex Flow Converter Fieldbus Communication Type
 Manual No.: IM 01F06F00-01EN

Edition 1st 2nd 3rd 4th
5th
6th

Data

Page

Revised Item

May 2003

-

New publication

July 2003

· Added appendix 7 (DeviceViewer) · Unification of alarm contents

October 2004

· Standardized the Link Master function. · Revised FM intrinsically Safe Approval.

January 2005

1-2 3-2 4-1 4-2 4-3 5-1 5-2 5-4 6-3 8-1 9-1 9-4 A-13 A-39 A-40 A-42

· Added scriptions to "Safe Use of This Product". · Revised a clerical error. · Revised descriptions and clerical errors. · Revised descriptions. · Revised descriptions and clerical errors. · Revised descriptions and clerical errors. · Revised clerical errors. · Revised a sentence. · Added descriptions. · Added descriptions. · Revised a sentence. · Revised sentences. · Added a description to "Tag numbers". · Revised a Node address number. · Revised a Node address numbers and Figure A6-3. · Revised a description of "Default Factory Setting" of Index number 367.

August 2008

3-1 3-2 4-2 4-3 5-6 5-7 5-9 5-11 6-1 6-2 6-3, 6-4 6-5, 6-6 6-7 7-2 8-1 to 8-3 9-1 to 9-5 A-1 to A-39 A-41 to A-60 A-71 A-80 to A-88 A-89 to A-96 A-98, A-99 A-99 A-105

· Addition and revision to 3.2.2 (2). · Added A13, AR and IT blocks into Figure 3.1. · Added DEVICE INFORMATION. · Revision of 4.4. · Revision of 5.6.4. · Addition into Table 5.11. · Addition into Table 5.12. · Addition into Table 5.16. · Correction of 6.1. · Addition into 6.3 · Correction of 5), 8), 15), 17), 20), 21). · Addition and revision to 6.4. · Addition and revision to 6.5. · Revision of Table 7.1. · Addition and revision to 8. · Addition and revision to 9. · Addition and revision to Appendix 1 to 3. · Addition Appendix 5 and 6. · Revision. · Added notes. · Added Appendix 10. · Revision. · Revision of A11.5. · Revision of Appendix 12.

August 2012

9-3, 9-4

· Revision for Explosion proof

10-1, 10-2, 10-4, 10-5 · Revision for Explosion proof

10-6

· Correction

10-11, 10-12 · Added IECEx

10-13

· Revision for Explosion proof

IM 01F06F00-01EN

ii

Edition 7th
8th 9th 10th

Data October 2013
July 2015 November 2015
August 2019

Page
Cover Contents 1-1 to 1-4
2-1 3-1 to 3-2
4-1 4-2 to 4-3
4-4 5-1 to 5-5 5-7 to 5-14 5-13 to 5-14 6-2 to 6-7 7-1 to 7-3 8-1 to 8-3 9-1 to 9-5 10-1 to 10-4 10-5 to 10-13
10-14 A1-1 to A1-11 A2-2 to A2-3 A3-1 to A3-15
A5-2 A5-4 A5-8 A5-9 A5-10 A6-1 A6-3 A6-4 to A6-5 A6-6 A6-8 to A6-9 A6-10 A7-1 A7-3 A7-4 A7-6 A7-8 A8-2 to A8-4 A8-5 to A8-8 A10-1 to A10-8 A11-1 to A11-2 A11-4 A12-1 to A12-5
9-1 9-2 to 10-14
Whole 9-2
9-4 to 9-6 10-1 to 10-16
9-1 9-2 9-5 9-6 10-1, 2, 3, 5 10-9, 10, 11

Revised Item
· Addition of logos · Correction · Revision of Chapter 1 · Correction of Chapter 2 · Correction of Section 3.1 to 3.3 · Correction of Section 4.1 · Correction of Section 4.3 and 4.4 · Correction of Section 4.7 · Correction of Section 5.1 to 5.5 · Correction of Subection 5.6.3 and 5.6.4 · Addition of Table 5.16 and Table 5.17 · Correction of Section 6.2 to 6.5 · Correction of Section 7.2 and 7.3 · Revision of Chapter 8 · Revision of Chapter 9 · Revision of Section 10.1 · Correction of Section 10.2 to 10.4 · Revision of Section 10.5 · Correction of Appendix 1 · Correction of Appendix 2.2 and 2.3 · Revision of Appendix 3 · Correction of Appendix 5.2.1 · Correction of Appendix 5.3.1 · Correction of Appendix 5.6.1 · Correction of Appendix 5.6.3 · Correction of Appendix 5.7 · Correction of Appendix 6 · Correction of Appendix 6.2.4 · Correction of Appendix 6.3.1 to 6.3.3 · Correction of Appendix 6.4.1 and 6.4.2 · Correction of Appendix 6.5 · Addition of Appendix 6.7 · Correction of Appendix 7.1 · Correction of Appendix 7.4 · Correction of Appendix 7.5.1 · Correction of Appendix 7.5.2 · Correction of Appendix 7.6 · Correction of Appendix 8.3 to 8.5 · Correction of Appendix 8.9 to 8.17 · Correction of Appendix 10 · Correction of Appendix 11.2 to 11.4 · Correction of Appendix 11.8 · Revision of Appendix 12
· Revision of EMC Conformity Standards · Including Manual Change No.14-013-V-E
· Change from "refer to" to "read" · Revision of Electrical Specifications · Revision of Section 9.3 · Revision of Chapter 10
Add Note 4. Add Note 4. Revion of ATEX. Revion of IECEx. Revision of ATEX. Revision of IECEx.

IM 01F06F00-01EN